Casio Fx 9860GII SD_9860GII_9860G AU PLUS_9750GII_7400GII 9860GII_Soft Soft AR
User Manual: Casio fx-9860GII_Soft fx-9860GII, fx-9860GII SD | الآلات الحاسبة | الدليل | CASIO
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 473
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AR
fx-9860GII SD
) fx-9860GIIﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ (2.09
) fx-9860G AU PLUSﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ (2.09
) fx-9750GIIﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ (2.04
) fx-7400GIIﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ (2.04
)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ (2.09
ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ
ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ
http://edu.casio.com
ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ
http://world.casio.com/manual/calc
• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ.
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ.
i
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ -ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 1-1........................................................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ1-2..........................................................................................................................................................................
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ1-5..........................................................................................................................................
ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ1-10 .......................................................................................................
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )1-22 ........................................................................................................................................ (OPTN
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ )1-23 ......................................................................................................................... (VARS
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )1-26 ........................................................................................................................................ (PRGM
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺕ1-26 .....................................................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ1-30 ........................................................................................................................................
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ1-31 .................................................................................................................................
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ2-1...................................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ 2-6.........................................................................................................................................................
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ2-10 .......................................................................................................................
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ2-12 ....................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ2-21 ...................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ2-30 ............................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ,ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ,ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ2-33 ................................ .
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ2-36 ................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ2-49 .............................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 2-53 ...............................................................................................................
.1
.2
.3
.4
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ3-1................................................................................................................................................
ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3-5...............................................................................................................................................
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ3-10 ........................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ3-13 ...................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 3
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 4
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
.1ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ4-1..........................................................................................................................................
.2ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ4-2.............................................................................
.3ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ 4-4.............................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 5ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ Graphing
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ 5-1........................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ5-3................................................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ5-6...................................................................................................................................................
ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ5-10 ............................................................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ5-11 .............................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ 5-12 .............................................................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ 5-15 .....................................................................................................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ 5-20 ..........................................................................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ 5-22 ................................................................................................................................................
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ 5-27 ...........................................................................................................................................
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ5-27 ......................................................................................................................................
ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ5-29 ......................................................................................................................................................
ii
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ6-1..................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ 6-4...........................................................
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ6-10 ........................................................
ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ 6-16 ..........................................................................................................................
ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ6-23 ......................................................................................................................................................................
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ6-37 ..............................................................................................................................................................
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ 6-40 ..........................................................................................................................................................................
ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ6-52 .....................................................................
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ6-55 .................................................................................................................................................
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ7-1.........................................................................................................................
ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ7-2..............................................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ7-3.............................................................................................................................................................
ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ( 7-5.................................................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ 7-7...........................................................................................................................................................
ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ 7-9...................................................................................................................................................
ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ،ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﻫﺎﻣﺶ7-10 ...................................................................................................................................
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ /ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ7-11 ............................................................................................................................
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ 7-12 ................................................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ 7-14 ....................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ 7-16 ...................................................................................................
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ8-1....................................................................................................................................
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ8-2............................................................................................................................
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ8-3..........................................................................................................................................
ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ8-5.....................................................................................................................................................................
ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ 8-7................................................................................................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ8-21 .................................................................................................
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ8-37 ................................................................................................................................ .
ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ8-42 ........................................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )(TVM
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
.1ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ 9-1.........................................................................................................................
.2ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ 9-2.........................................................................................................................................
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHTﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ 9-14 ...............................................................................................................
.4ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ 9-15 ...................................................................................................................................................................
.5ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 9-20 ........................................................................................................................................... S • SHT
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ
.1
.2
.3
.4
eActivity
ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ 10-1 ...................................................................................................................................... eActivity
ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ 10-2 ..................................................................................................................................... eActivity
ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ 10-3 ..........................................................................................................................................eActivity
ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ10-4 .........................................................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
.1ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 11-1 ...........................................................................................................................................
iii
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
12-1 ............................................................................................................................................ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ.1
12-1 ......................................................................................................................................................... ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ.2
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
13-1 .............................................................................................................................................................. ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ
13-1 ..................................................................................................ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ
13-2 .....................................................................................................................................ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
13-5 ...................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
13-11 ...........................................................................................................................................ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
)ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔSDHC ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕSD ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ
(fx-9860GII SD
14-1 .............................................................................................................................................. SD ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ.1
14-3 .................................................................................................................................................. SD ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ.2
14-3 .............................................................................................................. ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎSD ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ.3
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ
α-1 ............................................................................................................................................. ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ.1
α-5 ........................................................................................................................................................ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ.2
E-CON2 Application (English)
(fx-9750GII)
E-CON2 Overview
Using the Setup Wizard
Using Advanced Setup
Using a Custom Probe
Using the MULTIMETER Mode
Using Setup Memory
Using Program Converter
Starting a Sampling Operation
Using Sample Data Memory
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
E-CON3 Application (English)
(fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS)
E-CON3 Overview
Using the Setup Wizard
Using Advanced Setup
Using a Custom Probe
Using the MULTIMETER Mode
Using Setup Memory
Using Program Converter
Starting a Sampling Operation
Using Sample Data Memory
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity
iv
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ
0
kﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ
uﳕﺎﺫﺝ -ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻻ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ fx-9860GII SDﻭ ﻟﺮﲟﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻰﺀ.
uﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ ,ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GIIﺍﻭ fx-9860G AU
PLUSﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻭﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻮﺍﺭﻕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﲔ .ﻓﻲ
" ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹶ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ" ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺀ ,ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ .ﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GIIﺍﻭ fx-9860G
AU PLUS
ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GIIﺍﻭ .fx-9860G AU PLUS
• ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻄﻠﻊ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ " ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺭﺟﺎﺕ" ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ " ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺓ" ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-26
• ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻄﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ " ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-10
uﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII
ﻻ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ fx-7400GII, fx-9750GIIﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﻟﻬﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻲ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII
ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .
!x(') u
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ! ﺛﻢ xﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )'( .ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ﺑﲔ
ﻗﻮﺳﲔ.
) EQUA uﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ(
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻭﻻ ﹰ ,mﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (f, c, d, eﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . wﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ.
uﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
• ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ . 6
v
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻠﺔ ﻻﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ
ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ) 1(COMPﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 1ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ } {COMPﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻝ ) (gﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ 6ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 6ﻳﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
uﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ .ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Kﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ } {LISTﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛـ.[OPTION]-[LIST] :
• ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ 6ﻭ ) (gﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ.
uﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-37ﳝﻨﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ
ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ][VARS]-[FACT]-[Xfct
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ.
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (f, c, d, eﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1
ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻟﺔ.
.2ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ
• ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ eﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻏﻤﻖ
• ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ dﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ.
• ) 1(INITﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ.
.3ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ m
vi
(
kﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860GII/fx-9860G AU PLUSﻓﻘﻂ(
ﻳﻀﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) (Examination Modeﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ؛ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ .ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ.
ﻓﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻭﺿﻊ ،e • ACTﻭﻭﺿﻊ ،MEMORYﻭﻭﺿﻊ ،E-CON3ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ،PRGM
ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ )^ )ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ() : ،ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ() _ ،ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ(( ،ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ،
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ.
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺎ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ .ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ
ﹰ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
uﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !o(OFFﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
.2ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﲔ cﻭ ،hﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .o
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(Yes
• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .2
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
Language ،Q1Q3 Type ،Display ،Complex Mode ،Angle ،Frac Result ،Input/Output
vii
uﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ
15ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ
• ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻪ ) ( ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 60ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ.
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ a-ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ .ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .RESTART ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ.• ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ:
ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RESTART
ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻧﻌﻢ
ﻻ
ﻻ
ﻻ
uﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
) (1ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ USBﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.2ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ") "Select Connection Modeﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ،
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .FA-124
viii
.4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ.
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
• ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ FA-124ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ،ﻭﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﲡﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ.
) (2ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﲟﺮﻭﺭ 12ﺳﺎﻋﺔ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 12ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﹰ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RESTARTﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ،
ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ 12ﺳﺎﻋﺔ.
) (3ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،(Aﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،LINKﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
).4(CABL)2(3PIN
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ SB-62ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ Aﺑﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
)ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .(B
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،Aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(RECV
.4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،*Bﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ،LINKﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).3(EXAM)1(UNLK)1(Yes
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ Bﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .A
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ A
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،Bﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ،LINKﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(TRAN)1(MAIN)1(SEL
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "."SETUP
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(SEL)6(TRAN)1(Yes
* ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
uﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .LINK
) ... 3(EXAM)2(ENTRﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
) ... 3(EXAM)3(APPﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
) ... 3(EXAM)4(EXITﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
ix
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ -ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
.1ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
1
kﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
5-1
5-24
5-30
5-28
5-3
5-5
5-29
1-27
1-2
1-26
1-23
1-22
1-18,
2-14
2-15
2-14
2-15
2-14
2-14
10-10
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
2-7
1-2
2-30
2-14
2-14
2-19
10-11
2-6
1-2
2-1
1-19
2-19
2-1
1-11
1-12
1-18
2-19
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
Page
14
1-6,1-15
1-16
1-9
1-8
1-30
1-6
1-9
2-1
2-1
2-41
3-2
2-1
2-9
2-14
2-7
2-1
2-1
2-30
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ .ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺘﻚÍ.
1-1
kﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ
ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ.
ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
1
log
10x
!l
3
B
al
2
l
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺍﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ
•
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺍﺻﻔﺮ
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ! ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ
ﺍﺣﻤﺮ
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ aﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ
ﺍﻟﻔﺎ ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ aﺛﻢ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ,ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ! ﺛﻢ aﺳﺘﻐﻠﻖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ a
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ..
.2ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
kﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ
uﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ mﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺴﻴﺔ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (d,e,f,cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
1-2
ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﺗﺎﺭﺓ .
ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STAT
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ
ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻼﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ
ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ.
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
RUN
) fx-7400GIIﻓﻘﻂ(
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻓﻲ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ
ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ
ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺔ.*2
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
)ﺍﻹﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ( .ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
e • ACT*2
)(eActivity
eActivityﲤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻧﺺ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ،ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﺓ.ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﺺ
ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻎ ،ﺃﻭ ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ .ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ
ﻣﻦ 26ﻋﻤﻮﺩ × 999ﺧﻂ ،ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻭﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ، S•SHTﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ . STAT
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
RUN • MAT*1
)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ • ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
• ﻣﺘﺠﻪ(*2
STAT
)ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ(
S • SHT*2
)ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(
GRAPH
DYNA*1
)ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ(
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ
ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﲔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
CONICS*1
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ
ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ .ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ
ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﻭﻃﻲ
)ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ(
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺛﻨﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ،
ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ.
)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.
TABLE
RECUR*1
)ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ(
EQUA
PRGM
1-3
ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
TVM*1
)ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
E-CON2*3
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻴﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ EA-200ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺎ.
E-CON3*2
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ.
LINK
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
MEMORY
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
SYSTEM
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ،ﻭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ
ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ.
* 1ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝ . fx-7400GII
* 2ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝ . fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII
* fx-9750GII 3ﻓﻘﻂ
k
ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ 6 , 1ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻰﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﺓ.
k
ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ :ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﻣﻦ 21ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ 8ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ،ﻣﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ 127ﻋﺮﺿﺎ x 63ﻃﻮﻻ ﻧﻘﻂ.
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ
k
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ .ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﻲ.
1-4
uﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻲ
1.2E+12ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟـ 1.2 × 1012ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ
1.2ﺍﺛﻨﻰ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻻﺱ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ .ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ 1.200.000.000.000
1.2E–03ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝ 1.2 × 10–3ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ 1.2ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ
ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﺱ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ .ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ .0.0012
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| > 1010 ......................... 1
ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ 10–9 (0.000000001) > |x|, |x| > 1010 ......................... 2
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ .1
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 2-11ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ 1ﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ .2
k
ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻭ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ.
uﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ
..........................ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ :
12
23
456
uﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮ
..........................ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ 0ABCDEF1(16) :ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ
180150001
)(10
uﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ
..........................
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ 12° 34’ 56.78” :
• ﻭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
.3ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ
k
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭﻻ Aﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ
ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
= 2 + 3 – 4 + 10
Ac+d-e+baw
1-5
k
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ .wﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ .*1ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
) ..!D(INSﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻛﺎ ” “Iﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛـ ” “ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ.
* 1ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﲔ ,fx-7400GII/fx-9750GIIﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-29
uﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ
Acga
ddd
D
s
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ 369×× 2ﺍﻟﻰ 369 × 2
Adgj**c
dD
ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ،ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Dﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ.
uﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ 2.362ﺍﻟﻰ 2.362 sin
Ac.dgx
ddddd
s
1-6
k
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ eﺍﻭ d
ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ eﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ .ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ d
ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ" ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ) .(1-17
4.12 × 6.4 = 26.368
4.12 × 7.1 = 29.252
Ae.bc*g.ew
dddd
)!D(INS
h.b
w
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ Aﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ fﺍﻭ cﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(.ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺟﻌﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :2
Abcd+efgw
cde-fghw
A
)ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(
f
)ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺘﻴﻦ (
f
• ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ , Aﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺮ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .A
k
ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
14 ÷ 0 × 2.3ﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ 14 ÷ 10 × 2.3
Abe/a*c.d
1-7
w
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
ﻳﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﳌﻜﺎﻥ
ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﺎ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ
db
ﻧﻔﹼ ﺬ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
w
k
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ) ﺃﻭ ﻗﹼﺺ( ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ.
• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ
ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/
ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ " )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-18
uﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (Iﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) .!i(CLIPﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﺍﻟﻲ ” “.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ.
.3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(COPYﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ.
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺗﺎﺭﺓ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ
ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ
.1
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (Iﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )!i(CLIP
ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻲ ” “.
1-8
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ.
.3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(CUTﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ .
ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ
uﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!j(PASTE
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
A
)!j(PASTE
k
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ
ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ
.1ﺇﺻﻐﻂ ) !e(CATALOGﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﳊﺮﻓﻴﺔ
• ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮ.
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(CTGYﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻐﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ
ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (c , fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(EXEﺃﻭ .w
• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﺮﺕ.
.4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ .ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ.
.5ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (c, fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(INPUTﺍﻭ .w
1-9
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
A!e(CATALOG)I(C)c~cw
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﻠﻮﺝ.
.4ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﻬﻢ!
• ﺍﻝ fx-7400GIIﻭ fx-9750GIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Mathﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ " ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ /ﺍﻻﺧﺮﺍﺝ" ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ(1-29ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/
ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ,ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ.
• ﻭﻛﻞ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﲢﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺩﺃﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻝ"ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-26ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ.
ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻝ"ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺁﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ " )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-26ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ.
• ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ )ﻟﻴﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ( .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ )) !D(INSﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-6ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻟﻬﺎ
ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-14
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻓﻜﻞ ﺃﻻﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RUN • MAT
1-10
k
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
uﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺗﻪ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ "ﺑﺎﻳﺖ" ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ
ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ /ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ(
1
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﺗﻠﻂ*
ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ
ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ(
v
9
(!v
14
M
4
x
4
)!)(x –1
5
'
)'(!x
6
)'!((3
9
)'!M(x
9
)!I(ex
6
)!l(10x
6
)
ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ
ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ex
10x
ﺑﺎﻳﺖ
)log(a,b
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
7
) Absﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ(
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ* (
6
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
7
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ* (
7
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
8
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
11
)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
14*5
2
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ*
3
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ*
2
3
ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ*
Σﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ*
3
4
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ
ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ(
)ﻭ(
1
) } ( !/ﻭ
) ] ( !-ﻭ ) [ (!+
) { (*!
1
1
* 1ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﺗﻠﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
* 2ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATH
ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ
* 3ﻻﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
* 4ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺏ Σﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ .1ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
* 5ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .2 × 2
uﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) . 4(MATHﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻟﻠﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ
1-11
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
• } } ... {MATﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ،ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
• }} ... {2×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 2 × 2ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ{
• }} ... {3×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 3 × 3ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ{
• }} ... {m×nﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ mﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ) nﺇﻟﻰ {(6 × 6
• }} ... {2×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 2 × 1ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
• }} ... {3×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 3 × 1ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
• }} ... {1×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 1 × 2ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
• }} ... {1×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 1 × 3ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
• }} ... {logabﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻡ }{logab
• }} ... {Absﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ |{ |X
)d f(x
• } } ... {d/dxﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ x = a
2 dx
d
• }} ... {d2/dx2ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ { 2 f(x)x = a
dx
b
• }} … {∫dxﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ { f(x)dx
{
• }(} … {Σﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ Σﳊﺴﺎﺏ
β
a
){ Σ f(x
α
x=α
uﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :١
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 23 + 1
AcM
d
e
+b
w
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :٢
2
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 1+ 2
5
A(b+
(
)
v
cc
1-12
f
e
)x
w
1
1+
0
x + 1dx ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
:3 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
Ab+4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx)
v+b
ea
fb
e
w
2×
1
2
2
2
1
2
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
Ac*4(MATH)1(MAT)1(2×2)
vbcc
ee
!x(')ce
1-13
:4 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
e!x(')ceevbcc
w
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻲ
ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺳﻬﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
uﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﻳﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ .ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ
ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ) 120ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺪ.
uﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ“(2+3)”,ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ
ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺠﺔ ﻝ ' ،ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ )(2+3
ﻣﺜﻼ:
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺮﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )!D(INS
ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ )'(
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )'( !xﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ '.
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺭﺝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ' ﻭ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺠﺘﻬﺎ.
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﳝﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ) !D(INSﺣﺠﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲢﺪﺩ
ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﹰ .ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ
ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ) ،(sin(30) ،log2(4ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(.
1-14
ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ
ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
v
ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
M
'
)'(!x
ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ
)'!((3
ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
)'!M(x
ex
10x
)log(a,b
)!I(ex
)!l(10x
)4(MATH)2(logab
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ
)4(MATH)3(Abs
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ
)4(MATH)4(d/dx
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ
ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ
Σﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ
)4(MATH)5(d2/dx2
)4(MATH)6(g
)1(∫dx
)4(MATH)6(g
) (2(Σ
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) !D(INSﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-6
ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
uﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-6
ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ،ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ .D
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﻟﻴﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ
e
ﻟﻴﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ
d
1-15
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ
ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ (wﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻟﻺﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﹰ.
ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ)aD(UNDO
ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ).aD(UNDO
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .Aﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ Aﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺭﺟﺖ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )aD(UNDOﺳﻴﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ .A
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ eﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
) ، aD(UNDOﻓﺴﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ e
• ﻭ ﻳﻌﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ .ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) aD(UNDOﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .D
ﻣﺜﻼ
b+vbe
D
)aD(UNDO
c
A
)aD(UNDO
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ
ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ.
ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ
ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ" ﻋﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‘‘ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-26
• ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ .6×6ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ MatAnsﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
1-16
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ،1 × 6ﺃﻭ .6 × 1ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ
ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،VctAnsﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ .ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ListAnsﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(DEL)1(DEL • Lﺣﲔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ.
• ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻠﻄﺔ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﻣﺜﻼ2× 2 :
c*cvf
5
• ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ x Mﺃﻭ) !)(x–1ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ x Mﺃﻭ ) !)(x–1ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ.
)(dx)!)(x–1
ﻣﺜﻼ(32)–1 :
k
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﲢﺘﻔﻆ
ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﲔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ.
b+cw
*cw
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ
ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ.
ﻣﺜﻼ:
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ” “1+2ﺍﻟﻰ ” “1+3ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺩﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ
ffffdDdw
1-17
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ "" 0ﻻﻧﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ .
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
uﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ.
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) . !i(CLIPﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ” “.
.3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(CPY · Lﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ.
uﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻴﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!j(PASTE
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﺼﻘﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
• ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﺼﻞ 2ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ".
uﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
6 = 3
4 × 5 10
A6v4*5w
Ac(!E(π)v3e)w
)cos π = 1 (Angle: Rad
2
3
) (
A4(MATH)2(logab) 2e8w
log28 = 3
123 = 1.988647795
A!M(x') 7e123w
7
x
2 + 3 × 3 64 − 4 = 10
3
= 0.1249387366
4
A2+3*!M( ') 3e64e-4w
A4(MATH)3(Abs)l3v4w
log
1-18
A2v5e+3!v(()1e4w
2 + 3 1 = 73
5
4 20
1.5 + 2.3i = 3 + 23 i
2 10
A1.5+2.3!a(i)wM
A4(MATH)4(d/dx)vM3e+4
d 3
2
dx ( x + 4x + x − 6 ) x = 3 = 52
+ 3 x + 4 dx = 404
3
)
− 3k + 5 = 55
2
∫ 2x
5
1
6
∑ (k
2
vx+v-6e3w
A4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) 2vx+3v+4e1
e5w
)A4(MATH)6(g)2(Σ)a,(K)x-3a,(K
+5ea,(K)e2e6w
k=2
k
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﺇﺿﻐﻂ .!m(SET UP)1(Math)J
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(MATHﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .MATH
.3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(MATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }} … {2×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 2 × 2ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ{
• }} … {3×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 3 × 3ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ{
• }} … {m×nﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ mﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ) nﺍﻟﻰ {(6 × 6
• }} … {2×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 2 × 1ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
• }} … {3×1ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 3 × 1ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
• }} … {1×2ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 1 × 2ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
• }} … {1×3ﻳﺪﺧﻞ 1 × 3ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﳋﻄﲔ × ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ .
)3(m×n
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ.
cw
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ.
dw
w
1-19
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ
×8
33
1
2
1
6
5
13
4
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
bebvceedde
bdveeefege
*iw
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻝ Mat J
!c(Mat)!-(Ans)a
!c(Mat)a)(J)w
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻲ( ،ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .
D
⇐
k
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ
ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ:
(SOLV) RUN • MAT, e • ACT, GRAPH, DYNA, TABLE, RECUR, EQUA
ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
RUN • MAT, e • ACT, EQUA
ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ DYNA ,GRAPH
RECUR, TABLEﻭ EQUAﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.EQUA
1-20
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻸﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-11ﻭ "ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/
ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-18ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.RUN • MAT
• ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ
ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ، e • ACTﺍﻧﻈﺮ ’’ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ .‘‘eActivity
uﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ,GRAPHﻭ DYNAﻭ
,TABLEﻭ .RECUR
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ١
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ,ﺍﺩﺧﻞ , GRAPHﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
− x −1
2
'
2
y = xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
2
'
mGRAPHvxv!x(')c
ee-vv!x(')cee
-bw
)6(DRAW
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ٢
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ y = ∫0x 14 x 2− 12 x −1 dxﺍﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ . GRAPH
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
)mGRAPHK2(CALC)3(∫dx
bveevx-bvce
v-beaevw
)6(DRAW
1-21
uﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ EQUA
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ EQUAﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ )) (1(SIMLﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ )) ، (2(POLYﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ
ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ،ﻭ ' ،ﻭ πﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ(.
• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﻞ )) ، (3(SOLVﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ x2 + 3x + 5 = 0ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .EQUA
)mEQUA!m(SET UP
)cccc(Complex Mode
2(a+bi)J
2(POLY)1(2)bwdwfww
.5ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )(OPTN
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .K
• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Kﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺃﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ "ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ "Kﻓﻲ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ
) "PRGMﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-37
• ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﹰ
.PRGM
ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )*( ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
• }} ... {LISTﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{
• }} ... *{MATﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ* 1*) {1ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-9750GII
• }} ... {CPLXﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ{
• }} ... {CALCﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ{
• }} ... {STATﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ{ )(fx-7400GII
}ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ{ )ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ (fx-7400GII
• }} ... {CONVﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ{
• }} ... {HYPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ{
• }} ... {PROBﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ/ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {NUMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ{
1-22
• }} ... {ANGLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ /ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ،ﻭ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ /ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ{
• }} ... {ESYMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {PICTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ /ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
• }} ... {FMEMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ{
• }} ... {LOGICﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ{
• }} ... {CAPTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ{
• }} ... {TVMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ{
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Mathﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ PICTﻭ FMEMﻭ CAPTﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.6ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ )(VARS
ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
}{V-WIN}/{FACT}/{STAT}/{GRPH}/{DYNA}/{TABL}/{RECR}/{EQUA}/{TVM}/{Str
• ﻻﺣﻆ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ EQUAﻭ TVMﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) 3ﻭ (4ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﺃﻭ .PRGM
• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ Jﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺃﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ .
• ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ) ، (VARSﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ "ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ "Jﻓﻲ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) “PRGMﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-37
• ﻭﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ)*( ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
uﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ — V-WINﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ .V-
• }} ... {X}/{Y}/{T,θﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ}/{x-ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ}/{y -ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ {θ T
• }} ... {R-X}/{R-Y}/{R-T,θﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ}/{x-ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ}/{y-ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ {θ Tﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﳝﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
• }} ... {min}/{max}/{scal}/{dot}/{ptchﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{}/ﺍﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{}/ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ*/{1
}ﺧﻄﻮﺓ{.
* 1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ( ﺍﻗﺼﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ - Xﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ( Xﺍﳌﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ) .(126ﲢﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ.
u
— FACTﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ
• }} ... {Xfct}/{Yfctﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ }/{x -ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ {y-
u
— STATﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
• }} … {Xﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻣﺘﻐﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ {x-
• }} ... {n}/{¯x}/{Σx}/{Σx2}/{σx}/{sx}/{minX}/{maxXﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{}/ﻭﺳﻂ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ{/
}ﺍﻹﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{}/ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{
1-23
• }} ... {Yﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{y-
• }} ... {y}/{Σy}/{Σy2}/{Σxy}/{σx}/{sy}/{minY}/{maxYﻭﺳﻂ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x-ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ }/{y-ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{}/ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{
• }} ... {GRPHﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
• }} ... {a}/{b}/{c}/{d}/{eﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ{
• }} ... {r.}/{r2ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ{
• }} ... {MSeﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ{
• }} ... {Q1}/{Q3ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﻻﻭﻝ}/{-ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ{
• }} ... {Med}/{Modﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﻭﺿﻊ{ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
• } ... {Strt}/{Pitchﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺗﺮ }ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ{}/ﺧﻄﻮﺓ{
• }} ... {PTSﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ{
• }} ... {x1}/{y1}/{x2}/{y2}/{x3}/{y3ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ{
• }} ... *{INPTﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {n}/{¯x}/{sx}/{n1}/{n2}/{¯x1}/{¯x2}/{sx1}/{sx2}/{spﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ{}/ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ{}/ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ
ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ }/{١ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ }/{٢ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{١ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{٢ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{١ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{٢ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ {p
• *}} ... {RESLTﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {TESTﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ{
{p}/{z}/{t}/{Chi}/{F}/{ p
• ˆ }/{ pˆ 1}/{ pˆ 2}/{df}/{se}/{r}/{r 2}/{pa}/{Fa}/{Adf}/{SSa}/{MSa}/{pb}/{Fb}/
}{Bdf}/{SSb}/{MSb}/{pab}/{Fab}/{ABdf}/{SSab}/{MSab}/{Edf}/{SSe}/{MSe
} ...ﻗﻴﻤﺔ}/{p -ﻋﻼﻣﺔ }/{zﻋﻼﻣﺔ }/{tﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{χ2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{Fﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ{/
}ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{١ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{٢ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{}/ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ}/{p -ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{Fﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{/
}ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ}/{p -ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ /{F
}ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{} /ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Bﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ABﻗﻴﻤﺔ /{p -
}ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ABﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{Fﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ABﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ABﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ABﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{
}/ﺧﻄﺄ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{}/ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{}/ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{
• }} ... {INTRﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ{
• }} ... {Left}/{Right}/{ pˆ }/{ pˆ 1}/{ pˆ 2}/{dfﺍﺩﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ )ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ({}/ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ
ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭ )ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﳝﲔ({}/ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭ{}/ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺭ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{١ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ
ﻣﻘﺪﺭ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ }/{٢ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ{
• }} ... {DISTﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {p}/{xInv}/{x1Inv}/{x2Inv}/{zLow}/{zUp}/{tLow}/{tUpﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ }/{(p -ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ χ2,t, F-ﻭﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻭ
ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﺃﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ{}/ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﻫﺎﻣﺶ
ﳝﲔ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ )ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ({}/ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﳝﲔ({}/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ({}/ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﳝﲔ({/
}ﺃﺩﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ) t-ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ({}/ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐt-
)ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﳝﲔ({
u
— GRPHﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• }} ... {Y}/{rﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ{}/ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{
• } ... {Xt}/{Ytﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﻲ }{Xt}/{Yt
1-24
• }=X} ... {Xﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ{
• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
u
* — DYNAﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
• }} ... {Strt}/{End}/{Pitchﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{{}/ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{
u
— TABLﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺇﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• }} ... {Strt}/{End}/{Pitchﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{}/ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{
• }} ... {Reslt*1ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{
* 1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ TABLﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﻭ PRGMﻓﻘﻂ.
u
* — RECRﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ،*1ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
• }} ... {FORMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ{
• {an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/{cn}/{cn+1}/{cn+2} ... {an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/{cn}/
} {cn+1}/{cn+2ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ
• }} ... {RANGﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{
• } ... {Strt}/{Endﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ }ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ{
• } {a0}/{a1}/{a2}/{b0}/{b1}/{b2}/{c0}/{c1}/{c2} ... {a0}/{a1}/{a2}/{b0}/{b1}/{b2}/{c0}/{c1}/{c2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
• } ... {anSt}/{bnSt}/{cnStﺃﺻﻮﻝ } {an}/{bn}/{cnﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ /ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ(
• *}} ... {Reslt*2ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{*3
*1ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
“Reslt” *2ﺗﺘﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ RUN • MATﻭ PRGM
*3ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )(MatAns
— EQUA* uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ*2 *1
• } ... {S-Rlt}/{S-Cofﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻝ}ﺣﻠﻮﻝ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ*.3
• } ... {P-Rlt}/{P-Cofﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻝ }ﺣﻠﻮﻝ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﻴﺔ.
*1ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ).(MatAns
*2ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ. *3ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
u
* — TVMﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
• }} ... {n}/{I%}/{PV}/{PMT}/{FVﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻁ({}/ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ{/
}ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ{}/ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {P/Y}/{C/Yﻣﺪﺓ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ{}/ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ{
u
Str — Strﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ
• }} ... {Strﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ{
1-25
.7ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )(PRGM
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﺃﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﺃﻭ PRGMﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) .!J(PRGMﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ).(PRGM
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) (PRGMﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ” “Mathﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• }} ........ {COMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{
• }} .......... {CTLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{
• }} ....... {JUMPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ{
• }?{ } .............ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ{
• }^{ } .............ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ{
• }} ......... {CLRﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ{
• }} ........ {DISPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{
• }} ......... {RELﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ{
• } I/O} ............ {I/Oﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ /ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ{
• }{:
} .............ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ{
• }} ......... {STRﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ{
ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ) !J(PRGMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUN
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺃﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ PRGMﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ,ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﺍ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
• }} ......... {Progﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{
• }{:}/{REL}/{^}/{?}/{JUMP
ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .Comp
ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ“.
.8ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺕ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ .ﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺀﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
.1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ wﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUN
1-26
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) !m(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.
• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﹰ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ .ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ
.4ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ ( 6ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ.
.5ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
k
ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
ﹼ
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ
ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )*( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
u
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ(
• }} ... {Compﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ{
• }} ... {Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Octﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{}/ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{
u
) Frac Resultﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ(
• } ... {d/c}/{ab/cﻛﺴﻮﺭ }ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ{}/ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ{
u
) Func Typeﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
ﲢﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ vﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﹼ
• }=} ... {Y=}/{r=}/{Parm}/{Xﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ )ﻧﻮﻉ )}/{((Y= f(xﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{/
}ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﻚ{}/ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ )ﻧﻮﻉ ){(( x= f(Y
• }) {Y>}/{Y<}/{Yt}/{Ys} ... {y>f(x)}/{y}/{X<}/{Xt}/{Xs} ... {x>f(y)}/{x, <, ≥,
#ﻭ )ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ( ،ﻭ )ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ(
$ﺃﻭ ) Xor ،ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ( ،ﺃﻭ ) xnor ، xor ،ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ(
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ) (fnﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )Yn, rn, Xtn, Ytn,
(Xnﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ .ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ) ،fn1(fn2ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ) fn1°fn2ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(5-7ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ:
) = Radﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ( 2 + 3 × (log sin2π2 + 6.8) = 22.07101691
1
2
3
4
5
6
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ،ﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ Σﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ /ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ،ﻭ
RndFixﺃﻭ logabﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ . RndFix
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ،ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ.
})exIn 120 → ex{In( 120
ﻭ ﺇﻻ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ.
• ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ.
• ﻛﻞ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﻳﺤﻈﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
)ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ (fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860GII/fx-9860G AU PLUS
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ )ﺑﺘﻀﻤﲔ ' ﺃﻭ (π
ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ" ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
' )ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ :ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ(
'2+
'8 = 3
2
!x(')ce+!x(')iw
2-3
uﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ '
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ' ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺪﺗﲔ.
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
'b ± d
e
'± a
'b, ± d ± a
'b, ± a
f
c
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ) (a، b، c، d، e، fﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
'.
1 < a < 100, 1 < b < 1000, 1 < c < 100
0 < d < 100, 0 < e < 1000, 1 < f < 100
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺗﻬﺎ )(a, c, d
ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ ' Aﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﻡ
f.ﻭ cﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻝ ´* c
'´ b + d
e
'a
'b + d
'´e → a
´c
c
f
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺳﻤﺎ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ' ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ´) (a,́ c,́ dﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ).(a, c, d
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
'3 + 11
2
' 3
'2 10
'
+
=
110
11 10
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
'2 × (3 – 2
'5) = 6 – 4
5
'35
' 2 × 3 = 148.492424 (= 105
2)*1
ﺷﻜﻞ'
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
'150
2
= 8.485281374*1
25
'23 × (5 – 2
'3) = 35.32566285 (= 115 – 46
3)*1
'
'2+
'3+
'=8
'3 + 3
2
'2+
'3+
6 = 5.595754113*2
'
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
ﺷﻜﻞ'
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
* 1ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ
* 2ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻻﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ.
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻭﻟﻮ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ
ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻦ.
' (1 +
'2+
' – 3) (1
'–2
'3) (= – 4 – 2
)6
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
= –8.898979486
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ' ﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻜﺴﺮ ،ﻓﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ.
' log3 +
2 = 1.891334817
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
2-4
uﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ π
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ πﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ nπ
nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻲ |.|106
b
b
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ πﺃﻭ a π
c
c
b b
ﻟﻜﻦ} ،ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ + aﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ +bﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ {cﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ 9ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ
c c
ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ cﺛﻼﺙ.*2
aﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ*1*2 .
*1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ c < bﻓﺎﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ aﻭ bﻭ cﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﺩﺍ ﺣﲔ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ) ( b
c
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﺘﻠﻂ ) .(a bc
*2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻓﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ .
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
78π × 2 = 156π
πﺷﻜﻞ
123456π × 9 = 3490636.164 (= 11111104 π)*3
ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
568
71
π = 105
π
824
103
129
π *4
1619
2
πﺷﻜﻞ
105
258
π = 6.533503684
3238
ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
2
*3ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻻﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ | |106ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ .
*4ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻻﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ . a bc π
k
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ )×( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ 1) Aﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-2ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ 6) Cﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(2-2ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :١
)3, 2Pol(5, 12
'2sin30, 10log1.2, 2
• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :٢
2π, 2AB, 3Ans, 3Y1
• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﲔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :٣
)3(5 + 6), (A + 1)(B – 1
2-5
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ،
ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 1
))6 ÷ (2(1 + 2
→
)6 ÷ 2(1 + 2
))6 ÷ (A(1 + 2
→
)6 ÷ A(1 + 2
)1 ÷ ((2 + 3)sin30
→
1 ÷ (2 + 3)sin30
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ،ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2
→
)6 ÷ (2π
6 ÷ 2π
'2 ÷ (2
)2
'2 ÷ 2
→ 2
)4π ÷ (2π
→
4π ÷ 2π
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ
ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ( ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
) ( 13
4
) ( sin 2
5
2
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
→
1
1
): 2
3
3
→
× (2
4
4
): sin 2
5
5
× (sin 2
kﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ
ﲟﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺟﺪﻭﻝ
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ . α-1
• ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ.
kﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ .ﻓﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟـ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﻲ b :ﻭ cﻭ dﻭ sinﻭ cosﻭ tanﻭ logﻭ inﻭ ' ﻭ . π
ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﻲ ، d/dx(, Mat, Vct, Xmin, If, For :ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،
ﺳﻮﺭﺕ A(, PxIOn, Sum, and an+1
• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .1-11
.2ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ..
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ
193.2aav(A)w
193.2
193.2 ÷ 23 = 8.4
av(A)/23w
8.4
193.2 ÷ 28 = 6.9
av(A)/28w
6.9
2-6
kﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
uﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ(
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺏ 28ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ
ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ
ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ 15ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﺪﻟﻴﻞ.
ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ plus r ،ﻭ . θﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﹼ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺣﲔ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
uﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ .
]ﻗﻴﻤﺔ[ ] aﺍﺳﻢ
ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ[ w
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ١
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ 123ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ .A
Abcdaav(A)w
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ٢
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ 456ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﻭ ﳋﺰﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ .B
Aav(A)+efga
al(B)w
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ aﺍﺳﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ )~( a3ﺍﺳﻢ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺁﺧﺮw
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ rﺃﻭ θﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ..
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝ 10ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﺧﻼﻝ .F
)Abaaav(A
a3(~)at(F)w
uﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ rﺃﻭ xﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ) ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ (20ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ.
ﻭ ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻛﺤﺠﺔ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-18
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ” “ABCﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ 1ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ 1ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ.
)A!a( A -LOCK)E(”)v(A
)ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ(l(B)I(C)E(”)a
aJ6(g)5(Str)*bw
5(Str)*bw
)* fx-7400GII: 6(Str
String is displayed justified left.
2-7
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
uﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
][OPTN]-[FMEM
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ .ﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻃﻮﻝ ،ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻜﻢ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ GRAPHﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.
• }} ... {STO}/{RCL}/{fn}/{SEEﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{}/ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{}/ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ
ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ{}/ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{.
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) (A+B) (A–Bﻛﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 11
))(av(A)+al(B
))(av(A)-al(B
*)K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM
1(STO)bw
)* fx-7400GII: 2(FMEM
JJJ
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺧﺰﻧﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ aﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ..
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 1
*)AK6(g)6(g)3(FMEM
2(RCL)bw
)* fx-7400GII: 2(FMEM
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
Adaav(A)w
baal(B)w
)K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM)*3(fn
b+cw
)* fx-7400GII: 2(FMEM
2-8
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ
*)K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM
)4(SEE
)* fx-7400GII: 2(FMEM
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ١
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
A
*)K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM
1(STO)bw
)* fx-7400GII: 2(FMEM
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
kﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ.
ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) wﻭﺍﻻ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ w
ﺧﻄﺄ( ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ.
• ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ ١٥ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﺍﺳﻲ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Aﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻔﺄ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
123 + 456 = 579
789 – 579 = 210
Abcd+efgw
hij-!-(Ans)w
ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII
• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎ ) ﻧﺤﻮ faal(B)w
2-9
ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-17
• ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎ ) (faal(B)wﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ
ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
=1÷3
=1÷3×3
Ab/dw
(Continuing)*dw
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ^(xy), x', ° ’ ”,(x2, x–1, x!, on page 2-2), +, –,B
.3ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
][SET UP]- [Angle
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﻇﻠﻞ "ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ"
.1
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . J
• }} ... {Deg}/{Rad}/{Graﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ { }/ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{ }/ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ {
• ﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ..
ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ = 400ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ 360° = 2π
ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ = 100ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ 90° = π/2
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
][SET UP]- [Display
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﻇﻠﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ"
.1
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• } } ... {Fix}/{Sci}/{Norm}/{Engﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ { }/ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ {/
} ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ { }/ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ {
2-10
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ )(Fix
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
1(Fix)cw
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ
).(n = 0 to 9
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )(Sci
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ
2(Sci)dw
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ).(n = 0 to 9
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ 0ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ .10
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )(Norm 1/Norm 2
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(Normﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ Norm 1ﻭ . Norm 2
Norm 1: 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| >1010
Norm 2: 10–9 (0.000000001) > |x|, |x| >1010
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )(Eng mode
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 4(Engﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ .ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ” “/Eﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻔﻌﻞ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﻣﺜﻞ 2,000
(= 2 × 103) → 2k
× 10–3
)m (milli
× 1018
)E (Exa
× 10–6
)µ (micro
× 1015
)P (Peta
× 10–9
)n (nano
× 1012
)T (Tera
× 10–12
)p (pico
× 109
)G (Giga
× 10–15
)f (femto
× 106
)M (Mega
× 103
)k (kilo
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 1000ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻔﻌﻞ.
2-11
.4ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
kﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ.
• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ . K
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .PRGM
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ )(HYP
][OPTN]-[HYP
• } ... {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanhﺯﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ }{sine}/{cosine}/{tangent
• } ... {sinh–1}/{cosh–1}/{tanh–1ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ }{sine}/{cosine}/{tangent
uﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ /ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )(PROB
][OPTN]-[PROB
• }!} ... {xﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{
• }} ... {nPr}/{nCrﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ{}/ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ{
• }} ... {RANDﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ{
• }} ... {Ran#}/{Int}/{Norm}/{Bin}/{Listﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ) 0ﺍﻟﻰ }/{(1ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ{ }/ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻂ μﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ
ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ }/{σﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻱ nﻭ
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ }/{ pﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ) 0ﺍﻟﻰ (1ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ {ListAns
• }( ... {P(}/{Q(}/{Rﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ }){P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t
• }(} ... {tﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ){t(x
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ
][OPTN]-[NUM
• }} ... {Absﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ{
• } ... {Int}/{Fracﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﺰﺀ }ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ{}/ﻛﺴﺮ{.
• }} ... {Rndﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻝ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ )ﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ( ،ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ )} (Fixﻭ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) (Sciﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ{
• }} ... {Intgﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{
• }} ... {RndFiﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) 0ﺍﻟﻰ ) (9ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ {.(2-2
• }} ... {GCDﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ{
• }} ... {LCMﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ{
• }} ... {MODﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ )ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ nﺏ {(m
• }} ... {MOD • Eﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺣﲔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ) ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﲔ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ nﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ pﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ nﻭ {(m
2-12
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ )(ANGL
][OPTN]-[ANGL
• }} ... {°}/{r}/{gﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{}/ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
• }” ’ } ... {°ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(،ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ،ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ{
• }” ’ } ... {°ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ{
• ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ }” ’ {°ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• }( ... {Pol(}/{Recﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ}ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ{}/ﻗﻄﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{
• }} ... {'DMSﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ{
uﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ )(ESYM
][OPTN]-[ESYM
• } } ... {m}/{μ}/{n}/{p}/{fﻣﻠﻲ )}/{(10–3ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ )}/{(10–6ﻧﺎﻧﻮ )}/{(10–9ﺑﻴﻜﻮ )}/{(10–12ﻓﻴﻤﺘﻮ ){(10–15
• }} ... {k}/{M}/{G}/{T}/{P}/{Eﻛﻴﻠﻮ )}/{(103ﻣﻴﻐﺎ )}/{(106ﺟﻴﻐﺎ )}/{(109ﺗﻴﺮﺍ )}/{(1012ﺑﻴﻄﺎ )/{(1015
}ﺍﻳﻜﺰﺍ ).{(1018
• } ... {ENG}/{ENGﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻰ }ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ{}/ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ{ﻭ
}ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ{}/ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ{ ﺍﻷﺱ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ.
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎ ﹰ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﻓﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ
ﹼ
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ } {ENGﻭ } {ENGﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ 4.25ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ
243.5070629
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ:
4.25K6(g)5(ANGL)**2(r)w
47.3° + 82.5rad = 4774.20181°
47.3+82.5K6(g)5(ANGL)**2(r)w
˝2°20´30˝ + 39´30˝ = 3°00´00
2K6(g)5(ANGL)**4(° ’ ”) 204(° ’ ”) 30
!m(SET UP)cccccc*1(Deg)J
4(° ’ ”)+04(° ’ ”)394(° ’ ”) 304(° ’ ”)w
)” ’ 5(°
˝2.255° = 2°15´18
2.255K6(g)5(ANGL)**6(g)3('DMS)w
)* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccccc ** fx-7400GII: 4(ANGL
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ .
)ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ = 100ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ
π
2
2-13
= (90°
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
cos ( π rad) = 0.5
3
!m(SET UP)cccccc*2(Rad)J
c(!E(π)/3)w
!m(SET UP)cccccc*1(Deg)J 2 • sin 45° × cos 65° = 0.5976724775
2*s45*c65w*1
sin–10.5 = 30°
!s(sin–1) 0.5*2w
)sin x = 0.5ﺣﲔ (x
* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccccc
*1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ *.
*2ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ.
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
log 1.23 (log101.23) = 0.08990511144
l1.23w
log28 = 3
K4(CALC)*6(g)4(logab) 2,8)w
(–3)4 = (–3) × (–3) × (–3) × (–3) = 81
(-3)M4w
7
7!M(x')123w
1
123 (= 123 7 ) = 1.988647795
)* fx-7400GII: 3(CALC
• ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ،ﻣﺜﻞ .2 M 3 M 2 :
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ2^3^2 = 64 :
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ:
2
23 = 512
ﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺜﻞ .2^(3^(2)) :
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
sinh 3.6 = 18.28545536
K6(g)2(HYP)*1(sinh) 3.6w
cosh–1
K6(g)2(HYP)*5(cosh–1)(20/15)w
20
= 0.7953654612
15
)* fx-7400GII: 1(HYP
2-14
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
!x(') 2+!x(')5w
'
'2 +
5 = 3.65028154
(–3)2 = (–3) × (–3) = 9
(-3)xw
8! (= 1 × 2 × 3 × .... × 8) = 40320
8K6(g)3(PROB)*11(x!)w
ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻝ - 3.5؟
K6(g)4(NUM)*22(Int)-3.5w
–3
)*1 fx-7400GII: 2(PROB) *2 fx-7400GII: 3(NUM
kﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )(RAND
uﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )(0 to 1) (Ran#, RanList#
ﻳﻮﻟﺪ Ran#ﻭ RanList# 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ 0ﺍﻟﻰ 1ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻼ .ﻳﻌﻴﺪ Ran#ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ RanList#ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ Ran#ﻭ .RanList#
10
)]RanNorm# (σ, μ [,n
ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ .ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝ nﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ
• ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝ nﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
2-16
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ
)K6(g)3(PROB)*4(RAND)3(Norm
8,68)w
)RanNorm# (8, 68
)ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﲢﺼﻴﻠﻬﺎ
ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ
ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ 68ﺳﻢ ﻭ
ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ (.8
)K6(g)3(PROB)*4(RAND)3(Norm
8,68,5)w
)RanNorm# (8,68,5
)ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺴﻢ ﳋﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
)* fx-7400GII: 2(PROB
uﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ )(RanBin#
ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺛﺮﻱ nﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ . p
0 0ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ.
2-26
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
tol = 1E – 4
(2x2 + 3x + 4) dx
5
1
∫
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )f (x
AK4(CALC)* 4(∫dx)cvx+dv+e,
)* fx-7400GII: 3(CALC
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ.
b,f,
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ.
bE-e)w
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = (Deg
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﹼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ.
) (1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ.
b
f(x)dx
c
∫
c
f(x)dx +
) (Sﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ
∫
a
b
= f(x)dx
∫
ﺍﳉﺰﺀ
) (Sﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ
a
) (Sﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ
) (Sﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ
) (2ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﲢﺴﺐ
ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺍ )ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ.
x
2
f(x)dx +.....
∫
x
1
x
1
f(x)dx +
∫
a
= f(x)dx
f(x)dx
b
∫
x
4
b
∫
a
+
• ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ Aﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ )ﺣﲔ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (Radﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ )ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺼﻴﻞ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻣﺢ.
2-27
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ،f(xﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Xﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ Zﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ
(,X, r, θﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ) (tolﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺬﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ) ، (tolﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ 1E–5
• ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻞ ﻭ
RndFixﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ logabﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ 1E–5ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
Σ kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ
]([OPTN]-[CALC]-[Σ
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ، Σﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ..
) K4(CALC)* 6(g)3(Σ( ) ak , k , α , β , n
)* fx-7400GII: 3(CALC
β
+ aα +1 +........+ aβ
Σ a =a
α
k
k=α
= )(a k, k, α, β, n
Σ
) :nﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ(
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:
)– 3k + 5
2
6
Σ (k
k=2
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ n=1ﻛﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ
)AK4(CALC)*6(g)3(Σ( )a,(K
x-da,(K)+f,
a,(K),c,g,b)w
)* fx-7400GII: 3(CALC
Σﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ
• ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﶈﺪﻭﺩ ﺧﻼﻝ Σﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻊ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ
ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺻﻮﺻﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ . ak
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ) (αﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ akﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ) (βﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ . ak
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ βﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺃﻭﻝ . α
ﻭ ﺇﻻ ،ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Σﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ . A
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ Σﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻞ ﻭ RndFixﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ logabﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ Σﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ) (nﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ 1ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
2-28
kﻷﺩﻧﻰ /ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
][OPTN]-[CALC]-[FMin]/[FMax
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ /ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭ
ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ . a < x < b
uﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
) K4(CALC)* 6(g)1(FMin) f (x) , a , b , n
)* fx-7400GII: 3(CALC
) :aﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ :b ،ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ :n ،ﺩﻗﺔ ) n=1ﺍﻟﻰ ((9
uﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
) K4(CALC)* 6(g)2(FMax) f (x), a , b , n
)* fx-7400GII: 3(CALC
) :aﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ :b ،ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ :n ،ﺩﻗﺔ ) n=1ﺍﻟﻰ ((9
ﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ a=0ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻯ
ﹼ
،b=3ﻣﻊ ﺩﻗﺔ n=6ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
.y = x2 – 4x + 9
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ).f (x
AK4(CALC)* 6(g)1(FMin)vx-ev+j,
)* fx-7400GII: 3(CALC
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ a = 0, b = 3.
a,d,
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ n = 6
g)w
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ،f (xﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Xﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ Zﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ
(X, r, θﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﲔ ﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ nﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ.
• ﻧﻘﻂ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻝ nﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻞ ) (bﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ) .(aﻭﺍﻻ ﹼ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ/ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . A
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 9ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ .nﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ Σﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻞ
ﻭ RndFixﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ logabﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
2-29
.6ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ 2-1ﺍﻟﻲ .2-15
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻱ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } ... {Realﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ*1
• } ... {a+biﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ
• } ... {r∠θﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ*2
*1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﺧﻴﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻭ
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ.
ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ:
= 0.6931471806 + 1.570796327i
ln 2i
)ln 2i + ln (– 2) = (Non-Real ERROR
*2ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻝ θﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﹸﻋﺪﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• Deg ... –180 < θ < 180
• Rad ... – π < θ < π
• Gra ... –200 < θ < 200
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) K3(CPLX) (K2(CPLXﻓﻲ ) (fx-7400GIIﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }} ... {iﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﻟﻴﺔ {i
•
•
•
•
} ... {Abs}/{Argﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ } ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ{ }/ﺣﺠﺔ{
}} ... {Conjﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻖ{
}} ... {ReP}/{ImPﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ{}/ﺍﳋﻴﺎﻟﻲ{ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ
} ... {'r∠θ}/{'a+biﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ }ﻗﻄﺒﻲ{}/ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ{.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) !a(iﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ) K3(CPLX) (K2(CPLXﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ) .( fx-7400GII
)1(i
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ a+bi ،ﻭ r∠θﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )' (xﻋﻨﺪ
x < 0ﻭ y = m/nﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ nﻋﺪﺩ ﺷﺎﺫ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ3x' (– 8) = – 2 (Real) :
)= 1 + 1.732050808i (a +b i
) = 2∠60 (r ∠θ
• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ” ∠ “ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ) (r ∠θﺍﺿﻐﻂ )∠(!v
2-30
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
][OPTN]-[CPLX]-[i
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
)(1 + 2i) + (2 + 3i
*)AK3(CPLX
))(b+c1(i
+(c+d1(i))w
)* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX
kﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
)(3 + i
*)AK3(CPLX
!x(')(d+1(i))w
)* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX
kﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ:
2∠30 × 3∠45 = 6∠75
*!m(SET UP)cccccc
1(Deg)c3(r∠θ)J
Ac!v(∠)da*d
!v(∠)efw
* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccccc
kﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺠﺔ
][OPTN]-[CPLX]-[Abs]/[Arg
ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ a + biﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﺔ ﻏﺎﻭﺳﻲ ،ﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ⎮ ⎮Zﻭ
ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ).(arg
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ) (rﻭ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ) (θﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ، 3 + 4iﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ.
ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ
ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ
2-31
)AK3(CPLX)*2(Abs
(d+e1(i))w
)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ(
)* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX
)AK3(CPLX)*3(Arg
(d+e1(i))w
)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ(
)* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX
• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ
ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ(
kﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ
][OPTN]-[CPLX]-[Conj
ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ a + biﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ .a – bi
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ 2 + 4i
)AK3(CPLX)*4(Conj
(c+e1(i))w
)* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX
kﺇﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ bﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ . a + bi
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ . 2 + 5i
)AK3(CPLX)*6(g)1(ReP
(c+f6(g)1(i))w
)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ(
)* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX
)AK3(CPLX)*6(g)2(ImP
(c+f6(g)1(i))w
)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ(
)* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX
kﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻴﺔ
][OPTN]-[CPLX]-['r∠θ]/['a+bi
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ .
2-32
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
' 1 +ﺍﻟﻲ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ.
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ 3 i
*!m(SET UP)cccccc
1(Deg)c2(a+bi)J
)Ab+(!x(')d
K3(CPLX)**1(i)6(g)3('r∠θ)w
* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccccc
)** fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX
Ac!v(∠)ga
K3(CPLX)*6(g)4('a+bi)w
)* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX
• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 21ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ،ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ
ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
', x 2, x –1, ^(x y), 3', x', In, log, logab, 10x, e x, Int, Frac, Rnd, Intg, RndFix(, Fix, Sci, ENG,
ENG, ° ’ ”, ° ’ ”, a b/c, d /c
.7ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ,ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ,ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ،
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺗﻘﻄﻊ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ )ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ( ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ،
ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ.
ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ 0, 1 :
ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 :
ﻋﺸﺮﻱ0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 :
ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F :
• ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ.
2-33
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ
ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ
ﻋﺸﺮﻱ
ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ
ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
16ﺭﻗﻢ
11ﺭﻗﻢ
10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ
8ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ
F
E
D
C
B
A
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
z
y
x
w
v
u
t
c
s
I
l
v
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ.
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ0 < x < 111111111111111 :
ﺳﻠﺒﻲ1000000000000000 < x < 1111111111111111 :
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ0 < x < 17777777777 :
ﺳﻠﺒﻲ20000000000 < x < 37777777777 :
ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ0 < x < 2147483647 :
ﺳﻠﺒﻲ–2147483648 < x < –1 :
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ0 < x < 7FFFFFFF :
ﺳﻠﺒﻲ80000000 < x < FFFFFFFF :
uﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ
][SET UP]-[Mode]-[Dec]/[Hex]/[Bin]/[Oct
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ،ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUN
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ).!m(SET UPﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ“ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ 4(Bin),3(Hex),2(Dec),ﺃﻭ ) 5(Octﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.
.3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ
ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } ... {d~o}/{LOG}/{DISPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ}ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ{}/ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{/
}ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ /ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ /ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ /ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ{
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(d~oﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ.
• }} ... {d}/{h}/{b}/{oﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ{}/ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ{}/ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ{
2-34
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﻠﻄﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،12310ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ.
)!m(SET UP
ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“ ،ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3(Hex)J
A1(d~o)1(d)bcdw
kﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(LOGﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
• }} ... {Negﺳﺎﻟﺐ{ *1
• }{NOT}*2/{AND}/{OR}/{XOR}/{XNOR}*3 ... {Not}/{and}/{or}/{xor}/{xnor
*1ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ
*2ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ )ﺗﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ(
AND *3ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ OR ،ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ XOR ،ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ XNOR ،ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
uﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻝ 1100102
)!m(SET UP
ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“ ،ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .4(Bin)J
)A2(LOG)1(Neg
bbaabaw
• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ..
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ” 12016ﻭ “AD16ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ
)!m(SET UP
ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“ ،ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3(Hex)J
)Abca2(LOG
3(and)ADw
kﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(DISPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ.
• } ... {'Dec}/{'Hex}/{'Bin}/{'Octﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﻬﺎ } ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ{/
}ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ{ }/ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ{
2-35
uﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ) 2210ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ
)A!m(SET UP
ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“ ،ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .2(Dec)J
1(d~o)1(d)ccw
J3(DISP)3('Bin)w
4('Oct)w
.8ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ . fx-7400GII
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،RUN • MATﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1('MATﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 26ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Mat Aﺍﻟﻰ (Mat Zﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ، (MatAnsﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲡﻌﻞ
ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ ﹰ.
• ﺟﻤﻊ ،ﻭ ﻃﺮﺡ ،ﻭﺿﺮﺏ
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
• ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
• ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
• ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
• ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ ،ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
• ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ .999
ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )(MatAns
• ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻣﺴﺘﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .ﻭﲢﺬﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ.
• ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ) mﺻﻔﻮﻑ( × ) 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ) 1ﺻﻒ( × ) nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ(،
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ).(VctAns
ﻳﺘﻢ ﹰ
2-36
k
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1('MATﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
) m × n … mﺻﻒ( ) × nﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
…Noneﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
• } ... {DEL}/{DEL•Aﻳﺤﺬﻑ }ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ{}/ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ{
• }} ... {DIMﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ({
ﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-49
• } ... {M⇔Vﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼ
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺗﻌﲔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻭﹼﻻ )ﺍﳊﺠﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﹼ
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺣﺠﻢ( ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻔﲔ × ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻤﺎ ﺏ Mat B
ﺃﻇﻞ . Mat B
c
)) 3(DIMﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ(
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ.
cw
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ.
dw
w
• ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ .0
• ﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ”ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ :B
3
6
2
5
1
4
2-37
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ..
bwcwdw
ewfwgw
)ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ
،wﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ(.
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ
)ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ( .ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ.
uﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ
.1ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(DEL
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ)6(Noﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺊ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ
ﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )2(DEL • A
.1
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ )6(Noﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺊ. .
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .
.1ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ )، ai(Nﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ .Mat N
ﻭ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . !-
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }} ... {R • OPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{
• }{ROW
• } ... {DEL}/{INS}/{ADDﺻﻒ }ﺣﺬﻑ{}/ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ{}/ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ{
• }{COL
• } ... {DEL}/{INS}/{ADDﻋﺎﻣﺪ}ﺣﺬﻑ{}/ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ{}/ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ{
• }} ... {EDITﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ{
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .A
2-38
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(R • OPﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• }} ... {Swapﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{
• }} ... {×Rwﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ{
• }} ... {×Rw+ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ{
• }} ... {Rw+ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ{
uﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺻﻔﲔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﲡﺮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
2
1
4
3
6
5
= Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)1(R • OP)1(Swap
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ.
cwdww
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ 4
)1(R • OP)2(×Rw
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ*.
ew
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ.
cww
* ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ).(k
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ، 4ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 3
.
)1(R • OP)3(×Rw+
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ*.
ew
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻪ.
cw
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
dww
* ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ ).(k
2-39
uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 3
)1(R • OP)4(Rw+
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﺔ.
cw
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
dww
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
• }} ... {DELﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{
• }} ... {INSﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{
• }} ... {ADDﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2
2(ROW)c
)1(DEL
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ
2(ROW)c
)2(INS
uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ
2(ROW)cc
)3(ADD
2-40
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ
• }} ... {DELﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{
• }} ... {INSﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{
• }} ... {ADDﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2
3(COL)e
)1(DEL
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RUN • MAT
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(MATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• }} ... {Matﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({
• } Mat→List} ... {M→Lﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺗﻌﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ({
• }} ... {Augﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ )ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ({
• }} ... {Idenﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ({
• }} ... {Dimﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ )ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ({
• }} ... {Fillﻣﻸ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ )ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ({
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ) !c(Matﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ).K2(MAT)1(Mat
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Mat
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
...
2-41
...
] Zﺍﻟﻰ Aﺣﺮﻑ[ → Mat
a22 ... a2n
a21
...
] ]= [ [a11, a12, ..., a1n] [a21, a22, ..., a2n] .... [am1, am2, ..., amn
a12 ... a1n
a11
am2 ... amn
am1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ :A
1 3 5
2 4 6
!+( [ )!+( [ )b,d,f
!-( ] )!+( [ )c,e,g
)!-( ] )!-( ] )aK2(MAT
)1(Mat)av(A
ﺍﺳﻢ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
w
• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ mﻭ nﻫﻰ . 999
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Iden
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ 3×3ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ A
)K2(MAT)6(g)1(Iden
da6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ /ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ
uﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Dim
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ١
ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ A
)K2(MAT)6(g)2(Dim
6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ.
ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ} {Dimﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ٢
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ B
!*( { )c,d!/( } )a
)K2(MAT)6(g)2(Dim
6(g)1(Mat)al(B)w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ” “Dimﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ.
2-42
uﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭﳌﻸ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ
ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﳉﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻭﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Mat
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ .
]Mat X [m, n
= Xﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ ، Zﺃﻭ (Ans
= mﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ
= nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ١
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ 10ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،1ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
2
1
4
3
6
5
= Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)baaK2(MAT)1(Mat
av(A)!+( [ )b,c
!-( ] )w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ” “Vctﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ٢
ﺍﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ، 2ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ .
)K2(MAT)1(Mat
av(A)!+( [ )c,c
!-( ] )*fw
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ” “Vctﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ.
uﳌﻸ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭ ﳉﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Fill]/[Aug
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻼ ﳌﻸ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ١
ﳌﻸ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 3
)K2(MAT)6(g)3(Fill
d,6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w
1(Mat)av(A)w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ” “Fillﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
2-43
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ٢
ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ:
3
1
=B
4
=A
2
)K2(MAT)5(Aug
1(Mat)av(A),
1(Mat)al(B)w
• ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺠﻤﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ .ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ
ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﲢﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﻭ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻣﻼ )(n, Mat α
ﺣﺠﺔ (Mat α, Mat β) → Mat γ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ , β, αﻭ γﺍﻱ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻰ ،Zﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ nﻗﻴﻤﺔ .ﺍﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ .ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ” “Augmentﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[M→L
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Mat→Listﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
Mat → List (Mat X, m) → List n
) Ansﺃﻭ Z ،ﺍﻟﻰ (Aﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = X
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ = m
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ = n
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ : 1
2
1
4
3
6
5
= Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)K2(MAT)2(M→L
)1(Mat)av(A),c
aK1(LIST)1(List)bw
1(List)bw
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[MAT
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RUN • MAT
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(MATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
2-44
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• }} ... {Matﺃﻣﺮ ) Matﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({
• }} ... {Detﺃﻣﺮ ) Detﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ({
• }} ... {Trnﺃﻣﺮ ) Trnﺃﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({
• }} ... {Idenﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ) ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ({
• }} ... {Refﺃﻣﺮ )Refﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ({
• }} ... {Rrefﺃﻣﺮ ) Rrefﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ({
ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ١
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Mat]/[Iden
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ )ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ + Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ :(B
3
2
1
2
=B
1
1
1
2
=A
AK2(MAT)1(Mat)av(A)+
1(Mat)al(B)w
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ٢
ﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ) ١ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ × Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ (B
*)AK2(MAT)1(Mat)av(A
1(Mat)al(B)w
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻌﻬﻢ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﻢ .ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭ
ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
• ﻟﻀﺮﺏ )ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ × 1ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،(2ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 1ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .2ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﹼ ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
uﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Det
ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
3
2
1
6
5
4
0
−1 −2
= Aﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)K2(MAT)3(Det)1(Mat
av(A)w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ(.
ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 2×2ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
= a11a22 – a12a21
a11 a12
a21 a22
= ||A
2-45
• ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 3×3ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
= a11a22a33 + a12a23a31 + a13a21a32 – a11a23a32 – a12a21a33 – a13a22a31
a11 a12 a13
a21 a22 a23
a31 a32 a33
uﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
= ||A
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Trn
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
2
1
4
3
6
5
= Aﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)K2(MAT)4(Trn)1(Mat
av(A)w
ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -1ﺻﻒ × -nﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -nﺻﻒ × -1
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ” “Trnﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﹰ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ .ﻓﻬﻮ ﱢ
ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -mﺻﻒ × -1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ -1ﺻﻒ × -mﻋﻤﻮﺩ.
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ،ﺃﻭ ﱢ
uﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Ref
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﺎﻭﺳﻲ ﻻﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
3
2
1
6
5
4
= Aﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)K2(MAT)6(g)4(Ref
6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w
uﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺗﺰﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Rref
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺗﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺗﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
19
3
−1
2
−21
−5
1
1
0
3
4
0
2-46
= Aﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)K2(MAT)6(g)5(Rref
6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w
• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺗﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ
ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
uﺗﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][x–1
ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
2
1
4
3
= Aﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)K2(MAT)1(Mat
av(A)!)(x–1)w
• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ) ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ( .ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ
ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ .ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
• ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
1 0
0 1
= A A–1 = A–1 A = E
ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ . A–1
a b
c d
=A
d –b
–c a
1
ad – bc
=A–1
ﻻﺣﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ad – bc ≠ 0
uﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][x2
ﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
2
1
4
3
= Aﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
K2(MAT)1(Mat)av(A)xw
2-47
uﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
]^[
ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ:
2
1
4
3
= Aﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)K2(MAT)1(Mat)av(A
Mdw
• ﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ .32766
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ،ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
][OPTN]-[NUM]-[Abs]/[Frac]/[Int]/[Intg
ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
–2
1
4
–3
= Aﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)K6(g)4(NUM)1(Abs
K2(MAT)1(Mat)av(A)w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ” “Absﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ.
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:
1+i
–2 + 2i
–1 + i
1+i
= Dﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
)AK6(g)4(NUM)1(Abs
K2(MAT)1(Mat)as(D)w
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ.
i, Abs, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﲤﺎﻣﻬﺎ.
ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﻡ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ،
ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
2-48
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺃﻭ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ(.
MatAns → Mat α
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ αﻫﻮ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻰ .Zﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
.9ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
ﻣﻬﻢ!
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ RUN • MATﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ).1('MAT)6(M⇔V
ﻳﹸﻌﺮﱠﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ) m :ﺻﻔﻮﻑ( × ) 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﺍﻭ ) 1ﺻﻒ( × ) nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ(.
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞﹼ ﻣﻦ mﻭ nﻫﻲ .999
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 26ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ )ﻣﻦ Vct Aﺇﻟﻰ (Vct Zﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) (VctAnsﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ
• ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ
• ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ
• ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ
• ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(
• ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ
• ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺣﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )(VctAns
ﺗﺨﺰﱢﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﲢﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ.
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ).(MatAns
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1('MAT)6(M⇔Vﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
... m × nﻣﺘﺠﻪ ) mﺻﻒ( × ) nﻋﻤﻮﺩ(
... Noneﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ
2-49
• } ... {DEL}/{DEL • Aﺣﺬﻑ }ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ{}/ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ{
• } ... {DIMﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) mﺻﻔﻮﻑ × 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ 1ﺻﻒ × nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ(
ﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-37
• } ... {M⇔Vﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼ
ﺗﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ )ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ( ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ.
ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-37ﻭ ”ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(2-38ﻟﻜﻦ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ) 1(R • OPﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻝ.
ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ mﺻﻔﻮﻑ × 1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ 1ﺻﻒ × nﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﹰ
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[MAT
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ..
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ .RUN • MAT
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Kﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(MAT)6(g)6(gﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ.
• }} ... {Vctﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) Vctﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ({
• }} ... {DotPﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) DotPﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ({
• }} ... {CrsPﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) CrossPﺃﻣﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ({
• }} ... {Angleﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) Angleﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ({
• }} ... {UntVﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) UnitVﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ({
• }} ... {Normﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) Normﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(({
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﻫﻲ 1 × 2ﺃﻭ 1 × 3ﺃﻭ
ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﹰ
2 × 1ﺃﻭ .3 × 1
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ.
• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻫﻲ ±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ.
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ.
VctAns → Vct α
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺗﺸﻴﺮ αﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ Aﺇﻟﻰ .Zﻭﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
• ﺛﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Vct α → Mat β
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺗﺸﻴﺮ αﻭ βﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ Aﺇﻟﻰ .Z
2-50
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Vct
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ .Vct
a11
] Zﺍﻟﻰ [a11 a12 ... a1n] → Vct [A
...
] Zﺍﻟﻰ → Vct [A
a21
am1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ [ 1 2 3 ] :Vct A
!+( [ )!+( [ )b,c,d
!-( ] )!-( ] )a
)K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct
av(A)w
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻜﻞﹼ ﻣﻦ mﻭ nﻫﻲ .999
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻳﹸﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﹼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ.
uﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Vct
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Vct A + Vct B
] Vct B = [ 3 4
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct
av(A)+1(Vct)al(B)w
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Vct A × Vct B
3
4
= Vct B
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct
av(A)*1(Vct)al(B)w
2-51
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 3
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Mat A × Vct B
1
2
= Vct B
2
1
1
2
= Mat A
)K2(MAT)1(Mat
)av(A)*6(g)6(g
1(Vct)al(B)w
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺣﻤﻬﺎ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) Vct A (1 × nﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) ، Vct B (m × 1ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ nﻭ .m
uﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[DotP
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ
] Vct B = [ 3 4
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT)6(g)6(g
2(DotP)1(Vct)av(A),
1(Vct)al(B))w
uﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[CrsP
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ
] Vct B = [ 3 4
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT)6(g)6(g
3(CrsP)1(Vct)av(A),
1(Vct)al(B))w
uﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Angle
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ
] Vct B = [ 3 4
] Vct A = [ 1 2
)K2(MAT)6(g)6(g
4(Angle)1(Vct)av(A),
1(Vct)al(B))w
2-52
uﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[UntV
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ
] Vct A = [ 5 5
)K2(MAT)6(g)6(g
5(UntV)1(Vct)av(A))w
uﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
)ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(
][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Norm
ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(
] Vct A = [ 1 3
)K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)6(g
)1(Norm)6(g)6(g)6(g
1(Vct)av(A))w
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ” “Normﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
.10ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠـ 11ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
LENG
ﻃﻮﻝ
TMPR
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ
PRES
ﺿﻐﻂ
AREA
ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ
VELO
ﺳﺮﻋﺔ
ENGY
ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﻋﻤﻞ
VLUM
ﺣﺠﻢ
MASS
ﺿﺨﻢ
PWR
ﻗﻮﺓ
TIME
ﻭﻗﺖ
FORC
ﻗﻮﺓ /ﻭﺯﻥ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺃ ﹼﻱ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃ ﹼﻱ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ.
• ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ” (“AREAﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ” (“TIMEﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-55ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ.
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
][OPTN]-[CONV
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
}ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﲢﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ{}ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ } ' {1ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ {2
2-53
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ {1ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ {2ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ' ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ .ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ )'( 1ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ .
• ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ،ﻓﺘﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ)ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .(ListAns
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ
ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ١
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ 50ﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ
)AfaK6(g)1(CONV)*2(LENG
f(cm)1(')2(LENG)ec(in)w
)* fx-7400GII: 5(CONV
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ٢
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ } {175, 162, 180ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻜﺘﺎﺭﺍﺕ
A!*({)bhf,bgc,
)}(bia!/
)K6(g)1(CONV)*3(AREA)c(m2
1(')3(AREA)d(ha)w
)* fx-7400GII: 5(CONV
2-54
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
fm
ﻓﻴﺮﻣﻲ
cm3
ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ
Å
ﺍﳒﺴﺘﺮﻭﻡ
mL
ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ
μm
ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ
L
ﻟﺘﺮ
cm
ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ
in3
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺔ
m
ﻣﺘﺮ
ft3
ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ
km
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ
AU
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﺣﺠﻢ
mm
ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ
m3
ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ
)fl_oz(UK
ﺍﻭﻧﺲ
)fl_oz(US
ﺍﻻﻭﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ
ﻃﻮﻝ
l.y.
ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ
)gal(US
ﻏﺎﻟﻮﻥ
pc
ﻓﺮﺳﺦ
)gal(UK
ﻏﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻨﺪﻧﻲ
Mil
1/1000ﺑﻮﺻﺔ
pt
ﺑﺎﻳﺖ
in
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ
qt
ﻛﻤﻴﺔ
ft
ﻗﺪﻡ
tsp
ﻣﻠﻌﻘﺔ ﺷﺎﻱ
yd
ﻳﺎﺭﺩﺓ
tbsp
tablespoon
fath
ﻗﺎﻣﺔ
cup
ﻛﺄﺱ
rd
ﺫﺭﺍﻉ
ns
ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
mile
ﻣﻴﻞ
μs
ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻣﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺮﻱ
ms
ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
n mile
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ
m2
ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ
ha
ﻫﻜﺘﺎﺭ
km2
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
in2
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ
ft2
ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
ﺯﻣﻦ
cm2
ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﻴﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
s
ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
min
ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ
h
ﺳﺎﻋﺔ
day
week
yr
ﻳﻮﻡ
ﺍﺳﺒﻮﻉ
ﺳﻨﺔ
yd2
ﻳﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ
s-yr
ﺳﻨﺔ ﳒﻤﻴﺔ
acre
ﻓﺪﺍﻥ
t-yr
ﺳﻨﺔ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻳﺔ
mile2
ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
2-55
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ
ﺳﺮﻋﺔ
K
ﻛﻠﻔﻦ
kPa
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ
°F
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻲ
mmH2O
ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ
°R
ﺭﺍﻧﻜﲔ
mmHg
ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻲ
m/s
ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
km/h
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ
knot
ﻋﻘﺪﺓ
inHg
ft/s
ﻗﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
lbf/in2
mile/h
ﻣﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ
bar
u
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﺫﺭﻳﺔ
kgf/cm2
mg
ﺿﻐﻂ
°C
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻴﻠﻮﺯﻳﺔ
Pa
ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ
ﻣﻴﻠﻴﺠﺮﺍﻡ
atm
ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻮﻱ
inH2O
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻴﺔ
eV
ﺣﺠﻢ
g
ﺟﺮﺍﻡ
kg
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ
calth
mton
ﻃﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ
cal15
oz
ﺍﻭﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻮﺍﺭﺩﻳﺒﻮﺍ
calIT
lb
ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ
kcalth
ﻃﺎﻗﺔ/ﻋﻤﻞ
slug
J
ﻟﻄﻤﺔ
ﻃﻦ ﺍﻣﻴﺮﻳﻜﻲ
kcal15
ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻴﺔ
ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ
ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ
ﻗﻀﻴﺐ
ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ
ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ
ﺟﻮﻝ
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ ) 15ﺩﺭﺟﺔ
ﺳﻴﻠﻮﺯﻳﺔ(
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱIT
th
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ ) 15ﺩﺭﺟﺔ
ﺳﻴﻠﻮﺯﻳﺔ(
th
kcalIT
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ
ﻃﻦ ﺍﳒﻠﻴﺰﻱ )(2240lbm
l-atm
ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻮﻱ
N
ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ
kW•h
ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ
lbf
ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻗﻮﺓ
ft•lbf
ﻗﺪﻡ-ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ
tonf
ﻃﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ
Btu
ﻭﺣﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ
dyne
ﺩﺍﻳﻦ
erg
ﺃﺭﻍ
)ton(short
)ton(long
ﻗﻮﺓ/ﻭﺯﻥ
kgf
)(2000lbm
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺓ
kgf•m
W
calth/s
ﻗﻮﺓ
hp
ft•lbf/s
Btu/min
IT
ﻣﺘﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ
ﻭﺍﺕ
ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻗﻮﺓ ﺣﺼﺎﻥ
ﻗﺪﻡ-ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ
ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ NIST :ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ (2008) 811
2-56
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 3ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ 26ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ 6ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﲤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ
ﺻﻒ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
26
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
5
4
0
0
2
0
3
9
0
•
•
•
•
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
4
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
3.5
6
2.1
4.4
3
6.8
2
8.7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
107
75
122
87
298
48
338
49
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ
2
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
1
ﻓﺮﻋﻲ
56
37
21
69
40
48
93
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.1ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STATﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ"ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" ﺃﻭﻻ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ cﻻ ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ
ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ ﹼﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 1ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1
.1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
dw
• ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 4ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ 2 + 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ewc+dw
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ 999ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
3-1
3
uﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) { (*! ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ,
ﺑﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) } ( !/ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
) } (!*( { )g,h,i!/
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻚ.
w
• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
ﺻﺤﻴﺢ{78 ، 53 ،34} :
ﺧﻄﺄ{،78 ، 53 ،34} :
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، 2ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .3
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
K1(LIST)1(List)b+
K1(LIST)1(List)cw
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) !b(Listﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ )K1(LIST)1(List
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ .ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
wﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )6(g)2(EDIT
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
3-2
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)3(DELﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ.
ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ
ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ .ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ .
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ.
.2ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)4(DEL • Aﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻳﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)5(INSﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،0ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ
ﻟﻼﺳﻔﻞ.
• ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ
ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ.
kﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﲔ "ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ" ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 26ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
uﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﻇﻠﻞ "ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .1(On)J
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ.
3-3
.3ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ !aﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ . ALPHA-LOCK
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﺳﻨﺔ
-(Y)c(E)v(A)g(R)w
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUN
!b(List) n!+( [ )a!-( ] )w
) = nﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
• ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ
ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻟـ "ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
kﻓﺮﺯ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍ ﹼﻱ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﹼ
uﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)1(TOOL)1(SRT • A
.2ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ "ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟" ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺪﺧﻞ 1ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ.
bw
.3ﻭ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ " ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، ":ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ.
bw
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ .ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
) 2(SRT • Dﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ).1(SRT • A
uﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ ﻣﻌﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ
ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ،ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﹼ
ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ.
3-4
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)1(TOOL)1(SRT • A
.2ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ "ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟" ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻧﺪﺧﻞ .2
cw
.3ﻭ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ " ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، ":ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ
ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1
bw
.4ﻭ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ " ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، ":ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .2
cw
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ .ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
) 2(SRT • Dﺑﺪﻻ ﻝ ﻣﻦ )1(SRT • A
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 6ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ )ﺻﻔﻮﻑ(.
.2ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﲤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ .ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ ،(RUNﻭ ،STATﻭ ،TABLE
ﻭ EQUAﻭ .PRGM
kﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUN
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﺛﻢ ) 1(LISTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }{List}/{L→M}/{Dim}/{Fill}/{Seq}/{Min}/{Max}/{Mean}/{Med}/{Aug}/{Sum}/{Prod}/{Cuml}/{%}/{A
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[L→M
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII
> ...ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ > ,1(List) <1-26ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)2(L→M)1(List) <1-26
> )wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ,1(List) <1-26
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ) 1(Listﻓﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝList → Mat (1, 2)w :
3-5
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2،3،6،5،4) 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ،1ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2
) (11,12,13,14,15ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
)AK1(LIST)2(L→M
1(List)b,1(List)c)w
uﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim
> wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <26 - 1
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ".
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (36,16,58,46,56) 1
)AK1(LIST)3(Dim
1(List)bw
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)> w (n = 1 - 999ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ n> aK1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <26 - 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ (0ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
)AfaK1(LIST)3(Dim
1(List)bw
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .STAT
uﻹﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
> )wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ > ,1(List) <26 - 1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ< )K1(LIST)4(Fill
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 3
)AK1(LIST)4(Fill
d,1(List)b)w
ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1
3-6
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Fill
uﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Seq
>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ< > ,ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ< > ,ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ< > ,ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ< )K1(LIST)5(Seq
> )wﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ< ,
• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،112 ،62 ،12ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .f(x) = X2
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 11ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ .5
AK1(LIST)5(Seq)vx,
v,b,bb,f)w
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻟـ 12ﺃﻭ 13ﺃﻭ 14ﺃﻭ 15ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻧﻬﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ).(16
uﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Min
> )wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)1(Min)6(g)6(g)1(List) <26 - 1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )(56 ،46 ،58 ،16 ،36
)AK1(LIST)6(g)1(Min
6(g)6(g)1(List)b)w
uﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Max
)> ,1(Listﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)2(Max)6(g)6(g)1(List) <26 - 1
> )wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <26 - 1
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ. .
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (56 ،46 ،98 ،16 ،75) 1ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (67 ،72 ،58 ،59 ،35) 2
ﲢﺘﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
)K1(LIST)6(g)2(Max
6(g)6(g)1(List)b,
1(List)c)w
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Mean
> )wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)3(Mean)6(g)6(g)1(List) <26 - 1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (36,16,58,46,56) 1
)AK1(LIST)6(g)3(Mean
6(g)6(g)1(List)b)w
3-7
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Med
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ :ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺍﺙ( ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ .ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 1ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 1ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺦ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
)> ,1(Listﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 26 - 1ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(< )K1(LIST)6(g)4(Med)6(g)6(g)1(List
> )wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 26 - 1ﺗﺮﺩﺩ(<
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (56 ،46 ،58 ،16 ،36) 1ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻫﺎ
ﻣﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (67 ،72 ،98 ،89 ،75) 2
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
)AK1(LIST)6(g)4(Med
6(g)6(g)1(List)b,
1(List)c)w
uﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Sum
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
)> ,1(Listﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)5(Aug)6(g)6(g)1(List) <26 - 1
> )wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <26 - 1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (-2 ،-3) 1ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (10 ،9 ،1) 2
)AK1(LIST)6(g)5(Aug
6(g)6(g)1(List)b,
1(List)c)w
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Prod
> wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)2(Prod)6(g)1(List) <26 - 1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (56 ،46 ،58 ،16 ،36) 1
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)1(Sum
6(g)1(List)bw
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Prod
> wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)2(Prod)6(g)1(List) <26 - 1
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (4 ،5 ،6 ،3 ،2) 1
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)2(Prod
6(g)1(List)bw
3-8
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Cuml
> wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
)(4 ،5 ،6 ،3 ،2ﹴ
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml
6(g)1(List)bw
=2+3
=2+3+6
=2+3+6+5
=2+3+6+5+4
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[%
> wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)4(%)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26
• ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ . ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
)(4 ,5 ,6 ,3 ,2
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)4(%
6(g)1(List)bw
= 2/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
= 3/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
= 6/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
= 5/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
= 4/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
][OPTN]-[LIST]-[A
> wﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)5(A) <1 - 26
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (4 ,5 ,8 ,3 ,1) 1
)AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)5(A
bw
=3–1
=8–3
=5–8
=4–5
3-9
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAnsﻣﺜﻼ ،ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Aﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ← 1ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ Aﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .2
• ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Aﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Aﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ
ﺑﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
.3ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻴﻤﻴﺔ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ListAns
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
=
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
+
−
×
÷
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
kﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ .ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ،
ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
) ﻭﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ "ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ" ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(.
• ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻴﺘﲔ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)AK1(LIST)1(List
• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ".
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ( 26ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)AK1(LIST)1(List
• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ".
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ )" "(.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ“QTY” :
3-10
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ {, ,},ﻭ,
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ64 ،82 ،56 :
!*( { )fg,ic,
) } (ge!/
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ aﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (22 ،65 ،41) 3ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
K1(LIST)1(List)da1(List)bw
ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ )1(LIST)1(List)dﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( Listﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
) } (!*( { )eb,gf,cc!/
uﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ
ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﲔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ sineﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2
sK1(LIST)1(List)c!+( [ )d!-( ] )w
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ
ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 25ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ 2ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3
cfaK1(LIST)1(List)d!+( [ )c!-( ] )w
kﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
K1(LIST)1(List)bw
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAnsﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ListAnsﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
3-11
uﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ListAnsﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ListAnsﺏ36
K1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ans)*dgw
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ (Ans)-!(List)1(LIST)1Kﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ListAns
• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ListAnsﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻙ = Y1ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .List 1Xﺇﺫﺍ
ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،1 ،2،3ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ :ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1Xﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
ﺳﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ .Y = 3X ، Y = 2X ، Y = X :
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ TABLEﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻻ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ TABLEﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻐﺔ (Y1 = x2 –1),ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ STAT
.1ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ، TABLEﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ Y1 = x2 –1
.2ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ Y1
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ (LMEM)K1
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .bw
.6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ Y1ﰎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1
3-12
kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ.ListAns .
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3
41
65
22
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ (List 3) sin
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ.
sK1(LIST)1(List)dw
.4ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 26ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ
)ﻣﻠﻒ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ .(6ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ.ListAns.
uﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ (SET UP)!mﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .STAT
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ".
.3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(FILEﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ 3
1(FILE)d
w
ﰎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ) ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(.
3-13
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 4ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .EQUA
• }} ... {SIMLﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ 2ﺇﻟﻰ 6ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ{
• }} ... {POLYﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ 2ﺇﻟﻰ {6
• }} ... {SOLVﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ{
.1ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ.
• ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﲔ:
a1x + b1y = c1
a2x + b2y = c2
• ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ:
a1x + b1y + c1z = d1
a2x + b2y + c2z = d2
a3x + b3y + c3z = d3
…
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .EQUA
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) SIMLﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﻣﻦ( ،ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻬﻮﻻﺕ )ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ(.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ 2ﺇﻟﻰ 6ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ.
• ﰎ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ:
)a1 → b1 → c1 → … an → bn → cn → (n = 2 to 6
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ .ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ
ﺷﻲﺀ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ،wﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CLRﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
.4ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻝ xﻭ yﻭ z
4x + y – 2z = – 1
x + 6y + 3z = 1
– 5x + 4y + z = – 7
4-1
4
1 m EQUA
)2 1(SIML
)2(3
3 ewbw-cw-bw
bwgwdwbw
-fwewbw-hw
)4 1(SOLV
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ
ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ( ،ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ.
d1
d2
d3
–1
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3
=
x
y
z
ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ .ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ،ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ
ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﹰ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﳊﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﲟﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻞ.
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )،1(REPTﻳﻐﻴﹼﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ.
.2ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳊﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ.
• ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔax2 + bx + c = 0 (a Þ 0) :
)ax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0 (a Þ 0
• ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺔ:
)ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0 (a Þ 0
• ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ:
…
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .EQUA
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) POLYﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ( ،ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ 2ﺇﻟﻰ 6
.3ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ:
…→a→b→c
ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
ﹼ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ .ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺷﻲﺀ .
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
4-2
• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ، wﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CLRﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ .
.4ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = (Rad
x – 2x – x + 2 = 0
2
3
1 m EQUA
)2 2(POLY
)2(3
3 bw-cw-bwcw
)4 1(SOLV
ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ) ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ( x3 + 3x2 + 3x + 1 = 0:
ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(x3 + 2x2 + 3x + 2 = 0 :
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ : Real) :ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-28
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ a + bi :
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ r∠θ :
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ
ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ.
• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﲟﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻞ.
• ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ.
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، 1(REPTﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ.
4-3
.3ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Solve Calculationﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ EQUA
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ) SOLVﺍﳊﻞ( ،ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ،
ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ
• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ.
• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ .
.4ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻞ.
ﺗﺸﻴﺮ Rgtﻭ Lftﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﻞ1*.
*1ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ Rgtﻭ Lftﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ،ﻷﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻗﺪ
ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ.
ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ Lftﻭ Rgtﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ،ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﰎ ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﺷﻰﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ Vﻭﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ Tﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻲ
ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ .Hﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ Vﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ H = 14
)ﻣﺘﺮ( ) T = 2 ،ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ).G = 9.8 (m/s2
H = VT-1/2 GT2
1 m EQUA
)2 3(SOLV
)aM(H)!.(=)ac(V)a/(T(b/c)a$(G)a/(T)xw
)3 bew(H = 14
)aw(V = 0
)cw(T = 2
)j.iw(G = 9.8
4 Press fff to highlight V = 0, and then press
6(SOLV).
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ""Retryﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ .
• ﺳﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺣﻼ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ POLYﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ( ax2 + bx + c = 0.).
4-4
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 5ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ Graphing
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ.
• … GRAPHﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ
• ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ … (RUNﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 5-12ﺍﻟﻰ (5-15
• … TABLEﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ 5-15ﺇﻟﻰ (5-19
• … DYNAﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ 5-20ﺍﻟﻰ (5-22
• … RECURﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ 5-22ﺍﻟﻰ (5-26
• … CONICSﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-27
* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GII
.1ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ
5
kﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ )(1
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ GRAPH
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ .
ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ V-Windowﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .5-3
.3ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ y = 3x2
1 m GRAPH
2 dvxw
)3 6(DRAW) (or w
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ) 2ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ( .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ،
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .(G↔T)!6
kﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ )(2
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ 20ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .GRAPH
.2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ GRAPHﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ )،(Y=f(xﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻱ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ) ، (X=f(yﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ.
)= ... 3(TYPE) 1(Yﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ )ﻧﻮﻉ )(Y=f(x
... (r=)2ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ
... (Parm)3ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ
... (X=)4ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ )ﻧﻮﻉ )(X=f(x
5-1
)≤5(CONV)1('Y=) to 5('Y
≤6(g)1('X=) to 5('X
...ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
)≤ ....Y 6(g)1(Y>) to 4(Yﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ Yﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ
)≤ .... 6(g)6(g)1(X>) to 4(Xﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ Xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺛﻢ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.(5-6ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ،ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.3ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ
ﹰ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(STYLﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ
ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
( ...ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ(
)1
( … ﻛﺜﻴﻒ )ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
)2
( … ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ )ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ(
)3
( … ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻣﻨﻘﻂ(
)4
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ” “Ineq Typeﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
)) (!m(SETUPﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﲔ ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺌﲔ
.... (AND)1ﳝﻸ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ
ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ .ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ.
....... (OR)2ﳝﻸ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎﺀ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ
ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ
Y1 = 2x2 – 3, r2 = 3sin2θ
1 m GRAPH
2 3(TYPE)1(Y=)cvx-dw
3(TYPE)2(r=)dscvw
)3 6(DRAW
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = (Deg
Y1=sin xr
1 m GRAPH
2 svK6(g)5(ANGL)2(r)w
)3 6(DRAW
5-2
.2ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ) V-Windowﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ xﻭ ،yﻭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ.ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ
ﻣﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
uﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .GRAPH
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window
ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ
… Xmin/Xmaxﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ /ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-
… Xscaleﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-
… Xdotﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-
… Ymin/Ymaxﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ /ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-
… Yscaleﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-
ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ
... Tθ min/Tθ maxﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ /ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ،Tﻗﻴﻢ θ
Tθ ptch ... T, θ pitch
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ،ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ.
• }} … {INIT}/{TRIG}/{STDﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ{}/ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ{}/ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﳌﻮﺣﺪﺓ{ .V-Window
• }} … {STO}/{RCLﺗﺨﺮﻳﻦ{}/ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ{ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ .V-Window
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.V-Windowﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) kﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ . V-Window
uﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window
• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻝ Tθ ptchﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﺍﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ )ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ،ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،ﺇﻟﺦ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Tθ maxﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ Tθ ptch ،Tθ minﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ )ﻣﺜﻞ ( πﻛﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .V-Window
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ
ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ.
• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Xdotﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Xmaxﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ )= (rﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﻬﺎ V-Windowﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Tθ ptchﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Tθ minﻭ .Tθ maxﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﺒﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Tθ
ptchﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Tθ minﻭ Tθ maxﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ
ﻃﻮﻻ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
5-3
• ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window
–9.999999999 97Eﺇﻟﻰ 9.999999999E 97
V-Window kﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
V-Window Memory
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .GRAPH
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ . V-Window
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(STOﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ .
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ V-Windowﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bwﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ) V-Window 1 ( V-Win1
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ . V-Window
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(RCLﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Windowﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .wﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bwﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ) V-Window 1 ( V-Win1
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ،ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ( ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ .
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .GRAPH
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. V-Window .
.3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ .ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) [ ( ,!+ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ,ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ) ] (!-
.4ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻝ y = x2 + 3x – 2ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ – 2 < x < 4.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ V-Windowﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ..
Xscale = 1
Yscale = 5
Xmax = 5,
Ymax = 30,
Xmin = –3,
Ymin = –10,
1 m GRAPH
2 !3(V-WIN)-dwfwbwc
-bawdawfwJ
3 3(TYPE)1(Y=)vx+dv-c,
!+( [ )-c,e!-( ] )w
)4 6(DRAW
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ،
ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ.
5-4
kﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.2ﲢﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ
ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ !2(ZOOM)1(BOX) ...
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﲤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
)2(FACT
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ xﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ yﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ.
ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ 3(IN)/4(OUT) ...
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،
ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﻟﻲ 5(AUTO) ...
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y -ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻸ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ.y -
ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ 6(g)1(ORIG) ...
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ.
ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 6(g)2(SQR) ...
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ
ﺍﶈﻮﺭ.y -
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ 6(g)3(RND) ...
ﺗﺘﻘﺮﺏ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ 6(g)4(INTG)...
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ،1ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺳﺎﺑﻖ 6(g)5(PRE)...
ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ) ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ
ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ .w
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ .ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻲ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ) y = (x + 5)(x + 4)(x + 3ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Windowﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 2
Xmax = 8,
Xmin = –8,
Yscale = 1
Ymax = 2,
Ymin = –4,
1 m GRAPH
!3(V-WIN)-iwiwcwc
-ewcwbwJ
)3(TYPE)1(Y=)(v+f)(v+e
(v+d)w
)6(DRAW
5-5
)2 !2(ZOOM)1(BOX
3 d~dw
4 d~d,f~fw
• ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﺗﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ،ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ
ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ.
.3ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 20ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ.
.1ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(TYPEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
•
}= ... {Y=}/{r=}/{Parm}/{Xﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ }ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ )ﻧﻮﻉ )}/{(Y=f(xﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{/
}ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﻲ{}/ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ )ﻧﻮﻉ ){(Y=f(x
•
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ
}){Y>}/{Y<}/{Yt}/{Ys} ... {Y>f (x)}/{Y}/{X<}/{Xt}/{Xs} ... {X>f(y)}/{X}/{'Y<}/{'Yt}/{'Ys}/{'X=}/{'X>}/{'X<}/{'Xt}/{'Xs
{ ...ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺎﺭ
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
kﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
)=(Y
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1: y = 2x2 – 5
)=) 3(TYPE)1(Yﲢﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ(
) cvx-fﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ(
) wﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ(
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ
ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ.
5-6
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Xt3ﻭ :Yt3
x = 3 sinT
y = 3 cosT
) 3(TYPE)3ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻱ (
)dsvwﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ( x
)dcvwﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ( y
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ Y1ﻭ Y2ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻝ Y3ﻭ Y4
2
Y1 = (X + 1), Y2 = X + 3
,Y2 °Y1 to Y4.ﺃﻭ Y1°Y2 to Y3,ﺗﻌﲔ
2
2
))(Y1°Y2 = ((x + 3) +1) = (x + 4) Y2°Y1 = ( (X + 1))2 + 3 = X + 4 (X > −1
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ Y3ﻭ .Y4
)3(TYPE)1(Y=)J4(GRPH
1(Y)b(1(Y)c)w
J4(GRPH)1(Y)c
(1(Y)b)w
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،−1ﻭ ،0ﻭ 1ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Aﻓﻲ ،Y = AX2ﻭ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
)=3(TYPE)1(Y
av(A)vx-bw
)J4(GRPH)1(Y)b(av(A
!.(=)-b)w
)J4(GRPH)1(Y)b(av(A
!.(=)a)w
)J4(GRPH)1(Y)b(av(A
!.(=)b)w
)ffff1(SEL
)6(DRAW
5-7
ﰎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ "ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-29
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1ﻣﻦ y = 2x2 – 5ﺍﻟﻰ
y = 2x2 – 3
)ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ( e
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( eeeeeDd
) ﹼ
)ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ( w
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ
ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )4(STYL
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻝ ، y = 2x2 – 3ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ،Y1ﺍﻟﻰ
"ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ"
)ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ "ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ"( )
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
(4(STYL)3
*1
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )3(TYPE)5(CONV
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1ﻣﻦ
y = 2x2 – 3ﺍﻟﻰ y < 2x2 – 3
)ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ”3(TYPE)5(CONV)3('Y<)(“>Y
) ﹼ
*1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.1ﺣﲔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ cﺃﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(DELﺃﻭ .D
5-8
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ.
• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ (Xt2ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ
ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ) ،Yt2ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ (Xt2
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SEL
ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(SELﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(DRAW
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ:
Y1 = 2x – 5, r2 = 5 sin3θ
2
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ V-Windowﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 1
Xmax = 5,
Xmin = –5,
Yscale = 1
Ymax = 5,
Ymin = –5,
Tθ ptch = 2π / 60
Tθ max = π,
Tθ min = 0,
) cfﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ(
)) 1(SELﺍﺧﺘﺮ( ) ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ(
) 6(DRAWﺃﻭ ) wﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ .
ﻋﻼﻣﺔ :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
• ﺷﺒﻜﺔ :ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ :ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺷﺒﻜﺔ :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻋﻼﻣﺔ :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺷﺒﻜﺔ :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
• ﻋﻼﻣﺔ :ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ :ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ xﻭ .y
5-9
kﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 20ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ
ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
ﻭ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ .(20
• ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ
• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ) V-Windowﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 5(GMEM)1(STOﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ \ wﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bwﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .(G-Mem1) 1
• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 20ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ G-Mem1ﺍﻟﻲ .G-Mem20
• ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 5(GMEM)2(RCLﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ w
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bwﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .(G-Mem1) 1
• ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.4ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻲ 20ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
.1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،GRAPHﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K1(PICT)1(STOﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .wﺗﺨﺰﻥ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ (Pict 1) 1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ bw
• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ 20ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ Pict 1ﺍﻟﻲ .Pict 20
• ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ
ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .
5-10
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺰﻥ
.1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،GRAPHﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K1(PICT)2(RCLﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w,ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩﹼ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ (Pict 1) 1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .bw
• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-28ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
.5ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
kﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﲔ .ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ
ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ،ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ.
ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻳﺴﻤﻰ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ،ﹼ
ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ" ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﹼ
ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ".
uﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ.
uﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
uﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .GRAPH
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ” “G + Gﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ.
.3ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(RIGHTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ .ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(LEFTﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
.4ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
.5ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
) ... K1(COPYﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ.
) ... K2(SWAPﺗﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ(
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎ
ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑـ” “ Rﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑـ” “ Bﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﲔ
ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎ.
5-11
ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(SELﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ” “ Bﺃﻭ ” . “ R
ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ) y = x(x + 1)(x – 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
) Xmin = –2,ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(
Xscale = 0.5
Yscale = 1
Xmax = 2,
Ymax = 2,
Ymin = –2,
Xscale = 1
Xmax = 4,
) Xmin = –4,ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ(
Yscale = 1
Ymax = 3,
Ymin = –3,
1 m GRAPH
2 !m(SET UP)cccc*1(G + G)J
*fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccc
3 !3(V-WIN)-cwcwa.fwc
-cwcwbw
6(RIGHT)-ewewbwc
-dwdwbwJ
()4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)v(v+b
v-b)w
)6(DRAW
)5 K1(COPY
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ Aﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .4
.6ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUN
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUN
.2ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ“.
.3ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ.
.5ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ y = 2x2 + 3x – 4
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .
Xscale = 2
Xmax = 5,
Xmin = –5,
Yscale = 5
Ymax = 10,
Ymin = –10,
)1 m RUN • MAT (or RUN
2 !m(SET UP)2(Line)J
5-12
3 !3(V-WIN)-fwfwcwc
-bawbawfwJ
4 !4(SKTCH)1(Cls)w
)=5(GRPH)1(Y
5 cvx+dv-ew
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ
• sin–1 θ
• cosh θ
• tanh–1 θ
• lnθ
'• 3
θ
• tan θ
• sinh θ
• cosh–1 θ
• log θ
• θ–1
• cos θ
• tan–1 θ
• sinh–1 θ
• θ2
• eθ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ
• sin θ
• cos–1 θ
• tanh θ
'•
θ
• 10θ
• sin–1 x
• cosh x
• tanh–1 x
• lnx
'• 3
x
• tan x
• sinh x
• cosh–1 x
• log x
• x–1
• ∫(x)dx
• cos x
• tan–1 x
• sinh–1 x
• x2
• ex
d2
)• 2 (x
dx
ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ θﻭﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ xﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ. -ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ،ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ.
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .GRAPH
ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ"ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ" ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ".
.2ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﹼ
.3ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.4ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )=(,!+( [ ) variable !.
) ] (!-ﻗﻴﻤﺔ , ... ,ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ,
.5ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ y = Ax2 – 3ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Aﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ -1 ،1 ،3
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 1
Xmax = 5,
Xmin = –5,
Yscale = 2
Ymax = 10,
Ymin = –10,
1 m GRAPH
2 !m(SET UP)cccc*3(Off)J
*fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccc
3 !3(V-WIN)-fwfwbwc
-bawbawcwJ
5-13
• sin x
• cos–1 x
• tanh x
'•
x
• 10x
)d (x
•
dx
4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)av(A)vx-d,
!+( [ )av(A)!.(=)d,b,-b
!-( ] )w
)5 6(DRAW
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ .
• ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.T,θ,r,Y,X :
• ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ،ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻧﻮﻉ
=Y) 1ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ(
ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ Yﺍﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻛـ =Yﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
ﻣﺜﻼ :ﻟﻠﺼﻖ Y=Xﻭ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ
• ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ .Y
ﻧﻮﻉ ) 2ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ(
ﻟﺼﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ =Yﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
ﻣﺜﻼ :ﻟﻠﺼﻖ Xﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ Y=X
• ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
uﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ
.1ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ
.2ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .GRAPH
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ" ﺍﻟﻲ "ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ".
.3ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﹼ
.4ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .
.5ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.6ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ y = 2x2 + 3x – 4ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
Y=Xﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 2
Xmax = 5,
Xmin = –5,
Yscale = 5
Ymax = 10,
Ymin = –10,
5-14
)1 m RUN • MAT (or RUN
a-(Y)!.(=)v
)!i(CLIP)ddd1(COPY
2 mGRAPH
3 !m(SET UP) cccc*3(Off)J
*fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccc
4 !3(V-WIN)-fwfwcwc
-bawbawfwJ
5 3(TYPE)1(Y=)cvx+dv-ew
)6(DRAW
)6 !j(PASTE
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ"
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻥ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ) .30ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ، 20ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ(.
• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ =Y :ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ.
.7ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،TABLEﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ TABLEﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
kﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ y = 3x2 – 2ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ.
uﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
• ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺑﻬﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ،ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺑﻬﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ x-ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
5-15
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﻣﻦ –3ﺍﻟﻰ ، 3ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ .1
m TABLE
)5(SET
-dwdwbw
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲟﻮﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ............ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ x
ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ...........ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ x
ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ..........ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) xﻓﺎﺻﻞ(
ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
.2ﺍﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ) 2(LISTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ . x-
• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، 6ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . gwﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .6
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
uﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1ﻭ Y3ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SELﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ”=“ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SELﺃﻳﻀﺎ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(TABLﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ .ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ x
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .(3 ،2 ،1 ،0 ،-1 ،-2 ،-3) 6
ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 6ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ،ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ.
5-16
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ”“dy/dx
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ.
• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﰎ
ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
uﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ )=(Y
• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ )=(r
• ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺔ )(Parm
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(TYPEﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ
)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ( .ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ.
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ x
• ﹼ
• ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺎﻕ( ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ
• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ
• ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ
• ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ
• }} ... {FORMﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{
• }} ... {DELﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ{
• }{ROW
• }} ... {DEL}/{INS}/{ADDﺣﺬﻑ{}/ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ{}/ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ{ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ
• }} ... {G • CON}/{G • PLTﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ{}/ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ{ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺮ(،
ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ.
• ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻏﻴﺮ (x-ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ.
5-17
kﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻧﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ
ﺻﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ.
uﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ xﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1
)K1(LMEM
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
bw
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .TABLE
.2ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
.4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.5ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ.
.6ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻤﻪ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ 5(G • CON) ...
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ 6(G • PLT) ...
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !6(G ↔ Tﺃﻭ .A
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ،ﻭ ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ –3ﺍﻟﻰ ، 3ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ .1
Y1 = 3x2 – 2, Y2 = x2
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 1
Yscale = 2
Xmax = 6,
Ymax = 10,
1 m TABLE
2 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc
-cwbawcwJ
5-18
Xmin = 0,
Ymin = –2,
3 3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw
vxw
4 5(SET)-dwdwbwJ
)5 6(TABL
)6 5(G • CON
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎ
ﲢﺪﻳﺪ T+Gﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .TABLE
.2ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ T+Gﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ.
.4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
.5ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.6ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ.
.7ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ 5(G • CON) ...
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ 6(G • PLT) ...
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،Y1 = 3x2 – 2ﻭ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ .ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ -3ﺍﻟﻰ ، 3ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ .1
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 1
Xmax = 6,
Xmin = 0,
Yscale = 2
Ymax = 10,
Ymin = –2,
1 m TABLE
2 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc
-cwbawcwJ
3 !m(SET UP)ccc*1(T+G)J
*fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: cc
4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw
)5 5(SET
-dwdwbwJ
)6 6(TABL
)7 5(G • CON
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ TABLEﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RECUR
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻔﻌﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﺃﻭ ). K1(CHNG
5-19
.8ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﻫﺎﻡ !
• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ .ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻛﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .DYNA
.2ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ 1(Cnt) ...
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ 10ﺻﻔﻮﻑ 2(Stop) ...
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ*1.
ﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ*2.
.5ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃ ﹼ
.6ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ.
.7ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ )ﻭﻗﻒ & ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ( ) ...........
(3(SPEED) 1
ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ( 2( ) .............
ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ(3( ).................
ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ() .............
(4
.8ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
*1ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ.
• Y=AX^3+BX2+CX+D
• Y=AX2+BX+C
)• Y=Atan(BX+C
• Y=A(X+B)2+C
)• Y=Acos(BX+C
• Y=AX+B
)• Y=Asin(BX+C
ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(TYPEﻭ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ.
* 2ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،y = A (x – 1)2 – 1ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻣﻦ 2ﺍﻟﻰ 5ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ .1ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﹼﺍﺕ.
1 m DYNA
2 !3(V-WIN)1(INIT)J
3 !m(SET UP)c*2(Stop)J
)*fx-9750GII: !m(SET UP
)4 5(B-IN)c1(SEL
5 4(VAR)cw-bw-bw
6 2(SET)cwfwbwJ
7 3(SPEED)3( )J
)8 6(DYNA
5-20
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .4
2
1
→
←
↑↓
3
4
→
←
kﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
.2ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻝ "ﻣﻮﺿﻊ".
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ
.5ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
.6ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ.
.7ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
.8ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ، y = Axﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ .1ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 10ﻣﺮﺍﺕ.
1 m DYNA
2 !3(V-WIN)1(INIT)J
3 !m(SET UP)cc*1(On)J
*fx-9750GII: c
)4 5(B-IN)1(SEL
5 4(VAR)bwaw
6 2(SET)bwewbwJ
7 3(SPEED)3( )J
)8 6(DYNA
→····
····←
5-21
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ DOT
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ – Xﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻝ =Yﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !m(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ * cccﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ =Yﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
*fx-9750GII:cc
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
) … 1(Normﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ – ) .Xﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(
) … 2(Highﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ –) .Xﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ(
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ .ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻻﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻭ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻭﻗﺎﺕ.
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .5(STOﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
.1ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
.2ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(RCLﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.9ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﻫﺎﻡ !
• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ . RECUR
kﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ.
• ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ } ،{anﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ an, n
• ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ an+1, an, n
• ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ an+2, an+1, an, n
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RECUR
5-22
.2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
}ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ 3(TYPE) 1(an) ...{an
}ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{ 2(an+1)...
}ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{ 3(an+2)...
.3ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
.4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻝ . nﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻻﻭﹼﻝ،
ﻭ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﻀﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
.5ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﺏ an+2 = an+1 + an
ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻝ) a1 = 1, a2 = 1ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﺒﻮﻧﺎﺗﺸﻲ( ﻛﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ n
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .6
1 m RECUR
)2 3(TYPE)3(an+2
3 4(n.an ··)3(an+1)+2(an)w
4 5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwbwJ
)5 6(TABL
* ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺘﲔ ﻝ
a2 = 1ﻭ . a1 = 1
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(FORMﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻝ"ﻋﺮﺽ "Σﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺿﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ.
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ . RECUR
.2ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ.
.4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻝ .nﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ .ﺍﻻﻭﹼﻟﻲ ،ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ.
.5ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.6ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
.7ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
) ... 5(G • CONﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ
) ... 6(G • PLTﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ
ﺏ a1 = 1ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻲ ﻝ ،an+1 = 2an + 1ﻛﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ nﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1
ﺍﻟﻰ . 6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 1
Yscale = 5
Xmax = 6,
Ymax = 65,
5-23
Xmin = 0,
Ymin = –15,
1 m RECUR
2 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc
-bfwgfwfwJ
3 3(TYPE)2(an+1)c2(an)+bw
4 5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwJ
)J
(5 1(SEL+S)f2
)6 6(TABL
)7 5(G • CON
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Aﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!6(G↔T
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﲟﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ .ﻝ )an (an+1, an+2), bn (bn+1, bn+2), cn (cn+1, cn+2
ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RECUR
.2ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
.4ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ nﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
.5ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
.6ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺻﻴﻎ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ bn+1 = bn + 0.1n − 0.2
ﻭ ، an+1 = 0.9anﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ a1 = 1ﻭ b1 = 1ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﺃﻧﺸﺄ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ nﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 10ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 1
Yscale = 1
Xmin = 0,
Ymin = 0,
Xmax = 2,
Ymax = 4,
1 m RECUR
2 !3(V-WIN) awcwbwc
awewbwJ
3 3(TYPE)2(an+1)a.j2(an)w
4(n.an ··)3(bn)+a.b1(n)-a.cw
4 5(SET)2(a1)bwbawbwbwJ
5-24
)5 6(TABL
)6 3(PHAS
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RECURﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ،
ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ .ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ،
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 3(PHASﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
) ....... 1(a • bﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) bn (bn+1, bn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2
) ....... 2(b • cﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )bn (bn+1, bn+2
) ....... 3(a • cﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻝ "ﻋﺮﺽ "Xﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ،ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ .ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ) 3(PHASﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
) ..... 1(anﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
) ..... 6(Σ anﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ “Σﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ RECURﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
) ..........1(a • bﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ an
) bn (bn+1, bn+2ﻭ )(an+1, an+2
) .......... 2(b • cﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ bn
) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )(bn+1, bn+2
) .......... 3(a • cﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ an
) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )(an+1, an+2
) ....... 4(Σ a • bﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) bn (bn+1, bn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2
) ....... 5(Σ b • cﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )bn (bn+1, bn+2
) ....... 6(Σ a • cﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2
5-25
kﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ،ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺪ(
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) y = f(xﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ an+1 = y, an = xﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ
ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ) an+1 = f(anﺍﳌﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ . an+1, anﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RECUR
.2ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ.
.4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ،ﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ،ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ.
.5ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ.
.6ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ، wﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻜﺒﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ
ﺍﺧﺮﻱ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ fcﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ an+1 = –3(an)2 + 3an, bn+1 = 3bn + 0.2
ﻭ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ,ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ :
ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ = ,0ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ = bnStr= 0.11, b0 = 0.11, anStr = 0.01,a0 =0.01 ,6
1 m RECUR
2 !3(V-WIN)awbwbwc
awbwbwJ
3 3(TYPE)2(an+1)-d2(an)x+d2(an)w
d3(bn)+a.cw
)4 5(SET)1(a0
awgwa.abwa.bbwc
a.abwa.bbwJ
)5 6(TABL
)6 4(WEB
)7 w~w(an is convergence
)cw~w(bn is divergence
• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(SEL+Sﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .4
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) y = f(xﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ .ﻭﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻻ ﹼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻮﻥ "ﺭﺑﻂ"
ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍ "ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
5-26
.10ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ
ﻫﺎﻡ !
• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ .CONICS
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ CONICSﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ .ﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .CONICS
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
)} ....1(RECTﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{
)} ....2(POLﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{
)} ....3(PARMﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ{
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﳕﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ.
R
w
.4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ x = 2y2 + y − 1ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ
ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ r = 4cosθ
ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
1 mCONICS
2 1(RECT)c(X=AY2+BY+C)w
)3 cwbw-bw6(DRAW
4 JJ
5 2(POL)cccc(R=2Acosθ)w
)6 cw6(DRAW
.11ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﳕﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ.
5-27
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.3ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
( … 1ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(
)
( … 2ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ) ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ(
)
( … 3ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ )ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ(
)
( … 4ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ﺫﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ(
)
.4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.5ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.6ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ.
ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ!4(SKTCH) 1(Cls) ...
ﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ 2(Tang) ...
ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ 3(Norm) ...
*2ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ 4(Inv) ...
)6(g)1(PLOT
} {Plot}/{On}/{Off}/{Changeﻧﻘﻄﺔ {Plot}/{Pl • On}/{Pl • Off}/{Pl • Chg} ...
)6(g)2(LINE
}} ... {Line}/{F • Lineﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﻃﻮﻃﺘﲔ ﺏ ) 6(g)1(PLOTﻣﻊ ﺧﻂ
}ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ{
ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ 6(g)3(Crcl) ...
ﺧﻂ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ 6(g)4(Vert) ...
ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ 6(g)5(Hztl) ...
ﻳﺪﻭﻱ 6(g)6(g)1(PEN) ...
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ 6(g)6(g)2(Text) ...
.7ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ)
( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ *3w
*1ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ
ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻱ.
*2ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ،ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ.
*3ﻭﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲF• ،
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . w
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻂ
ﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ.
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﺎﺳﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ) (2,0ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ
).y = x (x + 2) (x – 2
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
1 m GRAPH
2 !3(V-WIN)1(INIT)J
)J
(3 !m(SET UP)cccccccc*1
*fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII:ccccccc
5-28
4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)v(v+c)(v
-c)w
)5 6(DRAW
)6 !4(SKTCH)2(Tang
7 e~ew*1
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﳑﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ” “ ﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ . w
.12ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
kﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،!1(TRCEﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ*1.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
eﻭ dﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
.5ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ vﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )!1(TRCE
*1ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ " "Coordﻋﻠﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ
ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
5-29
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .GRAPH
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ
.3ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ) ، !1(TRCEﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﻄﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .GRAPH
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺣﺪﺩ Gﺍﻟﻰ Tﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ.
.3ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.4ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ(.
.5ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻱ ﻣﻔﻌﻼ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﻩ.
.6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﺍﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K1(CHNGﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
kﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ
ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻱ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .GRAPH
.2ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . !2(ZOOM)6(g)3(RNDﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ .Rnd
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ !1(TRCE),ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺗﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ.
kﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺬﻭﺭ
ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .GRAPH
.2ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ.
) ... !5(G-SLV)1(ROOTﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺬﻭﺭ
) ... 2(MAXﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ
) ... 3(MINﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ
5-30
- yﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ 4(Y-ICPT)...
5(ISCT) ... I
ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ -yﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ 6(g)1(Y-CAL) ... x
- yﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ - xﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ 6(g)2(X-CAL) ... x
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ 6(g)3(∫dx) ...
.4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰd
ﺍ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x- -ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ.
kﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎﻥ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﲔ.
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !5(G-SLV)5(ISCTﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻭ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (kﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ kﺍﻟﻰ .r
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﹼ
.5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ.
.6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﲔ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .d
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﲔ Y1ﻭ .Y2
Y1 = x + 1, Y2 = x2
5-31
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ )f(x) type
ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ) (Y > f(x), Y < f(x), Y t f(x) or Y s f(xﻓﻘﻂ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﲔ. -ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ.
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ
ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ y-ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ xﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ x-ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ .y
ﹼ
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀﻫﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ) (kﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ y -ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ !5(G-SLV)6(g)1(Y-CAL) ... x
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ x -ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ 6(g)2(X-CAL) ... y
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fcﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (kﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ x-ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ .y-
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ y-ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ .x -
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ y-ﻝ x = 0.5
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺗﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ
ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ x-ﻝ y= 0.5ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .Y2
)Y1 = x + 1, Y2 = x(x + 2)(x – 2
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻟﻺﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .e
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ X-CALﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ.
kﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ.
.1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .!5(G-SLV)6(g)3(∫dxﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ) (kﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fcﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (kﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ deﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . w
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
.6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ.
5-32
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ).(–2 ,0
)Y1 = x(x + 2)(x – 2
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .10-
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ.
kﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ
ﻫﺎﻡ !
• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ .CONICS
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .CONICS
.2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
)} ...1(RECTﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{
)} ...2(POLﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{
)} ...3(PARMﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺔ{
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻪ.
.4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ.
.5ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !5(G-SLVﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .
uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ
• }} ... {FOCS}/{VTX}/{LEN}/{eﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ{}/ﺫﺭﻭﺓ{}/ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ{}/ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ{
• }} ... {DIR}/{SYMﺧﻂ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ{}/ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ{
• }} ... {X-IN}/{Y-INﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ}/{x-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ{y-
uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ
• }} ... {CNTR}/{RADSﻣﺮﻛﺰ{}/ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ{
• }} ... {X-IN}/{Y-INﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ}/{x-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ{y-
uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
• }} ... {FOCS}/{VTX}/{CNTR}/{eﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ{}/ﺫﺭﻭﺓ{}/ﻣﺮﻛﺰ{}/ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ{
• }} ... {X-IN}/{Y-INﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ}/{x-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ{y-
uﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ
• }} ... {FOCS}/{VTX}/{CNTR}/{eﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ{}/ﺫﺭﻭﺓ{}/ﻣﺮﻛﺰ{}/ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ{
• }} ... {ASYMﺧﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ{
• }} ... {X-IN}/{Y-INﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ}/{x-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ{y-
5-33
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][G-SLV]-[FOCS]/[LEN
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ (Y – 2)2 + 3 = X
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
Xscale = 1
Xmax = 10,
Xmin = –1,
Yscale = 1
Ymax = 5,
Ymin = –5,
m CONICS
w
)bwcwdw6(DRAW
)!5(G-SLV
)1(FOCS
)ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(
)!5(G-SLV
)5(LEN
)ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ(
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺫﺭﻭﺗﲔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ d
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ.
• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻠﺔ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺫﺭﻭﺍﺕ.
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
][G-SLV]-[CNTR
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ
2
2
2
(X + 2) + (Y + 1) = 2
m CONICS
ccccw
)-cw-bwcw6(DRAW
)!5(G-SLV
)1(CNTR
)(Calculates the center.
5-34
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻫﺎﻡ !
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ
ﹼ
ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻪ،
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻷﻥ ،ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻰﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ.
.1ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STATﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ e,c,fﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ
ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،
ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ"
kﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ/ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ،ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ،
ﻭ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ).(GPH1,GPH2,GPH3
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(GRPHﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } ... {GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3ﺭﺳﻢ } {3}/{2}/{1ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ*1
• }} ... {SELﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) (GPH1, GPH2, GPH3ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ{
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
• }} ... {SETﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ({*1
*1ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ (3ﻫﻮ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ.
.1ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
][GRPH]-[SET
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﹼ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ).(GPH1,GPH2,GPH3
•
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
6-1
6
•
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ List 1ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﻔﺮﺩ ،ﻭ List 1ﻭ List 2ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x-ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.y-
•
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( .ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ "ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ" ،ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺩﺙ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ .ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ .ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،2ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
• ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ-ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(6-12ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ،ﺇﻟﺦ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! ) fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860GII/fx-9860G AU PLUSﻓﻘﻂ(
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ 0ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ
ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ 0ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ.
•
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
][GRPH]-[SET
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(GRPH)6(SETﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) StatGraphﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ(
• } ... {GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ }{3}/{2}/{1
• ) Graph Typeﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
• }} ... {Scat}/{xy}/{NPP}/{Pieﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ{ xy}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ{}/ﺍﻃﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ{
• }} ... {Hist}/{Box}/{Bar}/{N·Dis}/{Brknﻣﺪﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ{}/ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻮﺭ{
• }} ... {X}/{Med}/{X^2}/{X^3}/{X^4ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ-ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ{/
}ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ{
• }} ... {Log}/{Exp}/{Pwr}/{Sin}/{Lgstﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ
ﺍﻷﺳﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ{
• ) XListﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ)YList /(x-ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ (y -
• }} ... {Listﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ {26
• ﺗﺮﺩﺩ )ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ(
• }} ... {1ﻣﺨﻄﻂ -1ﺍﻟﻰ{-1
• }} ... {Listﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ {26
• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻄﻄﺔ(
• }•{ ... {u}/{×}/ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ
6-2
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(
• }} ... {LISTﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ {26
• ﻋﺮﺽ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ(
• } ... {%}/{Dataﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ}ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ{}/ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ{
• ) % Sto Memﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(
• } ... {None}/{Listﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ}:ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{}/ﺣﺪﺩ List 1ﺍﻟﻰ 26ﻭ ﺍﺧﺰﻥ{
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺮﺑﻊ-ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ) ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ ) ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ(
• }} ... {On}/{Offﻳﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ{ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ ﳌﺮﺑﻊ -ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ:
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ) 1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(
• }} ... {LISTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ {26
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ) 2ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(/ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ) 3ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(
• }} ... {None}/{LISTﻻ{}/ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ {26
• ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ )ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ(
• }} ... {Leng}/{HZtlﻃﻮﻟﻲ{}/ﺃﻓﻘﻲ{
.2ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ
][GRPH]-[SEL
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(/ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
.1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(GRPH)4(SELﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/
ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ StatGraph1ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻝ) Graph 1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،(GPH1
StatGraph2ﻝ ,Graph 2ﻭ StatGraph3ﻝ . Graph 3
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
• }} ... {On}/{Offﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ({}/ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ({
• }} ... {DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ{
.3ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ
ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ Stat Windﺍﻟﻰ "ﻳﺪﻭﻱ" .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ،ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻥ ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)!m(SET UP)2(Man
)ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ(J
ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﰎ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﹼ
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ Stat Windﺍﻟﻰ "ﻳﺪﻭﻱ".
6-3
Pie, 1-Sample Z Test, 2-Sample Z Test, 1-Prop Z Test, 2-Prop Z Test, 1-Sample t Test, 2)ﺗﻬﻤﻞ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ– xﻓﻘﻂ( Sample t Test, χ2 GOF Test, χ2 2-way Test, 2-Sample F Test
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ) x-ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2
• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ) y-ﻋﺮﺿﻲ( .ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x/yﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ .
.2ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻻﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ،ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(.
ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ .ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟـ"ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 6-1ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
kﺍﻃﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻃﻂ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ .ﻳﺤﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ } • {u / × /ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻬﺎ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ A, Jﺍﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ .ﻭﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻫﻮ .20ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻢ ﺏ A, B, Cﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ,ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ
ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ , 3 ,2 ,1ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ” “%ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(6-3ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﲢﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ Freqﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ 1ﻝ Freqﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
6-4
⇒
)w(DRAW
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ) (Q1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ
) ،(Q3ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ) .(Medﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ
)ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ (whiskersﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ
) (minXﺃﻗﺼﻰ ) (maxXﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
minX
maxX
Q1 Med Q3
ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )1(GRPH
ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ،ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،6(SETﺛﻢ ﹼ
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ
)،GPH1ﻭ ،GPH2ﻭ (GPH3ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ-ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ.
ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ
” “MedBoxﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺛﻢ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻭﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ ﻝ"ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﻧﻮﻉ "Q1Q3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ Q1ﻭ ،Q3ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ-ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ .ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻲ ﺏ ] ،[3] ،[2] ،[1ﻭ ﻣﺎ
ﺷﺎﺑﺔ ،ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﳋﻄﻮﻁ 3 ،2 ،1ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ..
• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃ ﹼﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ.
ﻳﻘﻊ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(6-3ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺛﻨﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ Data1ﻭ ، Data3ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ .Data26-5
kﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ
Freqﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ .ﻭﲢﺪﺩ 1ﻝ Freq
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻮﺭ
ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺪﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ Freqﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
ﻭﲢﺪﺩ 1ﻝ Freqﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
⇒
)w(DRAW
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺈﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ–ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ
ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ1(1VAR).
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻳﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ.
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ Med ..............
ﻭﺳﻂ x¯ ..................
ﺟﻤﻊ Σx ................
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ Σx2 ...............
ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ maxX ............
ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ σx .................
ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻝ Q1 ................
ﺭﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ Q3 ................
ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ sx .................
ﻭﺿﻊ Mod ..............
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ n ..................
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ Mod:n ..........
ﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ minX .............
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ Mod:F ..........
6-6
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(DRAWﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ Q1Q3ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺎ ”) “Stdﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ”) “OnDataﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ( ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Q1ﻭ .Q3
ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ” “Stdﺃﻭ ” ، “OnDataﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻝ"ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Stdﻭ " "OnDataﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
kﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Stdﻭ OnData
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Q1Q3 Typeﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
Std u
ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ nﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﺯﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ nﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺟﻲ:
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ:
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ .ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
n
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ{
} = Q1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
2
} = Q3ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
n
2
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ{
} = Medﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟـ
8
n
2
ﻭ ﺍﻟـ +1
n
2
{
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
6
4
2
7
5
3
1
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ = 4 + 5
2
2+3
= Q1
2
6+7
= Q3
2
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ nﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ:
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ:
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ(.
ﺗﺴﺘﺒﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ .ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
} = Q1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ n – 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ{
2
} = Q3ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
} = Medﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟـ
n–1
2
n–1
2
ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ{
{
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ = Med = Q3 = Q1 ،n = 1ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
6-7
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
9
7
8
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
5
6
4
3
2
1
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
2+3
= Q1
2
7+8
= Q3
2
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ) fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860GII/fx-9860G AU PLUSﻓﻘﻂ(
ﻗﻴﻢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
} = Q1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ {0.25
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.25ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Q1ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
} = Q3ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.75ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ {0.75
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.75ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Q3ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
} = Medﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.5ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ {0.5
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.5ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Medﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
1
0.1
0.1
0.1/1.0 = 0.1
2
0.1
0.2
0.2/1.0 = 0.2
3
0.2
0.4
0.4/1.0 = 0.4
4
0.3
0.7
0.7/1.0 = 0.7
5
0.1
0.8
0.8/1.0 = 0.8
6
0.1
0.9
0.9/1.0 = 0.9
7
0.1
1.0
1.0/1.0 = 1.0
• 3ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.25ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ .Q1 = 3
• 5ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.75ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.75ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ .Q3 = 5
• 4ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.5ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.5ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ .Med = 4
6-8
OnData u
ﻗﻴﻢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
} = Q1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ {0.25
} = Q3ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.75ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ {0.75
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
)ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ(10 :
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
1
1
1
1/10 = 0.1
2
1
2
2/10 = 0.2
3
2
4
4/10 = 0.4
4
3
7
7/10 = 0.7
5
1
8
8/10 = 0.8
6
1
9
9/10 = 0.9
7
1
10
10/10 = 1.0
• 3ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.25ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.25ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ
.Q1 = 3
• 5ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.75ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ،0.75ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ
.Q3 = 5
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ )(0.25
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ )(0.75
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
7
6
5
4
0.4
4
4
Q3
3
3
0.2
0.1
2
1
Q1
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Medﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Stdﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "."Q1Q3 Type
• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "OnDataﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "."Q1Q3 Type
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860GII/fx-9860G AU PLUSﻓﻘﻂ.
6-9
.3ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ xy
ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ . xy
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.3ﺣﺪﺩ )Scatﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ( ﺍﻭ ) xyﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ (xy
ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ A Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ .ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ،ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ xy
) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( 0.5 ، 1.2 ، 2.4، 4.0، 5.2
) yﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( -2.1 ، 0.3 ، 1.5 ،2.0 ، 2.4
1 m STAT
2 a.fwb.cwc.ewewf.cwe
-c.bwa.dwb.fwcwc.ew
) )1(GRPH)6(SET)c1(Scat)J1(GPH1ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ( 3
))1(GRPH)6(SET)c2(xy)J1(GPH1ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ 3 (xy
)ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ (xy
)ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ(
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ.
.3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ.
.4ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ.
6-10
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ ،ﺛﻢ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ.
) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( 0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2
) yﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( –2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4
1 m STAT
2 a.fwb.cwc.ewewf.cwe
-c.bwa.dwb.fwcwc.ew
)1(GRPH)6(SET)c1(Scat)J1(GPH1
)3 1(CALC)6(g)2(Log
)4 6(DRAW
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺛﺮﻱ.
• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ .ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ )ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺗﻠﻔﺔ.
• {ax+b}/{a+bx}/{Med}/{X^2}/{X^3}/{X^4}/{Log}/{ae^bx}/{ab^x}/{Pwr}/{Sin}/{Lgst} ...
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ }ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{(ax+bﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{(a+bxﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ-
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ
}/{ abxﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ}/{ aebxﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﻮﺓ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻴﺒﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ{
• }} ...{2VARﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ{
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﻣﺜﻞ aﻭ bﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
ﺍﳋﻄﻲ y = ax + bﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ،
ﻓﻲ ﺣﲔ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .
ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ.
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ r ..............
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ r2 .............
ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ MSe.........
6-11
kﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 6(DRAW
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ
ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) y-ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ y-ﻋﻨﺪ x = 0ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺮ(.
ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ.
)1(CALC)2(X
)1(ax+b) or 2(a+bx
)6(DRAW
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ.
y = ax + b
)ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ( a .............
ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ b ............. (y-
y = a + bx
ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ a ............. (y-
ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ( b .............
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ–ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﺘﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ
ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ .ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ،ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻘﻠﹼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻓﺔ.
)1(CALC)3(Med
)6(DRAW
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ -ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ.
y = ax + b
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ a ..............
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ b ..............
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ /ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﻲ /ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ.
ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ /ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺒﻲ /ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ.
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ /ﻣﻜﻌﺒﻲ /ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ Ex.
)1(CALC)4(X^2
)6(DRAW
6-12
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ
........ y = ax3 + bx2 + cx + dﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ a .........
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ b .........
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ c .........
ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ d .........
)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(y-
............ y = ax2 + bx + cﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ a .........
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ b .........
ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ c .........
)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(y-
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ
................. y = ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + eﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ a ..............
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ b ............
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ c ............
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊd ...............
ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ e ............. (y-
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ
ﻳﻌ ﹼﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ yﻛﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻝ . xﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ
× y = a + bﻓﻲ ، xﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻥ = Xﻓﻲ ، xﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .y = a + bX
)1(CALC)6(g)2(Log
)6(DRAW
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ.
xﻓﻲ·y = a + b
ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ a ..............
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ b ..............
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ
ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ yﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ﻝ . xﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻲ ،y = a × ebxﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ
ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ = yﻓﻲ .a + bxﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ = Yﻓﻲ ،yﻭ = Aﻓﻲ ، aﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .Y = A+bx
)1(CALC)6(g)3(Exp
)1(aeˆbx) or 2(abˆx
)6(DRAW
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ.
y = a·ebx
................. aﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
................. bﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
y = a·bx
................. aﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
................. bﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
6-13
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ
ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻦ yﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻝ .xﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ، y = a × xb
ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ = yﻓﻲ × a + bﻓﻲ . xﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ = x
ﻓﻲ ، xﻭ = yﻓﻲ , yﻭ = Aﻓﻲ ،aﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .Y = A + bX
)1(CALC)6(g)4(Pwr
)6(DRAW
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ.
y = a·x
ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ a.............
ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ b.................
b
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ.
ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ .
y = a·sin(bx + c) + d
)1(CALC)6(g)5(Sin
)6(DRAW
ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ )Radﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ( .ﻭ ﻻ
ﹼ
• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ
ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ.
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ.
c
1 + ae–bx
=y
)1(CALC)6(g)6(g)1(Lgst
)6(DRAW
• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ.
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ– (yﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
6-14
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
) "“List 1ﺍﻟﻰ" ("List 26ﻝ ."“Resid Listﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ
ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ.
kﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 1(CALC)1(2VAR
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﻔﻰﺀ ﺯﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺟﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Σy2 ....... y
ﺍﻹﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ σy ........
ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ Σxy .....
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ xﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ y
ﺍﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ minX .... x
ﺍﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ maxX ... x
ﺍﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ minY .... y
ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ maxY ... y
sy ........
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ o ....... x
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Σx ...... x
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ Σx2 .....
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
ﺍﻹﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ σx ......
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ sx .......
ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ x
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ n .........x
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ p ........ y
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ Σy ...... y
kﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(6-11ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )5(COPY
• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﳊﻔﻆ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
*1ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .GRAPH
6-15
.4ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﰎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(CALC)6(SET
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ.
ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1Var XList........... (X
ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ) ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ( 1Var Freq ...........
ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2Var XList........... (X
ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ) yﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2Var YList ........... (X
ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ) ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ( 2Var Freq ...........
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ" ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(CALC)1(1VAR
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ cﻭ fﻟﻴﻤﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ -
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-6
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ" ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
6-16
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(CALC)2(2VAR
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻟﻴﻤﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-15
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ" ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ" ،ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺔ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(CALC)3(REGﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }... {ax+b}/{a+bx}/{Med}/{X^2}/{X^3}/{X^4}/{Log}/{ae^bx}/{ab^x}/{Pwr}/{Sin}/{Lgst
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ }ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{(ax+bﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{(a+bxﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ -
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻲ
)ﺷﻜﻞ }/{ aebxﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ }/{ abxﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﻮﺓ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻴﺒﻲ{}/ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ{
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
)2(CALC)3(REG)1(X)1(ax+b
ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻟـ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ" ﺍﻟﻰ " ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ".
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) (r2ﻭ MSe
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) (r2ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﻲ
ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ .ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ MSeﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ.
6-17
n
2
))Σ (y – (ax + b
i
i
i=1
n
2
)) Σ (y – (a + bx
i
i
i=1
n
+ bxi + c))2
Σ (y – (ax
2
i
i
i=1
n
)) Σ (y – (ax + bx + cx + d
2
2
i
i
3
i
i
i=1
n
+ cxi2 + dxi + e))2
3
Σ (y – (ax + bx
i
4
i
i
i=1
n
)) Σ (y – (a + b ln x
2
i
i
i=1
n
2
)) Σ (ln y – (ln a + bx
i
i
i=1
n
2
)) Σ (ln y – (ln a + (ln b) · x
i
i
i=1
n
)) Σ (ln y – (ln a + b ln x
2
i
i
i=1
n
)) Σ (y – (a sin (bx + c) + d
2
i
i
i=1
2
C
1 + ae–bxi
n
– yi
Σ
i=1
1
= (ax + b)....................... MSeﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ •
n–2
1
n–2
1
= .................................. MSeﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ •
n–3
= (a + bx) ...................... MSe
1
n–4
1
n–5
1
n–2
1
n–2
1
n–2
1
n–2
= ................................. MSeﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﻲ
= .................................... MSeﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ
= ............................. MSeﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ
ﺍﺳﻲ
= (a·e )........................... MSeﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﹼ
bx
•
•
•
•
= (a·bx)............................ MSe
= ....................................... MSeﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﻮﺓ
•
1
n–2
1
= ................................ MSeﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ •
n–2
= .................................... MSeﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻴﺒﻲ
•
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ STATﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Y-CALﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ y -ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ
ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ–ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .Y-CAL
.1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !5(G-SLV)1(Y-CALﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . w
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . w
• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ .x-
.2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻝ xﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . w
• ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻝ xﻭ yﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ
ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
6-18
.3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ
ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ” “Coordﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Y-CALﻣﻊ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ .DefG
uﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ) ﻛﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ( ،ﻟﻮﺿﻊ STATﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ
ﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﶈﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ .ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).6(COPY
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ) ( ,
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ ( RUN
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ yﻭ xﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻝ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ
yi = 1000ﻭ xi = 20
30
25
20
15
10
xi
1014
1011
1010
1005
1003
yi
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ.
.3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .( RUN
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ca (xi
K5(STAT)*2( )w
)* fx-7400GII: 4(STAT
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻝ yﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻝ xi = 20
)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ baaa (yi
1( )w
ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻝ Xﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻝ yi = 1000
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ -ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﻲ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ،ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ
ﺟﻴﺒﻲ ،ﺃﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ.
6-19
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MAT
)ﺃﻭ .(RUN
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(PROB))K6(g)3(PROBﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ 6(g)(fx-7400GIIﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• }( ... {P(}/{Q(}/{Rﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ } {(P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(tﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
• }(} ... {tﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟـ ){t(x
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ) R(t), P(t), Q(tﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻝ ) t(xﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
)R (t
)Q (t
0 t
)P (t
0 t
0 t
σx
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ 20ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ
ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ 160.5ﺳﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ 175.5ﺳﻢ.
ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻊ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ 175.5ﺳﻢ؟
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
ﻃﻮﻝ )ﺳﻢ(
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ
ﻃﻮﻝ )ﺳﻢ(
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
6
173.3
4
1
158.5
1
7
175.5
2
2
160.5
1
8
178.6
2
3
163.3
2
9
180.4
2
4
167.5
2
10
186.7
1
5
170.2
3
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .2
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
)2(CALC)6(SET
1(LIST)bw
)c2(LIST)cw!J(QUIT
)2(CALC)1(1VAR
6-20
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ , mﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ ،(RUNﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )K6(g)3(PROB
)) 2(PROBﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIIﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) (PROBﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
3(PROB)*6(g)4(t() bga.f)w
)* fx-7400GII: 2(PROB
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
)ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ tﻝ 160.5ﺳﻢ(
–1.633855948
)( –1.634
4(t() bhf.f)w
ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ tﻝ 175.5ﺳﻢ(
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ0.4963343361 :
)( 0.496
)1(P()a.ejg1(P()-b.gde)w
)ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ(
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ0.638921 :
)ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ( 63.9%
3(R()a.ejg)w
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
)ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(
0.30995
ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )( 31.0
kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUN
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUN
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ.
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ )P (0.5
)1 m RUN • MAT (or RUN
2 !4(SKTCH)1(Cls)w
)=5(GRPH)1(Y
3 K6(g)3(PROB)*6(g)1(P()a.f)w
)* fx-7400GII: 2(PROB
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﺍﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ PRGMﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ) .ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-40
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
} ،{1, 2, 3ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ σ = 1.5ﻭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ .μ = 2
6-21
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RUN • MAT
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
)K5(STAT)3(DIST)1(NORM
1(NPd)!*( { )b,c,d
!/( } ),b.f,c)w
• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-29
kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺻﺼﺔ .ﻭ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUNﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ] nﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ([m
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ
ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ] nﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ([m
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .... nﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ... mﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻳﺔ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x -ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،1ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، 2ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ
ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ
x
90
80
70
60
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
1
4
5
3
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
.3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUN
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
K5(STAT)4(S • Dev)*J
1(LIST)1(List)b,1(List)c)w
)* fx-7400GII: 4(STAT)3(S • Dev
J5(STAT)5(Var)*J
1(LIST)1(List)b,1(List)c)w
)* fx-7400GII: 4(STAT)4(Var
6-22
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ TEST
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ PRGMﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﳌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ STATﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ، Zﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،tﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-23
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ zﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ p-ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻋﻴﻨﺔ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ
ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ:
ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) μﺷﺮﻁ( * ، ≠ μ0ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ ، μ0 = 0
ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ،σ = 1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ، o = 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ . n = 2
* ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ " μﺷﺮﻁ "≠ μ0ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ 0ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUN
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)K5(STAT)6(g)1(TEST)1(Z
1(1-S)a,a,b,b,c
w
JJJ
1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ans)w
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .4
:1ﻋﻼﻣﺔ z
:2ﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
o :3
n :4
• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ TESTﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ TESTﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ
ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ" ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-32
.5ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ .ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ) ﻛﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ( ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ،ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺩﺍﺋﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺭﺍ.
6-23
-1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ.
-1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺡ.
-2ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ .ﻭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ
ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﺑﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﺑﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ.
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ .ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ.
-1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
LinearRegﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ.
ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،χ2ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) GOF χ2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﲔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻳﻨﺸﻰﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺎ )ﻣﺜﻞ "ﻧﻌﻢ" ﻭ
"ﻻ"( ﻭ ﻳﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Fﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺮﻃﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻎ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ،ﻭ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺘﺎﻣﻴﻨﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ
ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻬﻮﺓ ،ﻭ ﺍﳋﻤﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺸﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺦ.
ANOVAﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .ﳝﻜﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ.
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ.
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ.
ﺗﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .ﻭ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ.
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(TESTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) Zﺻﻔﺤﺔ • 3(TEST)1(Z) ... (6-25
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) tﺻﻔﺤﺔ 2(t) ... (6-27
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) χ2ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 3(CHI) ... (6-30
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) Fﺻﻔﺤﺔ 4(F) ... (6-31
) AVONAﺻﻔﺤﺔ 5(ANOV) ... (6-32
6-24
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) ... 1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
• ) ... 6(DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ Z
uﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .Z
• ) ... 1(Zﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ z
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ zﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Zﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ
ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻞ -ﺍﻻﺛﻨﺘﲔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ) ... 2(Pﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.p-
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ p-ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ,ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ zﻭ pﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Zﻭ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
-1 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ -1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)1(Z
)1(1-S
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
...... μ≠11.4ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
.............. sxﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
6-25
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
-2 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)1(Z
)2(2-S
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
......... μ1≠μ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
............. sx1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
............. sx2ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μ1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
-1 uﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ -1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)1(Z
)3(1-P
6-26
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ≠ .............0.5ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ xﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
-2 uﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ-2 .ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)1(Z
)4(2-P
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ p1>p2............
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ p1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
kﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
uﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .t
• ) ... 1(Tﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ .t
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ tﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Tﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻞ – ﺍﻻﺛﻨﺘﲔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ) ... 2(Pﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ –. p
6-27
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ– pﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ tﻭ pﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Pﻭ Tﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
-1 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ -1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ . t
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)2(t
)1(1-S
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
................... μ≠11.3ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
-2 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ .
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .t
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)2(t
)2(2-S
6-28
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
........ μ1≠μ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
.............. spﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻊ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μ1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
LinearReg uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) (x, yﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ a, bﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ .y = a + bxﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ
ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ،tﻭ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ xﻭ .y
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)2(t
)3(REG
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
..............β≠0 & ρ≠0ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(COPYﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
6-29
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ] [Resid Listﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻝ LinearRegﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .t
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ β & ρﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑـ ]ﺣﻔﻆ [Resﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ] [Resid Listﻋﻠﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ] [Resid Listﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
k
2
u
χﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
2
χﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) ... 1(CHIﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔχ2-
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ χ2ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )1(CHIﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
• ) ... 2(Pﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ.p-
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ p-ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ χ2ﻭ pﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Cﻭ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
ﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) GOF χ2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) GOF χ2ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﲔ .ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)3(CHI
)1(GOF
ﺛﻢ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩ ............ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ(.
ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ .............ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ.
......... CNTRBﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩ
ﻧﺎﰋ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
6-30
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
.....................CNTRBﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ.
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ χ2
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻉ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ /ﻻ(.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)3(CHI
)2(2WAY
ﺛﻢ ،ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
.smeti
ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩ .......ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (Zﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ(.
ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ........ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (Zﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺧﻄﲔ ﺑﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ .ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Matﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ "ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩ" ﻭ "ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ" ﻣﻈﻠﻞ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
) Aﺍﻟﻰ .( Z
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2('MATﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6('MATﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
-2 kﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ F
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Fﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Fﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .F
6-31
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)4(F
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
........ σ1≠σ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
.............. x¯1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
.............. x¯2ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .
• ) ... 1(Fﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ .F
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ Fﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Fﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ
ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺍﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻞ -ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ) ... 2(Pﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ .p
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ p-ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ Fﻭ pﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Fﻭ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ σ1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2
ANOVA k
ANOVAﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ
ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ.
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ.
6-32
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)3(TEST
)5(ANOV
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ...............ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ) ANOVAﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(
ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ............... Aﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
ﺗﺎﺑﻊ .....................ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
1
.......... Save Resﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ * (22
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ..................ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ) ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ(
[Save Res] *1ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ
ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻻﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ 1ﺍﻟﻰ
.22
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ......... Bﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ(26
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) .....1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ) ....6(DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻓﻘﻂ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ(.
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ
}List1={1,1,2,2
}List1={1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2
}List2={124,913,120,1001
}List2={1,1,2,2,1,1,2,2
}List3={113,116,139,132,133,131,126,122
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
6-33
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ......... (A) 1ﻋﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، dfﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، SSﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، SMﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، Fﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .....(ERR) 2ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ .MS
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ......... (A) 1ﻋﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،MSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،Fﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ......... (B) 2ﻋﺎﻣﻞ df Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،MSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،Fﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .......(BA) 3ﻋﺎﻣﻞ × Aﻋﺎﻣﻞ Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، SSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،MSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،Fﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
* ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺻﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ....(ERR) 4ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ .MS
............................. Fﻗﻴﻤﺔ F
....................... pﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
..................... dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ
..................... SSﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ
................... MSﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ
ﻣﻊ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ،Bﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ X-ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ .Aﺍﶈﻮﺭ Y-ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ) 1(Traceﺃﻭ ) ... !1(TRCEﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ
ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﺍﻭ . dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﻭ .c
• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،
ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Aﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ،Mﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
6-34
) ANOVA kﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ
(
uﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ
ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ :ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ) (Aﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ) . (Bﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ .
B2
)ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ( B
)ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( A
B1
132
،
116 139
،
113
A1
122
،
131 126
،
133
A2
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ ﻣﻦ .5%
: Hoﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ
: Hoﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ.
: Hoﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ.
uﺣﻠﻮﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2} =1
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{1,1,2,2,1,1,2,2} =2
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{113,116,139,132,133,131,126,122} =3
ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 3ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 2ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ
ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3ﻛﻌﺎﻣﻞ Aﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ) (Aﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ . P = 0.2458019517
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ ) (p = 0.2458019517ﻫﻮ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ )، (0.05
ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ) (Bﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ .P = 0.04222398836
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ )(p = 0.04222398836ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ )، (0.05
ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ) (A × Bﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻻﻫﻤﻴﺔ .P = 2.78169946e-3
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ) (p = 2.78169946e-3ﻫﻮ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ )، (0.05
ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ.
ﻭ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ
ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ.
6-35
uﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
uﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ
6-36
.6ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ( ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ
)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ( .ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻖ ،ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻳﺤﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ .ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ 95%ﻭ .99%ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻮﺳﻊ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،
ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺪﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
ﻣﻊ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ، 95%ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ 5%ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ،
ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ .ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
-1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ
ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺘﲔ.
-1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﳒﺎﺣﺎﺕ.
-2ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
-1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ tﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ tﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STATﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(INTRﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 4(INTR)1(Zﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ) Zﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-38
) ... 2(tﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ) tﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-39
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ.
uﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ < 1ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ 0 < C-ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ C-ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ .ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ < 100ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ 1 < C-ﻳﻌ ﹼﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ .100
6-37
kﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z
-1 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Z
-1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)4(INTR
)1(Z
)1(1-S
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
-2 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Z
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)4(INTR
)1(Z
)2(2-S
-1 uﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Z
-1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)4(INTR
)1(Z
)3(1-P
6-38
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
-2 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Z
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)4(INTR
)1(Z
)4(2-P
kﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ t
-1 uﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ t
ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)4(INTR
)2(t
)1(1-S
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
6-39
-2 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ t
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ tﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ tﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .t
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
)4(INTR
)2(t
)2(2-S
.7ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ" ،ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻦ
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ( ،ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ .ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ،ﻭ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ.
ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ
ﻛﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ .ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ
) 80%ﻣﺜﻼ( ﻛﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﺍﶈﺪﺩ.
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ tﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ t-ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺒﺔ
ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ، tﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ( ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﻝ χ2ﻭ ، Fﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STATﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(DISTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
6-40
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ • 5(DIST)1(NORM) ... ( 6-41
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ) t-ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 2(t) ... (6-43
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ) χ2ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 3(CHI) ... (6-44
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ) Fﺻﻔﺤﺔ 4(F) ... (6-45
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 5(BINM) ... (6-46
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 6(g)1(POISN) ... (6-48
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 6(g)2(GEO) ... (6-49
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 6(g)3(H.GEO) ... (6-51
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ) ... 6(DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
kﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Stat Windﻳﻜﻮﻥ
"ﺁﻟﻲ" .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ " "Stat Windﻳﻜﻮﻥ
"ﻳﺪﻭﻱ".
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ P-CALﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ p-ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ P-CALﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻭ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ، t-ﻭ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ، χ2ﺃﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ .F
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .P-CAL
.1
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )!5(G-SLV) 1(P-CAL
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ . x
.2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻝ xﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . w
• ﻳﺆﺩﹼﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ pﻭ xﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﺍﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ.
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻗﻴﻢ xﻭ pﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ xﻭ ، pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
uﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
)5(DIST)1(NORM)1(NPd
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ) (pﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ
xﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ
ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
6-41
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ.
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ σ = 1ﻭ μ = 0ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔx-
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
)5(DIST)1(NORM)2(NCd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔx-
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
)5(DIST)1(NORM)3(InvN
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )ﻗﻴﻢ ( ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ
ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ
) < 1ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ < (0
ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ
ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ.
6-42
f (x)dx = p
Upper
Lower
∫
f (x)dx = p
∞+
Lower
∫
f (x)dx = p
ﺫﻳﻞ :ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ
ﺫﻳﻞ :ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻲ
ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ.
Upper
∫
∞−
ﺫﻳﻞ :ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ
ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ.
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ∞ = 1E99, –∞ = –1E99 :
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ.
kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺎﻟﺐt-
uﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐt-
)5(DIST)2(t)1(tPd
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ – tﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ )(pﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐt-
)5(DIST)2(t)2(tCd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ t-ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻟﺐt-
ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ tﻳﻘﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-
6-43
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐt-
)5(DIST)2(t)3(InvN
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ t-ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ df
)ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ.
kﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ χ2
uﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ χ2
ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ) (pﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
)5(DIST)3(CHI)1(CPd
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)(x
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ χ2
ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
6-44
)5(DIST)3(CHI)2(CCd
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x
• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2
ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ(ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
)5(DIST)3(CHI)3(InvC
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)(x
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ .χ2
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ F
uﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ F
)5(DIST)4(F)1(FPd
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ Fﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ (p) Fﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)(x
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
6-45
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ F
)5(DIST)4(F)2(FCd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ Fﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ F
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)(x
• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
)5(DIST)4(F)3(InvF
ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ Fﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻲ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ Fﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ d:dfﻭ ) n:dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻂ
ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ( ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)(x
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ .F
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ
uﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ
)5(DIST)5(BINM)1(BPd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ
ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ
ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
6-46
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)(x
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ .
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ
)5(DIST)5(BINM)2(BCd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)(x
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ.
uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ
)5(DIST)5(BINM)3(InvB
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)(x
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ .
6-47
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ` (
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ(
ﻭ `) xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInvﻭ ،`xInvﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ
ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
uﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ
)5(DIST)6(g)1(POISN)1(PPd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ
ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ
ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
• ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)1(POISN)2(PCd
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
6-48
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ
)(x
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ.
uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)1(POISN)3(InvP
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ.
)(x
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻭ `xInv
)ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInvﻭ ، ` xInvﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺬﻳﺮ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)1(GPd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ
ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ،ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ
ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ.
6-49
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ.
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)2(GCd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
)(x
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ.
uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)3(InvG
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ
• ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ.
6-50
)(x
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻭ `xInv
)ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInvﻭ ، `xInvﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳊﺠﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ
uﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)3(H.GEO)1(HPd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ.
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)3(H.GEO)2(HCd
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ.
6-51
)(x
uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ
)5(DIST)6(g)3(H.GEO)3(InvH
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻣﻦ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ
)(x
• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ
) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ` ( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ(
ﻭ ) `xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ` ( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInvﻭ ، `xInvﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ
ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ،
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
.8ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ.
kﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ..................................ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
-1) μﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .............. (Zﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )” “≠ μ0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﺍﺛﻨﲔ“< μ0” ،
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ “> μ0” ،ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(.
-2) μ1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ............. (Zﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )” “≠ μ2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﺍﺛﻨﲔ“< μ2” ،
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ “> μ2” ، 2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ .(2
6-52
ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ )-1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ...... (Zﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )” “≠ p0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ،
” “< p0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻲ “> p0”،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(
-2) p1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ........... (Zﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )” “≠ pﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ – ﺍﺛﻨﲔ،
” “< p2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ “> p2” ، 2
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ .(2
-1) μﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ............... (tﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )” “≠ μ0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﺍﺛﻨﲔ “< μ0” ،
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻲ “> μ0”،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(.
-2) μ1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .............. (tﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ)” “≠ μ2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﺍﺛﻨﲔ،
” “< μ2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ “> μ2” ، 2
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ .(2
) β & ρﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ...(t LinearRegﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ “≠ 0”) ρ-ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﺍﺛﻨﲔ “< 0” ،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ
ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ “> 0”،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(.-2) σ1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .............(Fﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ )” “≠ σ2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﺍﺛﻨﲔ،
” “< σ2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ “> σ2” ، 2
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ .(2
.......................................μ0ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ
........................................ σﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ )(σ > 0
....................................... σ1ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ (σ1 > 0) 1
....................................... σ2ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ (σ > 0) 2
.................................... Listﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
.................................. List1ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
..................................List 2ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )2ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
...................................Freqﺗﺮﺩﺩ ) 1ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
.................................Freq1ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1) 1ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
.................................Freq2ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1) 2ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ..................................ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ
........................................ oﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
...................................... o1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
....................................... o2ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
........................................ nﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
....................................... n1ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
....................................... n2ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) 2ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
....................................... p0ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ )(0 < p0 < 1
.......................................p1ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
-1) xﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .............(Zﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ x ^ 0ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(
-1) xﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ .............(Zﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) 0ﺍﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
....................................... x1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ x1 ^ 0) 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(
....................................... x2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ x2 ^ 0) 1ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(
....................................... sxﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ )(sx > 0
...................................... sx1ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ (sx1 > 0) 1
...................................... sx2ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ (sx2 > 0) 2
6-53
Xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ...............................ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ –) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (
Yﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ...............................ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ –) yﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (6
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ........................... C-ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ) ^ 0ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ–(1 > C
ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ...............................ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ(
) xﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
) σﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ )(σ > 0
) μﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ
ﺍﺩﻧﻲ )ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..........................ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ
ﺍﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( .........................ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ
) dfﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( .............................ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ )(df > 0
) n:dfﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..........................ﺑﺴﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
) d:dfﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..........................ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ(
) Numtrialﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..................ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ
) pﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ )( 1 ^ p ^ 0
kﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﺕ
........................................ zﻋﻼﻣﺔ z
........................................ pﻗﻴﻤﺔp-
......................................... tﻋﻼﻣﺔ t
....................................... χ2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ χ2
....................................... Fﻗﻴﻤﺔ F
.......................................ˆpﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ
....................................... p̂1ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
....................................... p̂2ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
........................................ oﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
....................................... o1ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
....................................... o2ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
....................................... sxﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ
...................................... sx1ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
...................................... sx2ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
....................................... spﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻤﻌﺔ
....................................... nﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ
....................................... n1ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1
....................................... n2ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 2
....................................... dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ
........................................ aﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
........................................ bﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ
....................................... seﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
........................................ rﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ
....................................... r2ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ...................................ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ) ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(
ﳝﲔ .....................................ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ(
6-54
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.9
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭk
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
z = (o – μ0)/(σ/'
n)
Z ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ-1
z = (o1 – o2)/ (σ 12/n1) + (σ 22/n2)
Z ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ-2
z = (x/n – p0)/ p0(1 – p0)/n
Z ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ-1
z = (x1/n1 – x2/n2)/ p̂ (1 – p̂ )(1/n1 + 1/n2)
Z ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ-2
t = (o – μ0)/(sx/'
n)
t ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ-1
t = (o1 – o2)/ sp2(1/n1 + 1/n2)
( )ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔt ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ-2
sp = ((n1 – 1)sx12 + (n2 – 1)sx22)/(n1 + n2 – 2)
df = n1 + n2 − 2
t = (o1 – o2)/ sx12/n1 + sx22/n2
( )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔt ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ-2
df = 1/(C 2/(n1 – 1) + (1 – C )2/(n2 – 1))
C = (sx12/n1)/(sx12/n1 + sx22/n2)
n
n
i=1
i=1
b = Σ(xi – o)(yi – p)/Σ(xi – o)2
a = p – bo
t ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭLinearReg
2
t = r (n – 2)/(1 – r )
k
χ2 = Σ ( Oi − Ei)2 /Ei
i
k R
χ2 = ΣΣ( Oij − Eij)2 /Eij
i
j
k
R
k R
i=1
j=1
i=1 j=1
Eij = Σ Oij • Σ Oij / ΣΣ Oij
ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓi-th ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ:Oi
ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔi-th ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ:Ei
j ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ،i ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ:Oij
ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ
j ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ،i ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ:Eij
ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ
k
MS = SS/Fdf
MSe = SSe/Edf
k
SS = Σ ni (oi − o)2
SSe = Σ ( ni – 1)sxi2
Fdf = k − 1
Edf = Σ ( ni – 1)
i=1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔχ2 ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
F ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ-2
F = sx12/sx22
F = MS/MSe
GOF χ2 ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
ANOVA ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ
i=1
k
i=1
6-55
kﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ :ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(
ﳝﲔ :ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ(
ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ
-1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z
'o + Z (α /2) · σ/
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= n
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= (o1 – o2) + Z(α /2) σ12/n1 + σ22/n2
-1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= ))x/n + Z(α /2) 1/n · (x/n · (1 – x/n
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= )(x1/n1 – x2/n2
-2ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z
+ Z(α /2) (x1/n1 · (1 – x1/n1))/n1 + (x2/n2 · (1 – x2/n2))/n2
-1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ t
'o + tn−1(α /2) · sx/
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= n
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= )(o1 – o2) + tn1+n2−2 (α /2) sp2(1/n1 + 1/n2
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ) tﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ(
)sp = ((n1 – 1)sx12 + (n2 – 1)sx22)/(n1 + n2 – 2
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= (o1 – o2) + tdf (α /2) sx12/n1 + sx22/n2
-2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ t
))df = 1/(C 2/(n1 – 1) + (1 – C)2/(n2 – 1
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ(
2
2
2
)C = (sx1 /n1)/(sx1 /n1 + sx2 /n2
:αﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻫﺎﻡ ] = αﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ1 − [C-
) :Z(α/2ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ α/2ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
) :tdf (α/2ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ α/2ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ tﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ df
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ :C-ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ )< 1ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ(0 %C-
kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ) ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ
(
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ
)(σ > 0
df+1
2
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ t -
(x – μμ)2
2
2σ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
–
p(x) = 1 e
2πσ
–
x2
df + 1
1+
Γ 2
df
= )p(x
×
π × df
df
Γ 2
Upper
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ χ2
x
2
–
×e
–1
df
df
2
×x
2
)(x ⭌ 0
– ndf + ddf
2
1 + ndf × x
ddf
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ F
ndf ndf
–1
2
2
x
p(x) = 1 × 1
2
df
Γ 2
ndf
ddf
)(x ⭌ 0
6-56
ndf + ddf
2
= )p(x
ndf
ddf
Γ
×Γ
2
2
Γ
p(x)dx
Lower
∫
=p
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
Upper
p(x)dx
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ
∞–
∫
∞
=p
p(x)dx
Lower
ﺫﻳﻞ = ﻳﺴﺎﺭ
∫
Upper
=p
p(x)dx
Lower
ﺫﻳﻞ = ﳝﲔ
∫
=p
ﺫﻳﻞ = ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐt-
∞
p(x)dx
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ χ2
Lower
∫
=p
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ F
kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ
(
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ
:nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
:μﺗﻌﻨﻲ ) (μ > 0
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
)··· (x = 1, 2, 3,
× N – MC n – x
NC n
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ
MC x
)(x = 0, 1, ·······, n
)··· (x = 0, 1, 2,
p(x) = nC x p x(1–p)n – x
e– μ × μ x
!x
p(x) = p(1– p)x – 1
= )p(x
:nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺮﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (0 % x
:Mﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) Aﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (0 % M
:Nﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (n % N, M % N
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ
X
X
)p = Σ p(x
x=0
)p H Σ p(x
x=0
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ
X
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
X
)p = Σ p(x
)p H Σ p(x
)p = Σ p(x
X
x=1
X
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
= )p(x
x=0
6-57
x=1
)p H Σ p(x
x=0
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )(TVM
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ TVM
.1ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ TVMﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
• }} … {SMPLﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ {
• } } … {CMPDﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ {
7
• }} … {CASHﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ({
• }} … {AMTﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ {
• } } … {CNVTﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ {
• } } … {COSTﺗﻜﻔﻠﺔ ،ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﻫﺎﻣﺶ {
• }} … {DAYSﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ {
• }} … {DEPRﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ{
• }} … {BONDﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ {
kﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ
uﺩﻓﻊ
• } … {BGN}/{ENDﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ } ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ { } /ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ {
uﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• } … {360}/{365ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ } ﻳﻮﻡ } / { 365 -ﻳﻮﻡ { -360
uﻣﺪﺓ /ﺳﻴﻨﺔ )ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ
ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(
• } } … {Annu}/{Semiﺳﻨﻮﻱ { } /ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ {
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .TVM
• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ :TVM
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ،ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ،ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ.
• ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ
) ﺍﻹﻳﺪﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺤﻮﺑﺎﺕ( ،ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ) ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ(.
7-1
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ TVM
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) 6(GRPHﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRCEﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ،
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ eﻳﻌﺮﺽ SFV ,SI ,PVﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .TVM
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) (PVﺍﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ) (PRCﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ.
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻘﺼﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ TVM
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ.
• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ .
.2ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ.
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ
ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ
ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ
ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
:
:
:
:
:
SI
n
PV
I%
SFV
I%
100
I%
=i
100
=i
SI' = n × PV × i
365
SI' = n × PV × i
360
ﻭﺿﻊ 365ﻳﻮﻡ
ﻭﺿﻊ 360ﻳﻮﻡ
'SI = –SI
) 'SFV = –(PV + SI
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SMPLﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
)1(SMPL
........... nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ )ﺍﻳﺎﻡ(
........ I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ
........ PVﺍﺻﻞ
7-2
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
}ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{ … }• {SI
}ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{ … }• {SFV
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
}ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{ … }• {REPT
}ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{ … }• {GRPH
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRCEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ dﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )→ (PV
ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ) → (SIﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ) . (SFVﻭﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
.3ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
u PV, PMT, FV, n
PV + β × FV
α
}
I%≠0
)PV = – (α × PMT + β × FV
– = PMT
(1+ iS) × PMT – FV × i
(1+ iS) × PMT + PV × i
{
log
)log (1+ i
PV + α × PMT
β
=n
– = FV
I%=0
PV + FV
n
– = PMT
)PV = − (PMT × n + FV
–=n
)FV = − (PMT × n + PV
PV + FV
PMT
1–β
–n
), β = (1 + i
i
I%
)............................... (P/Y = C/Y = 1
100
C/Y
P/Y
I%
(1+
) –1 ..... (Other
thanﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ
) ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ
] 100 × [C/Y
)those above
ﺍﻋﻼﻩ (
{
= i
7-3
× )α = (1+ i × S
{
End
ﺩﻓﻊ :ﺍﳌﺎﻝ :ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ
0 .........Payment
(Setup
)Screen
)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(
=S
Begin
ﺩﻓﻊ :ﺍﳌﺎﻝ :ﺑﺪﺃﻳﺔ
1 .........Payment
)Screen
((Setup
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
)
I %u
) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ(
) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ( ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ.
PV + α × PMT + β × FV = 0
ﺍﻟﻰ I %ﻣﻦ ) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ(
)i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1
}
)ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ( –1 × C/Y × 100...
P/Y
C/Y
) (1+ i
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ FV ...............
{{
= I%
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ n...............
ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ P/Y ..............
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ I% ............
ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ C/Y..............
ﺍﺻﻠﻲ PV............
ﺩﻓﻊ PMT ........
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻳﺪﺍﻉ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ) ،(+ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ )–(.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(CMPDﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
)2(CMPD
........... nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ
......... I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ
........ PVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ،ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ (
..... PMTﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ) ﺩﻓﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ،ﺍﻳﺪﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ (
........ FVﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ) ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ (
....... P/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
....... C/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ) (nﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) (PVﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ) (FVﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ) PVﺍﻭ (FVﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .ﻻﻥ ،ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻞ ﺍﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻪ.
7-4
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
}ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ{ … }• {n
}ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ{ … }• {I%
} ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ :ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ :ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ( … }• {PV
} ﺩﻓﻊ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ :ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ :ﺍﻳﺪﺍﻉ ( … }• {PMT
} ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ :ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻉ ،ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ :ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ( … }• {FV
} ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ { … }• {AMT
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
}ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{ … }• {REPT
}ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ{ … }• {AMT
}ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{ … }• {GRPH
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRCEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
.4ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ
(
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﺻﻮﻡ ) (DCFﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﲟﺪﺓ
ﻣﺜﺒﻮﺗﺔ .ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )(NPV
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )(NFV
• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )(IRR
• ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ )(PBP
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ.
CF7
CF6
CF5
CF2 CF3 CF4
CF1
CF0
ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑـ .CF0ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺏ
، CF1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻨﺘﲔ ﺑـ ،CF2ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﺔ.
7-5
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻻﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﺪﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﺻﻠﻴﺎ.
NPV u
I%
100
=i
CF2
CF3
CFn
CF1
+
+
+…+
2
3
)(1+ i) (1+ i
)(1+ i
(1+ i)n
NPV = CF0 +
:nﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ 254
NFV u
NFV = NPV × (1 + i )n
IRR u
CF2
CF3
CFn
CF1
+
+
+…+
2
3
) (1 + i ) (1 + i ) (1 + i
(1 + i )n
0 = CF0 +
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ، NPV = 0 ،ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ IRRﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻟـ .i x 100ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ،ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﲤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺼﻞ
NPVﻓﻌﻼ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ .ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ IRRﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ NPVﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ.
u PBP
CFk
(1 + i)k
)0 .................................. (CF0 > 0
n
Σ
k
= NPVn
=0
NPVn
)ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ( ...
–n
NPVn+1 – NPVn
{
= PBP
:nﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ NPVn < 0, NPVn+1 > 0, or 0
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CASHﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ.
)3(CASH
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓI% ...........
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱCsh .......
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5('LISTﻭﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• }} … {NPVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ{
• }} … {IRRﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ{
• }} … {PBPﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ{
• }} … {NFVﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ{
• }} … {'LISTﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ{
• }} … {LISTﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{
7-6
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
}} … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
}} … {GRPHﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRCEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
.5ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻱ ،ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ،ﻭﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ
ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ.
uﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
a
ﺩﻓﻊ 1
c
b
1 ............ PM1 ................... PM2 .......... Last
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ
:aﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (INT) PM1
:bﺍﳊﺼﺔ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (PRN) PM1
:cﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ (BAL) PM2
e
ﺩﻓﻊ 1
d
1............. PM1................ PM2 ............. Last
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ
:dﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ )PM2 (ΣPRN
:eﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ )PM2 (ΣINT
* = a + bﺩﻓﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )(PMT
7-7
ﻋﻼﻣﺔ
b : PRNPM1 = PMT + BALPM1–1 × i
c : BALPM2 = BALPM2–1 + PRNPM2
PM2
d : Σ PRN = PRNPM1 + PRNPM1+1 + … + PRNPM2
PM1
e : Σ INT = INTPM1 + INTPM1+1 + … + INTPM2
PM2
PM1
) ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ BAL0 = PV (INT1 = 0 and PRN1 = PMT
uﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ )ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ I%ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ)‘(I%
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
] [C/Y
}
] [P/Y
I%
) –1 × 100
] 100 × [C/Y
{
I%' = (1+
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ.
i = I%'÷100
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(AMTﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ.
)4(AMT
...... PM1ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ 1ﺍﻟﻲ n
...... PM2ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ 1ﺍﻟﻲ n
........... nﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ
......... I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ
........ PVﺍﻷﺻﻞ
..... PMTﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻂ
........ FVﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ
....... P/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
....... C/Yﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• } } … {BALﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ { PM2
• } } … {INTﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ { PM1
• } } … {PRNﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ { PM1
7-8
• } } … { ΣINTﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ { PM2
• } } … {ΣPRNﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ { PM2
• } } … {CMPDﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ {
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• } } … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {
• } } … {CMPDﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ {
• } } … {GRPHﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ {
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRCEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﹰ
ﺍﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1 (TRCEﻳﻌﺮﺽ INTﻭ PRNﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ . n = 1ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ eﺗﻈﻬﺮ INTﻭ
PRNﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ،n = 2ﻭ ، n = 3ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﺔ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ.
.6ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﺗ ﹼﺒﲔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ.
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ
n
: APR
: EFF
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
: n
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ )(%
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ )(%
APR/100
EFF = 1 +
–1 ⋅ 100
n
–1 ⋅ n ⋅100
1
n
EFF
APR = 1 +
100
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(CNVTﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ.
)5(CNVT
........... nﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ
.......... I%ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
7-9
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
• } } … {'EFFﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ {
• } } … {'APRﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ {
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• } } … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {
.7ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ،ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﻫﺎﻣﺶ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ
ﺗﻜﻔﻠﺔ CST :
ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ SEL :
ﻫﺎﻣﺶ MRG :
MRG
100
–CST = SEL 1
CST
MRG
–1
100
CST
×100
–MRG(%) = 1
SEL
= SEL
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(COSTﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)6(g)1(COST
ﺗﻜﻔﻠﺔ Cst .........
ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ Sel .........
ﻫﺎﻣﺶ Mrg ........
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ.
• } } … {COSTﺗﻜﻔﻠﺔ {
• } } … {SELﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ {
• } } … {MRGﻫﺎﻣﺶ {
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
7-10
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• } } … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {
.8ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ /ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﲔ ،ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(DAYSﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ /ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ
)6(g)2(DAYS
.......... d1ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ 1
.......... d2ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ 2
.......... Dﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ d1ﺍﻭ .d2ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• } } … {PRDﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ d1ﺍﻟﻰ {(d1 – d2) d2
• } d1} … {d1+Dﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ){(d1 + D
• } d1} … {d1–Dﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ){(d1 – D
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• } } … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ 365-ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻭ 360-ﻳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ /ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ 360-ﻳﻮﻡ .ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
)ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ) +ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ(
)ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( – )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ(
• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻮ 1ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ 1901 ،ﺍﻟﻰ 31ﺩﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ . 2099 ،
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ 360-ﻳﻮﻡ
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ 360-ﻳﻮﻡ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d1ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ 31ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ d1ﻛﻴﻮﻡ 30ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d2ﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻡ 31ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ d1ﻛﻴﻮﻡ 1ﻟﻠﺸﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺇ ﹼﻻ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ d1ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ .30
7-11
.9ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﺿﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ) ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ(
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ.
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ – ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ) ، (SLﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ) ، (FPﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ– ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ – ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ) ، (SYDﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ – ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ). (DB
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ . j
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ – ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ
SLj
n
PV
FV
j
Y− 1
:
:
:
:
:
:
)(SL
ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j
ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ(
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ
ﺳﻨﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ
}(PV–FV ) {Y–1
u
n
12
) (PV–FV
= SLj
n
}(PV–FV ) 12–{Y–1
u
= SLn+1
n
12
= SL1
)({Y–1}≠12
)(FP
ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j
: FPj
: RDVjﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ j
:ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
I%
}I% {Y–1
FP1 = PV × 100 × 12
I%
× ) FPj = (RDVj–1 + FV
100
)FPn+1 = RDVn ({Y–1}≠12
RDV1 = PV – FV – FP1
RDVj = RDVj–1 – FPj
)({Y–1}≠12
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ – ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ – ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ
RDVn+1 = 0
)(SYD
}{Y–1
)n (n +1
– n' = n
2
12
)' nﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ n')(+2ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ (+1
= 'Z
2
n
}{Y–1
×
) (PV – FV
= SYD1
Z
12
n'– j+2
))(PV – FV – SYD1
( = SYDj
)( j≠1
'Z
n'– (n +1)+2
}12–{Y–1
( = SYDn+1
× ))(PV – FV – SYD1
)({Y–1}≠12
'Z
12
=Z
RDV1 = PV – FV – SYD1
RDVj = RDVj –1 – SYDj
: SYDjﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j
: RDVjﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ j
ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ j
7-12
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ -ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ
)(DB
:ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j
DBj
: RDVjﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ j
: I%ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
I%
Y–1
×
100n
12
× DB1 = PV
RDV1 = PV – FV – DB1
I%
100n
× ) DBj = (RDVj–1 + FV
RDVj = RDVj–1 – DBj
)({Y–1}≠12
DBn +1 = RDVn
)({Y–1}≠12
RDVn+1 = 0
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(DEPRﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ .
)6(g)3(DEPR
n
:
: I%
: PV
: FV
j
:
: Y− 1
ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ) ،(FPﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻓﻲ
ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ )(DB
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ(
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ
ﺳﻨﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• } } … {SLﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ {
• } }..... {FP} ... {FPﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ {
} }..... {I%ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ {
• } } … {SYDﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ {
• } } … {DBﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ jﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ {
ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
}{SYD} − {GRPH
}{SYD} − {TABL
7-13
}{SYD
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• } } … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {
• } } … {TABLﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ {
• } } … {GRPHﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ {
.10ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ.
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
"ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" "ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ."YR/ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (7-1
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ
D
B
) (d2ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ
A
ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ
ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ
) (d1ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ
: PRCﺳﻌﺮ ﻛﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ
: CPNﺳﻌﺮ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ )(%
: YLDﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ )(%
: Aﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ
:ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ) =1ﺳﻨﻮﻱ،ﻭ =2ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ(
M
: Nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ
: RDBﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻟﻜﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ
: Dﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ
B
:ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ = D-A
: INTﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ
: CSTﺳﻌﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
uﺳﻌﺮ ﻛﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ
)(PRC
• ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ
CPN
)
CPN
M
×
A
D
M
(+
)
RDV +
YLD/100
M
7-14
×
B
D
– = PRC
( 1+
• ﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ
CPN
CPN
M
×
A
D
M
+
) (k–1+B/D
)
RDV
–Σ
N
YLD/100
M
k=1
(1+
) (N–1+B/D
CST = PRC + INT
uﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ
)
YLD/100
M
– = PRC
(1+
CPN
M
×
A
D
– = INT
)(YLD
ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(BONDﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ.
)6(g)4(BOND
.......... d1ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ )ﺷﻬﺮ ،ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭ ﺳﻨﺔ(
.......... d2ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ )ﺷﻬﺮ ،ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭ ﺳﻨﺔ(
...... RDVﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ
...... CPNﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ
...... PRCﺳﻌﺮ ﻛﻞ 100ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ
.......YLDﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• } } … {PRCﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ ) ، (PRCﻭﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ )،(INTﻭ ﺗﻜﻔﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ ){ (CST
• } } … {YLDﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ{
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
}{PRC} − {MEMO
}{PRC} − {GRPH
ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• } } … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {
• } } … {GRPHﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ {
• } } … {MEMOﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ {
7-15
}{PRC
MEMOﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ MEMO
• ﹼ
....PRDﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ d1ﺍﻟﻰ d2
......... Nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ
......... Aﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ
......... Bﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )(-D-A
........ Dﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ
• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ MEMOﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ) (CPDﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼ ﻣﻦ
ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ" ﻫﻮ " 365
.11ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ
ﻫﺎﻡ !
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ PRGMﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ .TVM
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻟﺴﻨﺘﲔ ) – 730ﻳﻮﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺽ 300ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ .5%ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻝ .365
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MAT
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ
)K6(g)6(g)6(g)1(TVM
1(SMPL)1(SI)hda,f,
daa)w
)2(SFV)hda,f,daa
w
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ !m(SET UP ) TVMﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،365ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ (360ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ PRGMﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-35
7-16
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ PRGMﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
.1ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ،ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ(
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ.
ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.2ﹼ
.3ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
, spaces, [, ],
.4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ .
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ :ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻲ , θ , Z , rﻓﺮﺍﻍ ],[ ,
÷ , ., +, –, ×,ﺍﻟﻰ {, }, ’, ”, ~,
• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ 32ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ) (cm2ﻭﺍﳊﺠﻢ ) (cm3ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻣﺠﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻫﻮ 7 ,10,15ﺳﻢ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﻫﻮ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .OCTA
ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ Sﻭﺣﺠﻢ Vﻟﻠﻤﺠﺴﻢ
ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ Aﻣﻌﺮﻑ.
'
2
'S = 2
3 A2, V = –––– A3
3
A
1 m PRGM
2 3(NEW)j(O)I(C)/(T)v(A)w
)3 !J(PRGM)4(?)aav(A)6(g)5(:
)^(c*!x(')d*av(A)x6(g)6(g)5
!x(')c/d*av(A)Md
JJ
4 1(EXE) or w
A = 7ﻋﻨﺪ S
A = 7ﻋﻨﺪ V
8-1
)hw(Value of A
w
8
ww
Sﻋﻨﺪ A = 10
Vﻋﻨﺪ A = 10
baw
w
ww
Sﻋﻨﺪ A = 15
Vﻋﻨﺪ A = 15
bfw
w*1
*1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺍﻭ (RUNﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ :
>" wﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ<" .Prog
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ \ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑـ ">ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ<" .Prog
.2ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ
• }} ... {NEWﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ{
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
• } } ... {RUN}/{BASEﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ { } /ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ { ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
• } } ... {Qﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ {
• } } ... {SYBLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ {
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ —— ) … 1(RUNﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ
• } } ... {TOP}/{BTMﺍﻋﻠﻰ { } /ﺍﺳﻔﻞ { ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
• } } ... {SRCﺑﺤﺚ {
• } } ... {MENUﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ {
• }*{STAT}/{MAT}*/{LIST}/{GRPH}/{DYNA}*/{TABL}/{RECR
} ...ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺀ { } /ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ { } /ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ { } /ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ { } /ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ {
} /ﺟﺪﻭﻝ { } /ﻋﻮﺩﻳﺔ { ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ {
• } } ... {A↔aﹼ
ﺪﺩﺓ {
• } } ... {CHARﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺸ ﹼ
* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GII
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !J(PRGMﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } } ... {COMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ {
• } } ... {CTLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ {
• } } ... {JUMPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ {
• }?{ ... {^}/ﺍﻣﺮ } ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ { } /ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ {
• } ... {CLR}/{DISPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ} ﻣﺴﺢ { } /ﻋﺮﺽ {
• } } ... {RELﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻲ {
8-2
• }} ... {I/Oﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ /ﲢﻜﻢ {I/O
• }} ... {:ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ -ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ{
• } } ... {STRﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﻴﻄﻲ{
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 8-7ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !m(SET UPﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
• {ANGL}/{COOR}/{GRID}/{AXES}/{LABL}/{DISP}/{S/L}/{DRAW}/{DERV}/{BACK}/{FUNC}/
{SIML}/{S-WIN}/{LIST}/{LOCS}*/{T-VAR}/{ΣDSP}*/{RESID}/{CPLX}/{FRAC}/{Y • SPD}*/
*ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GII
{DATE}*/{PMT}*/{PRD}*/{INEQ}/{SIMP}/{Q1Q3
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ " ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 1-27ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 2(BASE)*1 --
• }{TOP}/{BTM}/{SRC
• }{MENU
• } } ... {d~oﻋﺸﺮﻱ { } /ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ { } /ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ { } /ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ { ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
• }} ... {LOGﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{
• } ... {DISPﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ } ﻋﺸﺮﻱ { } /ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ { } /ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ { } /ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ {
• }{A↔a}/{SYBL
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !J(PRGMﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( PRGMﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } } ... {Progﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ {
• }{^}/{?}/{JUMP
• } } ... {RELﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻲ {
• } } ... {:ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ – ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ {
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !m(SET UPﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
• }{Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Oct
*1ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(BASEﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑـ Bﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• } ... {EXE}/{EDITﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ } ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ { } /ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ {
• } } ... {NEWﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ {
• } ... {DEL } / { DEL • Aﺣﺬﻑ } ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺹ { } /ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ {
• } } ... {SRC}/{RENﺑﺤﺚ { } /ﺗﻐﻴﺮ { ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.3ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
kﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺱ"
ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ" .ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ.
8-3
• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺗﻚ.
uﻟﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ،ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ
ﺣﺪﺙ ﺷﺊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ
ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (α- 1ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ
ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻰ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ.
uﻟﻠﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻚ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ.
) ... 1(TOPﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
) ...2(BTMﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴ ﹰﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻚ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ.
kﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ " "Aﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻲ ﺑـ .OCTA
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(SRCﻭﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
)3(SRC
)av(A
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ
ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ*1.
8-4
.4ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SRCﺍﻭ wﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ*2.
*1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
*2ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ )_( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ. w
• ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ،ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻰﺀ ﻣﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻚ ﻭﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ.
.4ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
kﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ
uﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻲ ﺑـ .OCTA
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)1(SRCﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ
ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
)6(g)1(SRC
)j(O)I(C)/(T
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ.
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).6(g)2(REN
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ" .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.
8-5
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Aﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
kﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺹ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 4(DEL
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(YESﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ) 6(NOﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺊ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ
.1ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 5(DEL • A
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(YESﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ) 6(NOﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ
11ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ".
kﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ.
• ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻭﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(NEWﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﳌﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(Qﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ .ﺍﻵﻥ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )!J(QUIT
ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ
ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ
.1ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 2(EDIT
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻰ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ".
8-6
.5ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ
kﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ
١٠-٨ ....................................................Break
١٧-٨ ................................ CloseComport38k
١٣-٨ ............................................. ClrGraph
١٤-٨ .................................................. ClrList
١٤-٨ .................................................. ClrMat
١٤-٨ ................................................. ClrText
١٤-٨ .................................................. ClrVct
١٤-٨ ............................DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl
١٠-٨ ......................................... Do~LpWhile
١٤-٨ ........................................... DrawDyna
١٥-٨ .............. DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt
١٥-٨ .......................................... DrawGraph
١٥-٨ ....................... DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt
١٥-٨ ................... DrawRΣ-Con, DrawRΣ-Plt
١٥-٨ .............................................. DrawStat
١٥-٨ ............................................ DrawWeb
١٢-٨ ...................................................... Dsz
(١٩-٨ ......................................................Exp
(١٩-٨ ..............................................Exp'Str
٩-٨ ...............................For~To~(Step~)Next
١٦-٨ ................................................. Getkey
١٢-٨ ............................................. Goto~Lbl
٩-٨ ............................ If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd
١٢-٨ ........................................................ Isz
١٧-٨ .................................................. Locate
١٣-٨ .................................................... Menu
١٧-٨ ................................ OpenComport38k
١١-٨ ..................................................... Prog
١٦-٨............................................. PlotPhase
٢١-٨.................................................RclCapt
(١٧-٨............................................... Receive
١٨-٨...........................................Receive38k
١١-٨.................................................. Return
(١٧-٨....................................................Send
١٨-٨............................................... Send38k
١١-٨ ..................................................... Stop
(١٩-٨................................................ StrCmp
(١٩-٨...................................................StrInv
(١٩-٨................................................. StrJoin
(١٩-٨..................................................StrLeft
(١٩-٨..................................................StrLen
(١٩-٨..................................................StrLwr
(٢٠-٨..................................................StrMid
(٢٠-٨............................................... StrRight
(٢٠-٨............................................. StrRotate
(٢٠-٨................................................ StrShift
(٢٠-٨.................................................. StrSrc
(٢٠-٨..................................................StrUpr
١٠-٨...................................While~WhileEnd
? )ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(٨-٨.........................................
^ )ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( ٨-٨.........................................
):ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ – ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ٨-٨.....................................
_ )ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ( ٨-٨.......................................
)ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ( ٨-٨...............................
)ﺭﻣﺰ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ( ١٣-٨..............................................
≤ ) =, ≠, >, <, ≥,ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﻋﻼﺋﻘﻴﺔ( ١٨-٨...........
٢٠-٨........................................................... +
ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﹼ
ﻧﺺ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ............ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻑ
ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ.
}ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺠﻌﺪﺓ{ ..............ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺠﻌﺪﺓ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ،ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻣﺮ .ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻌﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮ.
}ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ{ ................ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ.
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ .................ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻙ (A ,10, 10 + 20ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ،ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ
ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ...............ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺣﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﻙ .(AB
8-7
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ
? )ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ? ”>ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ<“ >,ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ?
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ? → A_ :
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻭﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
،ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ "?" ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳ ﹼﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ
ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "?>ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ<" ﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺺ ﺣﺘﻰ 255ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺐ.
• ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍ ،ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ–ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ،(fnﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ
) ، (Ynﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﺄﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
^ )ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
• ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ wﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ.
)ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ – ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(:
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﲔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺧﻼﻓﺎ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ )^( ،ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻳﻦ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑـ _ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
_ )ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻻﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ
ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ.
‘ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ(
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ )’( ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ
ﺑﻴﺎﻥ-ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) (:ﺃﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )_( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ )^( ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﺺ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﺎﻫﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ.
8-8
kﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
)(COM
If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ If-ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ) .(0ﻭﺗﻨﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ IfEnd -ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ Then -ﺃﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ Else-
ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ:
_
_
If
>ﺣﺎﻟﺔ<
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< Then
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
:
:
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
^
^
Then -ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ If-ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ( .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ Else -
_
:
^
IfEnd
_
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< :
^
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< Else
_
:
^
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
)If~Then~ IfEnd (1
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥThen -ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd
)If~Then~Else~IfEnd (2
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ Then -ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ Else-ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .IfEnd
For~To~(Step~)Next
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺊ ﺑﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ For -ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ .Next -ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ،ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ .ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ.
ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ> :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ< > Toﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ< → >ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ< For
Next
_
:
^
>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ< Step
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ:
• ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ A :ﺍﻟﻰ Z
• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ،i.e. sin x ، Aﺍﻟﺦ(.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ،i.e. sin x ، Aﺍﻟﺦ(.
• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(1 :
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ .1
• ﺟﻌﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ .ﻭﺟﻌﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ.
8-9
Do~LpWhile
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
>ﺣﺎﻟﺔ<
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
LpWhile
_
:
^
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
Do
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ( .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ )،(0
ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻥ .LpWhile-
• ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ، LpWhile-ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﳌﻔﺤﻮﺻﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ.
While~WhileEnd
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
WhileEnd
_
:
^
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
>ﺣﺎﻟﺔ<
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
While
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ( .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ )،(0
ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻥ .WhileEnd-
• ﻣﻨﺬ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ – ، Whileﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﳌﻔﺤﻮﺻﺔ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ.
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
)(CTL
Break
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻜﺴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐBreak_ :
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻜﺴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ،For -ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ Do-ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ.While -
8-10
Prog
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ ،(RUNﻳﻘﻮﻡ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ”_ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ“ Prog
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝProg "ABC"_ :
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺣﺘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ،ﻳﻜﺴﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ
ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ.
ﺭﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ
ﺭﻭﺗﲔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ
D
A
"Prog "D
J
I
"Prog "J
E
C
"Prog "I
"Prog "E
"Prog "C
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 4ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 3ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 2ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ 1
• ﻭﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ،ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ .Prog
• ﺍﻷﻣﺮ Goto~Lblﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ.
ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ Progﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ ،(RUNﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ Progﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ.
Return
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐReturn_ :
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻭﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
Stop
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐStop_ :
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻧﺎﺷﻰﺀ.
8-11
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ
)(JUMP
Dsz
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ، 1
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
≠ 0ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< Dsz
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ = 0
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮA :ﺍﻟﻰ θ r ,Z
]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ : Dsz Bﻳﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Bﺑـ .1
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ ) ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ( .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ،ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ) ،(:ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ،ﺍﻭ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )_(.
Goto~Lbl
ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ< > ~ Lblﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ< Goto
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ :ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) 0ﺍﻟﻰ ، (9ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (θ , r , Z
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ( ﻭ ) Lbl nﺣﻴﺚ nﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ
•
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﲔ) Goto n :ﺣﻴﺚ nﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﹼ
ﹼ
ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ .(Goto nﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ Lbl-ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ nﳌﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ .Goto-
• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﳋﻠﻒ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻃﺔ ﻭ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ Lbl-ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ ،Goto-ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
Isz
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
≠ 0ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< Isz
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ = 0
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ A :ﺍﻟﻰθ , r , Z ,
]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ : Isz Aﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ Bﺑـ.1
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ ) ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ( .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ،ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ) ،(:ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ،ﺍﻭ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )_(.
8-12
⇒ )ﺭﻣﺰﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ(
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ . .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<
_
:
^
>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< ⇒ >ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ< >ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻲ< >ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮ<
ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ:
• ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ /ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ :ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (θ , r , Zﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ(A × 2 :
• ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻼﺋﻘﻲ ) =, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤ :ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (8-18
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺗﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﻦ ،ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ
ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ⇒ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ) ،(:ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ،ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )_(.
Menu
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>, :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ >", <1ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( >", "<1ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(<" Menu
>",ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( >, ..., "", <2ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( "<2
>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( > ، "< nﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ < nﻫﻮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ،ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ .ﻭﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ
ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ.
• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ) (Lbl nﻛﺎﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻥ
ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ .Gotoﲢﺪﻳﺪ "" “OK" ، 3ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ""> ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ( > ،"< nﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ "< nﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ .Lbl 3
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝLbl 2_ :
_Menu "IS IT DONE?", "OK", 1, "EXIT", 2
_Lbl 1
"! "IT’S DONE
kﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ
)(CLR
ClrGraph
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐClrGraph_ :
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
8-13
ClrList
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ClrList
ClrList
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ Ans ، 26
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ".
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ (fx-7400GII
ClrMat
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ< ClrMat
ClrMat
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ A :ﺍﻟﻰ Ans Z ،
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ".
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ"
ClrText
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐClrText_ :
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII
ClrVct
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ< ClrVct
ClrVct
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ A :ﺍﻟﻰ Ans ، Z
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ" .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ".
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
)(DISP
*DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl
* )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIIﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻴﻤﺔ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• DispF-Tblﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ DispR-Tblﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ.
DrawDyna
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIIﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
8-14
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﺭﺳﻢ FTG-Conﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ FTG-Pltﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
DrawGraph
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIIﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﻣﻊ( ) cnﺍﻭ an ( bnﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ nﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻣﻊ( ) cnﺍﻭ an (bnﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ
ﻭ nﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ.
• ﺭﺳﻢ R-Conﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ R-Pltﻳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
DrawRΣ-Con, DrawRΣ-Plt
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIIﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ،ﻣﻊ ) Σcnﺍﻭ Σan (Σbnﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ nﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻣﻊ ) Σcnﺍﻭ Σan (Σbnﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ
ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ nﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ.
• DrawRΣ-Conﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻋﻨﺪ DrawRΣ-Pltﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
DrawStat
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ :ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ“ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .8-25
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII
DrawWeb
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ/ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺐ(.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ >] _ :ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ< >[,ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ< DrawWeb
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ cn+1) ،5_ :ﺃﻭ DrawWeb an+1 (bn+1
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ /ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺐ(.
• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑـ .30
8-15
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII
PlotPhase
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻭﺍﶈﻮﺭ .y-
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ>, :ﻗﻴﻤﺔ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ< Locate
>ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ< Locate
">ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ<" >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ< Locate
]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ _"Locate 1, 1, "AB
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :
• ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ :ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 7
• ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ :ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 21
• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
• ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ :ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﻭ ﻧﺼﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ
ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ،7ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .21
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ :
)← (21, 1
→ )(1, 1
)← (21, 7
→ )(1, 7
_Cls
"Locate 7, 1, "CASIO FX
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ” “CASIO FXﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ClrTextﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
(Receive( / Send
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>) :ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<(>) / Sendﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ<(Receive
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ.
• ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ( ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ -ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ(
OpenComport38k / CloseComport38k
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ ) 3-pin COMﺍﳌﺴﻠﺴﻞ(
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻣﺮ Receive38k/Send38kﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
8-17
Receive38k / Send38k
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 38ﻛﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ< Send38k
>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ<
>ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ<
Receive38k
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ:
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ OpenComport38kﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ CloseComport38kﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻉ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
kﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ )REL
(
≤ =, ≠, >, <, ≥,
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ< >ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻲ< >ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ<
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ:
• ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ /ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ :ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ ،(θ ،r ,Zﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ
)ﻣﺜﻞ(A × 2 :
• ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻲ=, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤ :
kﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻙ " ("123ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ )ﻙ " ("x-1ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ) Locateﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-17
• ﻟﺘﻀﻤﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )"( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ )\( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ،ﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ )\( ﻗﺒﻞ
ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )"( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ )\(
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :1ﻟﺘﻀﻤﲔ ” Japan: “Tokyoﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
""\"Japan:\"Tokyo
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :2ﻟﺘﻀﻤﲔ main\abcﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
""main\\abc
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(CHAR)2(SYBLﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).!e(CATALOG
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ) Str 1ﺍﻟﻰ .(Str 20ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
"ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-7
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ") "+ﺻﺤﻔﺔ (8-20ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺦ (.Exp(, StrCmp(,ﻛﺤﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ،
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ " "sinﻛﺤﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
8-18
(Exp
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ،ﻭﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(Exp
(Exp'Str
ﻭﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ
ﹼ
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>[)] :ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ< >,ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(Exp'Str
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )(Yn, r, Xt, Yt, X
ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ) ،(an, an+1, an+2, bn, bn+1, bn+2, cn, cn+1, cn+2ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )(fn
ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ )>ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(.
(StrCmp
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ "<1ﻭ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ) "<2ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ(
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ >", "<2ﺳﻠﺴﺔ StrCmp("<1
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﻭﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ 0ﻋﻨﺪ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ >" = "<1ﺳﻠﺴﺔ "<2
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ 1ﻋﻨﺪ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ >" < "<1ﺳﻠﺴﺔ "<2
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ -1ﻋﻨﺪ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ >" > "<1ﺳﻠﺴﺔ "<2
(Strlnv
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(StrInv
(StrJoin
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ "<1ﻭ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ."<2
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ >", "<2ﺳﻠﺴﺔ StrJoin("<1
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ") "+ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-20
(StrLeft
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﺴﺞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ nﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ.
)ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ (0 < n < 9999, n
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", n[)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(StrLeft
(StrLen
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ(.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(StrLen
(StrLwr
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(StrLwr
8-19
(StrMid
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ nﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻝ mﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ.
)ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ (0 < n < 9999, n
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", n[,m)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(StrMid
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺣﺬﻑ " "mﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ nﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
(StrRight
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﺴﺞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ nﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ.
)ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ (0 < n < 9999, n
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>",n[)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(StrRight
(StrRotate
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ.n
)ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (-9999 < n < 9999, n
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", [,n)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(StrRotate
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ " "nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ " "nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ.
ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ " "nﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ .+1
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ........ StrRotate("abcde", 2) :ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ”.“cdeab
(StrShift
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﳝﻦ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ .n
)ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ (-9999 < n < 9999, n
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", [,n)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(StrShift
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ " "nﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ " "nﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ.
ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ " "nﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ .+1
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ........ StrShift("abcde", 2) :ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ”.“cde
(StrSrc
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ "<1ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ) ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ nﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ."<2ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ
ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟـ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ،"<2ﻣﺒﺘﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻝ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ."<1
)ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ (0 < n < 9999, n
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[,n)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ >","<2ﺳﻠﺴﺔ StrSrc("<1
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻝ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ."<1
(StrUpr
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(StrUpr
+
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ "<1ﻭ ">ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ."<2
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ>" :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ >"+"<2ﺳﻠﺴﺔ "<1
ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ........ "abc"+"de"→Str 1 :ﺗﻌﲔ ” “abcdeﻝ.Str 1
8-20
kﺁﺧﺮ
RclCapt
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ.
)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ (20
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ< RclCapt
.6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺭﻓﺎﻗﻪ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ .ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻋﺮﺽ
CASIO
""CASIO
?
?→X
?=X
"X =" ? → X
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 21ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﲤﺮﹼﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ 21ﺣﺮﻑ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ 255ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ PRGMﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
uﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 1
)(Swap
ﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻭ ﺻﻒ 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
2
1
4
3
= Aﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
5 6
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
_Swap A, 2, 3
Mat A
8-21
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2
)(`Row
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ .4
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺻﻒ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ
_`Row 4, A, 2
Mat A
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻭﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 3
)(`Row+
ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ، 4ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ
ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ 3
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
_`Row+ 4, A, 2, 3
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ
ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ
Mat A
uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 4
)(Row+
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ 2ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1
ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
_Row+ A, 2, 3
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
Mat A
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺭﺃﺱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
_View Window –5, 5, 1, –5, 5, 1
• V-Window
ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ Y = Type_ ...................................
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ •
_ "X2 – 3" → Y1*1
8-22
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
_DrawGraph
* 1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ Y1ﻣﻊ )ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻛـ ( J4(GRPH)1(Y)bﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ) ERRORﺧﻄﺄ( ﺍﺫﺍ
ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ” “Yﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
uﺗﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ
• V-Window
View Window , , , , , ,
>, , ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻝ ............. StoV-Win ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻝ ............. RclV-Win ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ >, ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ................... StoPictﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ 6
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
>ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ................... RclPictﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ 6
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ
• Sketch
>ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ>, ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ>, ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ>, ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PxlOn
>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PlotOff
>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PlotChg
>ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PxlTest
">ﻧﺺ<" >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< Text
>ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< Text
>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchThick
>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchBroken
>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchDot
>ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchNormal
>ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ>, ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ>, ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ< Inverse
Line
-X>,ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ-Y>, <2ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ-X>, <1ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖF-Line <1
>-Yﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ<2
>,ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ Y-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ< >,ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ X-ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ< Circle
>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Rﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ<
>ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖVertical ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖHorizontal , [,σ, μ
1
ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ
ﻟﻺﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
*1
*1
1 4151
*1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ μ = 0ﻭ .σ = 1
Upper – μ
σ
= ZUp
Lower – μ
σ
(x – μμ)2
= ZLow
dx
2
2σ
–
Upper
e
Lower
8-26
∫
p= 1
2πσ
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ DrawDistNormﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ZLow < x < ZUpﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،pﻭ ،ZLowﻭ ZUpﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ
،pﻭ ،ZLowﻭ ،ZUpﻭ pﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻴﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ .Ans
•
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐt-
]DrawDistT , , [df
1
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
1 4152
df + 1
tUp = Upper
–
2
1+ x
df
dx
×
π × df
tLow = Lower
2
df + 1
2
df
Γ
2
Γ
Upper
Lower
∫
=p
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ DrawDistTﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ
ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ Lower < x < Upperﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ، pﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ،pﻭ ،tLowﻭ ،tUpﻭ ،pﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻴﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ .Ans
• ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2
]DrawDistChi , , [df
1
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
1 4153
x
dx
2
–
× e
–1
df
df
2
× x
2
1
2
×
1
df
Γ
2
Upper
Lower
∫
=p
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ DrawDistChiﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ
ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ Lower < x < Upperﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،pﻭ .Ans
• ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ F
>DrawDistF , , , μ0ﻋﻨﺪ 1ﺃﻭ ”>“
ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻝ " "ρ conditionﻭ ". "β&ρ condition
• ﻟﻺﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-23ﻭ
"ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-52
• ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-55
• ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ :Fﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ 1-ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
OneSampleZTest "μ condition", μ0, σ, o, n
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ Z, p, o, nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o, nﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .4
8-32
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
]OneSampleZTest "μ condition", μ0, σ, List[, Freq
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ Z, p, o, sx, nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o, sx, nﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .6
ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ :Zﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ 2 -ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.Z -
TwoSampleZTest "μ1 condition", σ1, σ2, o1, n1, o2, n2
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ Z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ 1
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ListAnsﻟﻰ .8
]]TwoSampleZTest "μ1 condition", σ1, σ2, List1, List2[, Freq1 [, Freq2
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ Z, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1,
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
n2ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .8
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ :Zﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ -1ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
OnePropZTest "p condition", p0, x, n
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ Z, p, p̂, nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, p̂, nﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .4
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ :Zﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ -2ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
TwoPropZTest "p1 condition", x1, n1, x2, n2
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ Z, p, p̂ 1, p̂ 2, p̂, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ z, p, p̂ 1, p̂ 2, p̂, n1, n2
ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .7
•
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ :Tﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ -1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .t
OneSampleTTest "μ condition", μ0, o, sx, n
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
]OneSampleTTest "μ condition", μ0, List[, Freq
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ t, p, o, sx, nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .5
ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ :Tﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ 2-ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .t
]TwoSampleTTest "μ1 condition", o1, sx1, n1, o2, sx2, n2[,Pooled condition
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ :
TwoSampleTTest "μ1 condition", List1, List2, [, Freq1[, Freq2[,
]]] Pooled condition
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ:
:LinRegTTest
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﻌﺔ = 0, t, p, df, o1 o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ
ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .9
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﻌﺔ = 1, t, p, df, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, sp, n1, n1ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .10
ﻳﺤﺪﺩ 0ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ 1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ .ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻛﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t -ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ.
]LinRegTTest "β&ρ condition", XList, YList[, Freq
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ t, p, df, a, b, s, r, r2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .8
8-33
•
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2
:ChiGOFTest
•
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ chi-square goodnessﻟﻺﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ChiGOFTest List 1, List 2,df, List 3
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ ،ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ،ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.(CNTRB
2
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ χ , p, dfﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﻟﻰ .3
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ CNTRBﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .3
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ chi-square
:ChiTest
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ChiTest MatA, MatB
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ χ2, p, dfﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ListAns 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .3ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .MatB
ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ F
ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ:F
ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ” Fﺷﺮﻁ sx1, n1, sx2, n2 “ σ1
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ F, p, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ListAns 1ﺍﻟﻰ .6
ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ” Fﺷﺮﻁ “ σ1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ,1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ [[Freq1 [, Freq2 ,] ,2
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ F, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ
ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAns 1ﺍﻟﻰ .8
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ F
• ANOVA
:OneWayANOVA
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ANOVAﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ OneWayANOVA 2
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ) (Aﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(.
Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRmsﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ
ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ .Adf, SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Edf, SSe, MSe
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻝ MatAnsﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
AF Ap
0
:TwoWayANOVA
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ:
0
Ams
Ass
Adf
ERRdf ERRss ERRms
= MatAns
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ANOVAﺍﺛﻨﲔ -ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ
TwoWayANOVAﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،1ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، 2ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 3ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ )(A
ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ )، (Bﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(.
Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, Bdf, Bss, Bms, BF, Bp, ABdf, ABss, ABms, ABF,
ABp, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRmsﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ Adf,
SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Bdf, SSb, MSb, Fb, pb, ABdf, SSab, MSab, Fab, pab,
Edf, SSe, MSe.
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻝ MatAnsﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
Ap
AF
Ams
Ass
Adf
Bp
BF
Bms
Bss
Bdf
ABss
ABdf
ABms ABF ABp
0
0
ERRdf ERRss ERRms
8-34
= MatAns
kﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
•
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
365 .......DateMode365ﻳﻮﻣﺎ
360 .......DateMode360ﻳﻮﻣﺎ
• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ
.................PmtBgnﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ
.................PmtEndﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ
• ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ
...... PeriodsAnnualﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ
......... PeriodsSemiﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ
•
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﳌﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺠﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )."(TVM
• ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
:Smpl_SI
)Smpl_SI(n, I%, PV
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Smpl_SFV
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
)Smpl_SFV(n, I%, PV
• ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ:
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ P/Yﻭ C/Yﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ،ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ P/Y=12ﻭ .C/Y=12
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ (Cmpd_n(, Cmpd_I%(, Cmpd_PV(,
)(, Cmpd_PMT(, Cmpd_FVﺳﺘﻴﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ )ﺍﳊﺠﺞ( ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ) ,n, I%, PVﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ.
:Cmpd_n
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Cmpd_I%
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Cmpd_PV
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ
)Cmpd_n(I%, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ
)Cmpd_I%(n, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ) ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ(.
)Cmpd_PV(n, I%, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y
:Cmpd_PMTﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﻘﺔ )ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ،ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ
ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ( ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ.
8-35
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cmpd_PMT(n, I%, PV, FV, P/Y, C/Y
:Cmpd_FV
ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
)Cmpd_FV(n, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
• ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻝ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ(
:Cash_NPV
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Cash_IRR
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Cash_PBP
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Cash_NFV
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)Cash_NPV(I%, Csh
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ.
)Cash_IRR(Csh
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ.
)Cash_PBP(I%, Csh
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ.
)Cash_NFV(I%, Csh
• ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ
ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .PM2
:Amt_BAL
)Amt_BAL(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Amt_INT
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Amt_PRN
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Amt_ΣINT
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Amt_ΣPRN
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻊ .PM1
)Amt_INT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻊ .PM1
)Amt_PRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ .PM2
)Amt_ΣINT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ .PM2
)Amt_ΣPRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
ﺍﶈﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ.
:Cnvt_EFF
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﹼ
)Cnvt_EFF(n, I%
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Cnvt_APR
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﺍﶈﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﻤﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻌﺒﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﹼ
)Cnvt_APR(n, I%
• ﺗﻜﻔﻠﺔ ،ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ
ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺸﻲ.
:Cost
)Cost(Sell, Margin
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Sell
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
:Margin
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ:
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺸﻴﺔ.
)Sell(Cost, Margin
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻠﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ.
)Margin(Cost, Sell
8-36
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ
. ﻣﺤﺪﺩd2 ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰd1 ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ
:Days_Prd
Days_Prd(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2)
:ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ
. ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ:Bond_PRC
Bond_PRC(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, YLD) = {PRC, INT, CST}
:ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ
.ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ
Bond_YLD(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, PRC)
:Bond_YLD
:ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ
. ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ.7
.ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ
RUN ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
T_SelOn_
T_SelOff_
Y=Type
r=Type
ParamType
NormalG_
ThickG_
BrokenThickG_
DotG_
R_SelOn_
R_SelOff_
NormalG_
ThickG_
BrokenThickG_
DotG_
anType
an+1Type
an+2Type
n
an
an+1
an+2
bn
bn+1
bn+2
cn
cn+1
cn+2
Σan
Σan+1
Σan+2
Σbn
Σbn+1
Σbn+2
Σcn
Σcn+1
Σcn+2
On
Off
TYPE
Y=
r=
Parm
— STYL
—
·····
······
On SEL+S
Off
—
—
·····
······
an TYPE
an+1
an+2
n.an..
n
an
an+1
an+2
bn
bn+1
bn+2
cn
cn+1
cn+2
Σan
Σan+1
Σan+2
Σbn
Σbn+1
Σbn+2
Σcn
Σcn+1
Σcn+2
TABL
RECR
QuartReg_
LogReg_
*4
X^4
Log
PowerReg_
SinReg_
LogisticReg_
Swap_
`Row_
`Row+_
Row+_
SortA(
SortD(
G_SelOn_
G_SelOff_
Y=Type
r=Type
ParamType
X=Type
Y>Type
YType
X
Y<
Yt
Ys
X>
X<
Xt
Xs
— STYL
—
·····
······
Sto GMEM
Rcl
On
Off
Var
Y= TYPE
r=
Parm
8-37
MAT
LIST
GRPH
DYNA
DrawOn
DrawOff
S-Gph1_
S-Gph2_
S-Gph3_
Scatter
xyLine
Hist
MedBox
Bar
N-Dist
Broken
Linear
Med-Med
Quad
Cubic
Quart
Log
*1
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
On DRAW
Off
GPH1 GRPH
GPH2
GPH3
Scat
xy
Hist
Box
Bar
N-Dis
Brkn
X
Med
X^2
X^3
X^4
Log
Power
Sinusoidal
NPPlot
Logistic
Pie
List_
*2
Pwr
Sin
NPP
Lgst
Pie
DrawDistNorm_
DrawDistT_
DrawDistChi_
DrawDistF_
1-Variable_
2-Variable_
*3
DrwN
Drwt
DrwC
DrwF
1VAR
2VAR
Med-MedLine_
QuadReg_
CubicReg_
Med
X^2
X^3
List
TYPE
DIST
CALC
STAT
[m/s]
[km/h]
[knot]
[ft/s]
[mile/h]
[u]
[mg]
[g]
[kg]
[mton]
[oz]
[lb]
[slug]
[ton(short)]
[ton(long)]
[N]
[lbf]
[tonf]
[dyne]
[kgf]
[Pa]
[kPa]
[mmH2O]
[mmHg]
[atm]
[inH2O]
[inHg]
[lbf/in²]
[bar]
[kgf/cm²]
[eV]
[J]
[calth]
[cal15]
[calIT]
[kcalth]
[kcal15]
[kcalIT]
[I-atm]
[kW•h]
[ft•lbf]
[Btu]
[erg]
[kgf•m]
[W]
[calth/s]
[hp]
[ft•lbf/s]
[Btu/min]
sinh_
cosh_
tanh_
sinh–1_
cosh–1_
tanh–1_
!
P
C
Ran#_
RanInt#(
RanNorm#(
m/s
km/h
knot
ft/s
mile/h
u
mg
g
kg
mton
oz
lb
slug
ton(short)
ton(long)
N
lbf
tonf
dyne
kgf
Pa
kPa
mmH2O
mmHg
atm
inH2O
inHg
lbf/in²
bar
kgf/cm²
eV
J
calth
cal15
calIT
kcalth
kcal15
kcalIT
I-atm
kW•h
ft•lbf
Btu
erg
kgf•m
W
calth/s
hp
ft•lbf/s
Btu/min
Ran#
Int
Norm
VELO
StdDev(
Variance(
*6
MASS
RORC
PRES
ENGY
PWR
sinh
cosh
tanh
sinh–1
cosh–1
tanh–1
X!
nPr
nCr
RAND
HYP
PROB
'
[fm]
[Å]
[µm]
[mm]
[cm]
[m]
[km]
[AU]
[I.y.]
[pc]
[Mil]
[in]
[ft]
[yd]
[fath]
[rd]
[mile]
[n mile]
[cm²]
[m²]
[ha]
[km²]
[in²]
[ft²]
[yd²]
[acre]
[mile²]
[cm³]
[mL]
[L]
[m³]
[in³]
[ft³]
[fl_oz(UK)]
[fl_oz(US)]
[gal(US)]
[gal(UK)]
[pt]
[qt]
[tsp]
[tbsp]
[cup]
[ns]
[µs]
[ms]
[s]
[min]
[h]
[day]
[week]
[yr]
[s-yr]
[t-yr]
[°C]
[K]
[°F]
[°R]
Sel_a0
Sel_a1
S·Dev
Var
a0
a1
RANG
TEST
fm
Å
µm
mm
cm
m
km
AU
I.y.
pc
Mil
in
ft
yd
fath
rd
mile
n mile
cm²
m²
ha
km²
in²
ft²
yd²
acre
mile²
cm³
mL
L
m³
in³
ft³
fl_oz(UK)
fl_oz(US)
gal(US)
gal(UK)
pt
qt
tsp
tbsp
cup
ns
µs
ms
s
min
h
day
week
yr
s-yr
t-yr
°C
K
°F
°R
8-38
'
LENG
CONV
K ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
AREA
VLUM
TIME
TMPR
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
List_
List
LIST
List→Mat(
Dim_
Fill(
Seq(
Min(
Max(
Mean(
Median(
Augment(
Sum_
Prod_
Cuml_
Percent_
AList_
Mat_
L→M
Dim
Fill
Seq
Min
Max
Mean
Med
Aug
Sum
Prod
Cuml
%
A
Mat
MAT
Mat→List(
Det_
Trn_
Augment(
Identity_
Dim_
Fill(
Ref_
Rref_
Vct_
DotP(
CrossP(
Angle(
UnitV(
Norm(
i
Abs_
Arg_
Conjg_
ReP_
ImP_
M→L
Det
Trn
Aug
Iden
Dim
Fill
Ref
Rref
Vct
DotP
CrsP
Angle
UntV
Norm
i
Abs
Arg
Conj
ReP
ImP
'r∠θ
'a+bi
Solve(
d/dx(
d2/dx2(
'r∠θ
'a+bi
Solve
d/dx
d2/dx2
∫(
SolveN(
FMin(
FMax(
∫ dx
SolveN
FMin
FMax
Σ(
Σ(
logab(
Int÷
Rmdr
'Simp
x̂
ŷ
*5
logab
Int÷
Rmdr
Simp
x̂
ŷ
DIST
CPLX
CALC
STAT
H_Start
H_pitch
x1
y1
x2
y2
x3
y3
n
x
sx
n1
n2
x1
x2
sx1
sx2
sp
*7
Y
r
Xt
Yt
X
D_Start
D_End
D_pitch
F_Start
F_End
F_pitch
F_Result
an
an+1
an+2
bn
bn+1
bn+2
cn
cn+1
cn+2
R_Start
R_End
a0
a1
a2
b0
b1
b2
c0
c1
c2
anStart
bnStart
cnStart
R_Result
Sim_Result
Sim_Coef
Ply_Result
Ply_Coef
n
I%
Strt
Pitch
x1
y1
x2
y2
x3
y3
n
x
sx
n1
n2
x1
x2
sx1
sx2
sp
an
an+1
an+2
bn
bn+1
bn+2
cn
cn+1
cn+2
Strt
End
a0
a1
a2
b0
b1
b2
c0
c1
c2
anSt
bnSt
cnSt
Sell(
Margin(
Days_Prd(
Bond_PRC(
Bond_YLD(
PTS
Sell
Mrg
PRD
PRC
YLD
DAYS
BOND
INPT
J ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
RESLT
Y
r
Xt
Yt
X
Strt
End
Pitch
Strt
End
Pitch
Reslt
FORM
GRPH
DYNA
TABL
RECR
RANG
Reslt
S-Rlt
S-Cof
P-Rlt
P-Cof
n
I%
EQUA
TVM
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
Xmin
Xmax
Xscl
Xdot
Ymin
Ymax
Yscl
Tθmin
min
max
scal
dot
min
max
scal
min
Tθmax
max
Tθptch
RightXmin
RightXmax
RightXscl
RightXdot
RightYmin
RightYmax
RightYscl
RightTθmin
ptch
min
max
scal
dot
min
max
scal
min
RightTθmax
max
RightTθptch
Xfct
Yfct
n
x
ptch
Σx
Σx
2
Σx
Σ x2
σx
sx
minX
maxX
y
σx
sx
minX
maxX
y
Σy
Σy
Σy2
Σ y2
Σxy
Σxy
σy
sy
minY
maxY
a
b
c
d
e
r
r2
MSe
Q1
Med
Q3
Mod
σy
sy
minY
maxY
a
b
c
d
e
r
r2
MSe
Q1
Med
Q3
Mod
n
x
8-39
X
V-WIN
Y
°
r
g
T,θ
R-X
R-Y
R-T, θ
Xfct
Yfct
X
Y
GRPH
RanBin#(
RanList#(
P(
Q(
R(
t(
Abs_
Int_
Frac_
Rnd
Intg_
RndFix(
GCD(
LCM(
MOD(
MOD_Exp(
FACT
STAT
Pol(
Rec(
'DMS
m
µ
n
p
f
k
M
G
T
P
E
StoPict_
RclPict_
fn
_And_
_Or_
Not_
Xor_
RclCapt_
Smpl_SI(
Smpl_SFV(
Cmpd_n(
Cmpd_I%(
Cmpd_PV(
Cmpd_PMT(
Cmpd_FV(
Cash_NPV(
Cash_IRR(
Cash_PBP(
Cash_NFV(
Amt_BAL(
Amt_INT(
Amt_PRN(
Amt_ΣINT(
Amt_ΣPRN(
Cnvt_EFF(
Cnvt_APR(
Cost(
Bin
List
P(
Q(
R(
t(
Abs
Int
Frac
Rnd
Intg
RndFi
GCD
LCM
MOD
MOD•E
°
r
g
NUM
ANGL
° ’ ’’
Pol(
Rec(
'DMS
m ESYM
µ
n
p
f
k
M
G
T
P
E
Sto
PICT
Rcl
fn FMEM
And LOGIC
Or
Not
Xor
Rcl CAPT
SI SMPL
TVM
SFV
n CMPD
I%
PV
PMT
FV
NPV CASH
IRR
PBP
NFV
BAL
AMT
INT
PRN
ΣINT
ΣPRN
EFF CNVT
APR
Cost COST
VarRange
VarList_
Rang
List
On
T-VAR
ΣDSP
Off
None RESID
List
Real CPLX
a+bi
ΣdispOn
ΣdispOff
Resid-None
Resid-List_
Real
a+bi
r∠θ
d/c
ab/c
Y=DrawSpeedNorm
Y=DrawSpeedHigh
DateMode365
DateMode360
PmtBgn
PmtEnd
PeriodsAnnual
PeriodsSemi
IneqTypeAnd
IneqTypeOr
SimplfyAuto
SimplfyMan
Q1Q3TypeStd
Q1Q3TypeOnData
r∠θ
d/c
ab/c
Norm
High
365
360
Bgn
End
Annu
Semi
And
Or
Auto
Man
Std
OnD
FRAC
Y•SPD
DATE
PMT
PRD
INEQ
Send(
Receive(
Send38k_
Receive38k_
OpenComport38k
CloseComport38k
:
StrJoin(
StrLen(
StrCmp(
StrSrc(
StrLeft(
StrRight(
StrMid(
Exp'Str(
Exp(
StrUpr(
StrLwr(
StrInv(
StrShift(
StrRotate(
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
Y=
r=
Parm
X=c
Graph_ ∫
G-∫dx
Y>
Graph_Y>
Y<
Graph_Y<
Graph_Yt
Yt
Graph_Ys
Ys
X>
Graph_X>
X<
Graph_X<
Graph_Xt
Xt
Graph_Xs
Xs
Plot
Plot_
PlotOn_ Pl-On
PlotOff_ Pl-Off
PlotChg_ Pl-Chg
Line
Line
F-Line_ F-Line
Circle_
Vertical_
Fact ZOOM
Auto
V-Win V-WIN
Sto
Rcl
Cls SKTCH
Tang
Norm
Inv
GRPH
PLOT
LINE
Crcl
Vert
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
!m (SET UP) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
Deg
Rad
Gra
CoordOn
CoordOff
GridOn
GridOff
AxesOn
AxesOff
LabelOn
LabelOff
Fix_
Sci_
Norm_
EngOn
EngOff
Eng
S-L-Normal
S-L-Thick
S-L-Broken
S-L-Dot
G-Connect
G-Plot
DerivOn
DerivOff
BG-None
BG-Pict_
FuncOn
FuncOff
SimulOn
SimulOff
S-WindAuto
S-WindMan
File_
LocusOn
LocusOff
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
On
Off
Eng
Deg
Rad
Gra
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Fix
Sci
Norm
Eng
ANGL
COOR
GRID
AXES
LABL
DISP
S/L
⎯
—
·····
······
Con DRAW
Plot
On DERV
Off
None BACK
Pict
On FUNC
Off
On
SIML
Off
Auto S-WIN
Man
File
LIST
On LOCS
Off
8-40
Str
!J (PRGM) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
Q1Q3
! ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
Factor_
ZoomAuto
ViewWindow_
StoV-Win_
RclV-Win_
Cls
Tangent_
Normal_
Inverse_
Graph_Y=
Graph_r=
Graph(X,Y)=(
Graph_X=
Join
Len
Cmp
Src
Left
Right
Mid
E'S
Exp
Upr
Lwr
Inv
Shift
Rot
PV
PMT
FV
P/Y
C/Y
:
STR
SIMP
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
PV
PMT
FV
P/Y
C/Y
Str_
Send
Recv
S38k
R38k
Open
Close
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
If_
Then_
Else_
IfEnd
For_
_To_
_Step_
Next
While_
WhileEnd
Do
LpWhile_
Prog_
Return
Break
Stop
Lbl_
Goto_
If
Then
Else
I-End
For
To
Step
Next
Whle
WEnd
Do
Lp-W
Prog
Rtrn
Brk
Stop
Lbl
Goto
⇒
Isz_
Dsz_
Menu_
?
^
ClrText
ClrGraph
ClrList_
ClrMat_
ClrVct_
DrawStat
DrawGraph
DrawDyna
DispF-Tbl
DrawFTG-Con
DrawFTG-Plt
DispR-Tbl
PlotPhase
DrawWeb_
DrawR-Con
⇒
Isz
Dsz
Menu
Tabl
G-Con
G-Plt
Tabl
Phase
Web
an-Cn
DrawR Σ-Con
DrawR-Plt
Σa-Cn
an-Pl
DrawR Σ-Plt
=
Σa-Pl
≠
>
<
t
s
Locate_
Getkey
Text
Grph
List
Mat
Vct
Stat
Grph
Dyna
F-Tbl
COM
CTL
JUMP
?
^
CLR
DISP
R-Tbl
=
≠
>
<
t
s
Lcte
Gtky
REL
I/O
se
r
r2
pa
Fa
Adf
SSa
MSa
pb
Fb
Bdf
SSb
MSb
pab
Fab
ABdf
SSab
MSab
Edf
SSe
MSe
Left
Right
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2
df
p
xInv
x1Inv
x2Inv
zLow
zUp
tLow
tUp
se
r
r2
pa
Fa
Adf
SSa
MSa
pb
Fb
Bdf
SSb
MSb
pab
Fab
ABdf
SSab
MSab
Edf
SSe
MSe
Left
Right
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2
df
p
xInv
x1Inv
x2Inv
zLow
zUp
tLow
tUp
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
INTR
DIST
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
Exp(ae^bx) ae^bx
ab^x
Exp(ab^x)
Square
×
Cross
k
Dot
Leng
StickLength
Hztl
StickHoriz
%
%
Data
Data
None
ax+b
LinearReg(ax+b)
a+bx
LinearReg(a+bx)
ExpReg(a•e^bx) ae^bx
ab^x
ExpReg(a•b^x)
NPd
NormPD(
NCd
NormCD(
InvN
InvNormCD(
TPd
tPD(
TCd
tCD(
Invt
InvTCD(
CPd
ChiPD(
CCd
ChiCD(
InvC
InvChiCD(
FPd
FPD(
FCd
FCD(
InvF
InvFCD(
BPd
BinomialPD(
BCd
BinomialCD(
InvB
InvBinomialCD(
PPd
PoissonPD(
PCd
PoissonCD(
InvP
InvPoissonCD(
GPd
GeoPD(
GCd
GeoCD(
InvG
InvGeoCD(
HPd
HypergeoPD(
HCd
HypergeoCD(
InvH
InvHyperGeoCD(
1-S
OneSampleZTest_
2-S
TwoSampleZTest_
1-P
OnePropZTest_
2-P
TwoPropZTest_
1-S
OneSampleTTest_
2-S
TwoSampleTTest_
REG
LinRegTTest_
GOF
ChiGOFTest_
ChiTest_ 2-WAY
TwoSampleFTest_
1-W
OneWayANOVA_
2-W
TwoWayANOVA_
p
p
z
z
t
t
Chi
χ2
F
F
p̂
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 1
p̂ 2
p̂ 2
df
df
Exp
*1
MARK
*2
STICK
%DATA
None
X
*3
EXP
*4
NORM
*5
Horizontal_
Text_
PxlOn_
PxlOff_
PxlChg_
PxlTest(
SketchNormal_
SketchThick_
SketchBroken_
SketchDot_
F
BINM
POISN
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
d
h
b
o
Neg
Not
and
or
xor
xnor
'Dec
'Hex
'Bin
'Oct
d~o
LOG
DISP
GEO
!J (PRGM) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
H•GEO
Z
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
*6
t
Chi
F
ANOV
TEST
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
Prog_
Lbl_
Goto_
Lbl
Goto
⇒
Isz_
Dsz_
Menu_
?
^
=
⇒
Isz
Dsz
Menu
≠
>
<
t
s
:
≠
>
<
t
s
*7
=
Prog
JUMP
?
^
REL
:
!m (SET UP) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ
Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct
8-41
Test
STYL
4 (MENU) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ
d
h
b
o
Neg_
Not_
and
or
xor
xnor
'Dec
'Hex
'Bin
'Oct
CHI
⎯
—
·····
······
BASE ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
t
On
Off
Chg
Hztl
Text
PIXL
Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct
.8ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﲟﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﻏﺮﺽ
ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،Aﻭﻳﹸﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﺑـ ) B (2, 3, 5, 7....ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ .A
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ .A
• ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ .B>A
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ
462 = 2 × 3 × 7 × 11
egcw
w
ww
w
8-42
ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ،ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ
ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ،ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ( ﻟـ . X
:Y1ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ
:Y2ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ
:Y3ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
:Y4ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ
:Y5ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻝ Y3ﻭ Y4
ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ Y1ﻭ .Y2
ﻏﺮﺽ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ.
dw
baw
bw
w
8-43
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ،ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ.
ﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .S • SHT
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIﻭ fx-9750GIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ .S • SHT
.1ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ S • SHTﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHTﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺏ ”.“SHEET
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ )ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ( ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﳑﻄﻦ ﻣﻦ
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (Z
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ
) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (999
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ.ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ
ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ .ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ،A1 × 2 ,sin30 ,3+7ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ
ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=(ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ.
ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ )"( ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺺ.
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=( ،ﻣﺜﻞ ،=A1×2ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .S • SHT
k
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
• } ... {FILEﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝ FILEﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{NEW}/{OPEN}/{SV • AS}/{RECAL
• } ... {EDITﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟـ EDITﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{CUT}/{PASTE}/{COPY}/{CELL}/{JUMP}/{SEQ}/{FILL}/{SRT • A}/{SRT • D
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ PASTEﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ CUTﺍﻭ .COPY
9-1
9
• } ... {DELﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ) DELﺣﺬﻑ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{ROW}/{COL}/{ALL
• } ... {INSﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ) INSﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
• }{ROW}/{COL
• } ... {CLRﲤﺴﺢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
• } ... {GRPHﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ GRPHﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ) .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (STAT
• }{GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3}/{SEL}/{SET
• } ... {CALCﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ ) CALCﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ) .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (STAT
• }{1VAR}/{2VAR}/{REG}/{SET
• } ... {STOﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ ) STOﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ
• }{VAR}/{LIST}/{FILE}/{MAT}/{VCT
• } ... {RCLﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ ) RCLﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ
• }{LIST}/{FILE}/{MAT}/{VCT
• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
• } ... {GRABﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ GRABﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
• } ... {$ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ). ($
• } ... {:ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ). (:
• } ... {Ifﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ (.CellIf
• } ... {CELﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• (CellMin(, CellMax(, CellMean(, CellMedian, CellSum, CellProd
• } ... {RELﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺋﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• =, ≠, >, <, t, s
.2ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ،ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ
ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
k
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
u
ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
.1ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 1(FILE)1(NEW
.2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . w
• ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ.
• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ .2ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،
ﺳﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ.
9-2
u
ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ
.1ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 2(FILE)1(OPEN
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
uﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،S • SHTﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﻟﺘﻪ ،ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ
ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ.
u
ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
.1ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)3(SV • AS
.2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ،2ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ
ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ .ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﻹﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ،ﺃﻭ )6(No
ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .2
u
ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
.1ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 1(FILE)2(OPEN
.2ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 1(DEL
.3ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻳﺔ .ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺊ.
.4ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J
• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺈﺳﻢ ” “SHEETﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻪ.
k
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHTﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ Auto Calcﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻛﺴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﺃﻭ
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ Auto Calcﲢﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺩﺕ.
Auto Calc u
Auto Calcﻫﻮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) S • SHTﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-29
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Auto Calcﻣﻔﻌﻞ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ،ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ
ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Auto Calcﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻞ )ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ،ﲢﺘﺎﺝ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
uﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . 1(FILE)4(RECALﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ
ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ.
9-3
k
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ،ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ،ﺍﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
u
ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ JUMPﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-5
ﺻﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻳﺎ
ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ Aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .dﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،A2ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ،
)ﻣﻦ A2ﺍﻟﻰ .(Z2ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ) A2:Z2ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻳﺎ
ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . fﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،C1ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩC
ﻛﺎﻣﻼ )ﻣﻦ C1ﺍﻟﻰ .(C999ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ C1:C999
)ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ Aﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ ﺃﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ fﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 1ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
9-4
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ JUMPﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ:
ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ
.1ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)2(EDIT)4(JUMP)1(GO
.2ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
) A1ﺍﻟﻰ (Z999ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ.
.3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w
ﺧﻂ 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
)↑2(EDIT)4(JUMP)2(TOP
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ Aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
)←2(EDIT)4(JUMP)3(TOP
ﺧﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
)↓2(EDIT)4(JUMP)4(BOT
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ Zﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
)→2(EDIT)4(JUMP)5(BOT
u
ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ
1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ،
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ،ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .9-4
2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). !i(CLIP
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ – ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ.
• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .Jﺍﺫﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺳﻴﻘﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ
ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺓ.
) kﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﻧﺺ ،ﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ
ﺩﻋﻮﻧﺎ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ.
uﻹﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ،ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﲟﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﻣﺜﻞ
) b, al(Bﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﲟﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ
ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﻲ ﻗﺪﻣﺎ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ . Jﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ.
.3ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ . w
9-5
uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(EDIT)3(CELL
ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ
• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﹼ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ .ﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﻲ ﻗﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ .Jﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ.
.4ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ .w
uﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﲢﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ
ﺇﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ
"ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ" ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .1-30
k
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻪ.ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ،sin30، A1×2 ،7+3ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=(ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ.
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ sdawﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) 0.5ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ Degﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ .
• ﲢﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﺮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ" ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣ ﹼﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ . 1-30
.2ﺍﺻﻐﻂ ) 2(EDIT)5(SEQﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ
ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ
9-6
ﺑﻨﻮﺩ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
Expr
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) f(xﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
ﻣﺜﻼa+(X)x+bw (X2 + 1) :
Var
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻝ .Expr
ﻣﺜﻼa+(X)w (X) :
ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ) (X1ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻻﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑـ.Var
ﻣﺜﻼcw :
ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ) (Xnﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻻﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑـ.Var
ﻣﺜﻼbaw :
Incre
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ) (mﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟـ ، X1ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ، (X2 = X1 + m):
) ، (X3 = X2 + mﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ
ﻝ . X 1 + (n – 1 ) m < X n
ﻣﺜﻼcw :
ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ
ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ) ،B2، A1ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ .ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ.
ﻣﺜﻼ(B1) al(B)bw :
• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻧﺰﻭﻻ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
• ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ
ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ.
.3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(EXEﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ wﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
ﻭﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
⇒
k
ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ )”( .aEﺗﺨﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﺍﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻛﻤﺎﻫﻮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ )"(
ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
9-7
k
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺩﻋﻮﻧﺎ ﻧﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ
> . × = B1 ,A1 ,B1):
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻝ A1ﻋﻨﺪ } ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ } < { A1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .{ B1ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﹼ ،
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻝ .B1
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CEL)1(Min) :
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ:ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ(CellMin
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ=CellMin(A3:C5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A3:C5
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CEL)2(Max) :
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ:ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ(CellMax
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ=CellMax(A3:C5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A3:C5
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CEL)3(Mean) :
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ:ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ(CellMean
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝCellMean(A3:C5 ) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CEL)4(Med) :
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ:ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ(CellMedian
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ=CellMedian(A3:C5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ A3:C5
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CEL)5(Sum) :
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ:ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ(CellSum
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ=Cellsum(A3:C5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ A3:C5
9-14
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CEL)6(Prod) :
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ:ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ(CellProd
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ=CellProd(B3:B5) :
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ B3:B5
(CellProd
)ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(
kﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHT
ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHTﺍﳋﺎﺹ )CellSumﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ C1ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A1:B5ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A1:B5
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ C1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
)!.(=)5(CEL)5(Sum
)Jav(A)b3(:)al(b)f
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ GRAB
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-9ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) CLIPﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-5ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ
ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ.
)←J1(GRAB)4(TOP
)ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ GRABﻭ ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ (A1
!i(CLIP)ecccc
)ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ( CLIP
)w
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ wﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ.
.4ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ(،
ﻭ ﺍﻹﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ
xﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ .y-ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ .ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ،
ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺒﻌﺜﺮ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ، S SHTﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .STATﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .S SHT
•
•
9-15
kﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (GRPH
ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(
)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 (x-
)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ(y-
–2.1, 0.3, 1.5، 2.0, 2.4
uﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ
ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ(
.1ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
• ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ،Aﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ y-ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ .B
.2ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ).(A1:B5
.3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)1(GRPHﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،GRPHﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ).1(GRPH1
• ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 2ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ.
• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ .S • SHTﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(SETﻋﻠﻰ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .GRPHﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ" ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
k
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ،
ﻭ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ.
uﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
.1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ.
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )6(g)1(GRPH)6(SET
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ) StatGraph1ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(.
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
9-16
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻤﺪﺓ:
ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ:
1
Xﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
2
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔY ,ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ X
3
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔY ,ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ . ,ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ X
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
•ﻭ ﹼ
ﺑﻨﻮﺩ
StatGraph1
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ،
ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺓ ،StatGraph1ﺍﻭ ، 2ﺍﻭ 3
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻮ ) Scatﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ(.
Xﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
).ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ( Xﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ x-ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ Xﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
Yﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
).ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ (Yﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ y-ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ Yﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ) 1(1ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )×
ﺍﻭ • ﺍﻭ (.ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ
ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ.
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ،
ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ،StatGraph1ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-2
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻝ ،XCellRange، YCellRangeﺍﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ )1(CELL) 2(CELLﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ) 1(:ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻥ ) (:ﺑﲔ ﺇﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ.
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ wﺍﻭ .J
k
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
(CALC
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ " ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ) "xyﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-10
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
) 0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ (x-
) –2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(y-
9-17
uﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ
.1ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x-ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ A1:A5ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ y-
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ،B1:B5ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ).(A1:B5
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)2(CALCﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، CALCﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ
).2(2VAR
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ
ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ . 1
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ dﻭ eﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ .ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ،
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .6-15
.3ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ . J
k
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
.1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻳﺎ.
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )6(g)2(CALC)6(SET
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ.
• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻻﻋﻤﺪﺓ:
ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ:
1
1VarXCellﻭ 2VarXCell
2
1VarFreqﻭ 2VarYCell
3
2VarFreq
9-18
• ﻳ ﹼﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ
ﺑﻨﻮﺩ
1Var XCell
1Var Freq
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ.
2Var XCell
2Var YCell
2Var Freq
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﻭﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ yﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ.
.3ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ.
• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻟﻮﻥ ) ،(:ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 1(:
• ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )) 1(CELLﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،1Var XCell
(2VarXCell، 2VarYCellﺍﻭ )) 2(CELLﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ 1VarFreqﻭ .(2VarFreq
.4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ Jﺍﻭ . w
k
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHTﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STATﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،S • SHTﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
GRPHﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ /ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ . CALC
ﻭ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STATﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .S • SHTﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ:
ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ:
}{GRPH} - {GPH1
"ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-1
}{GRPH} - {GPH2
}{GRPH} - {GPH3
}{GRPH} - {SEL
"ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-3
}{GRPH} - {SET
"ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-1
"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ " )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-1
" ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-2
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-16
}{CALC} - {1VAR
"ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ")ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-16
}{CALC} - {2VAR
"ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ")ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-16
}{CALC} - {REG
"ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ")ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-17
}{CALC} - {SET
“ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ"
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-18
9-19
.5ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHT
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ،
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
k
ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ
) Z, r, θﺍﻟﻰ (A
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )، 6(g)3(STO)1(VAR
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ
) ،6(g)3(STO)2(LISTﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
)ﻣﻠﻒ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ (6
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ
ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ
) ،6(g)3(STO)3(FILEﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،1ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،2ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﺔ.
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
) Mat Zﺍﻟﻰ (Mat A
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ
ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ
) ،6(g)3(STO)4(MATﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، 1ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،2ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﺔ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
) Vct Zﺍﻟﻰ (Vct A
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ .ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ،
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،6(g)3(STO)5(VCTﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ ،ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ERRORﳋﻠﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟـ 0
ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ) ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ.
9-20
uﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﻟﻠﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ .A1:A10
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)3(STO)2(LIST
• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .1
.3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]."[1-26
.4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ "ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ".
.5ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(EXEﺍﻭ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
k
ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ.
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) ،6(g)4(RCL)1(LISTﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﻧﻘﻞ" ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-30
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
)ﻣﻠﻒ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ (6
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ
) .6(g)4(RCL)1(LISTﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
) Mat Zﺍﻟﻰ (Mat A
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) .6(g)4(RCL)3(MATﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
) Vct Zﺍﻟﻰ (Vct A
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ
ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،6(g)4(RCL)4(VCTﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ.
9-21
uﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)4(RCL)3(MAT
ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ" ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .1
.3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ) Aﺍﻟﻰ (Zﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
.4ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(EXEﺍﻭ wﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ
ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ).(A1:Z999
9-22
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ eActivity
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ .eActivityﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ،
ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ
"ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ".
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivityﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﹼﻢ ،ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ
ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ،ﻭ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﻼﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivityﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ
ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎ،ﺍﻟﺦ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIﻭ fx-9750GIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ . e • ACT
.1ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ eActivity
ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻫﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ e • ACTﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ e • ACTﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ.
ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺷﺮﻳﻂ
ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ
ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ
10-1
10
ﻳ ﹼﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ .eActivity
ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .........................ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ،ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ.
ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ........ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ .ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،RUN • MATﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻜﲔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ .......................ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ.
ﺷﺮﻳﻂ .................................ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ eActivityﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
.2ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ eActivity
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﻣﺠﻠﺪ eActivity
• } ...{OPENﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﹼ
• } ...{NEWﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻠﻒ eActivityﺟﺪﻳﺪ
• } ...{DELﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ eActivity
• } ...{SRCﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ eActivity
• } ...{SD}/{SMEMﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) SDﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ .(SDﻭﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ }{SD
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ } {SMEMﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD
• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) 2(NEWﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivityﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
• ﻭﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ 128ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ.
ﻭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ.
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ
ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ) ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ( ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
• ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ
• } ...{FILEﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• } ...{SAVEﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.ﹰ
• } ...{SV • ASﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ.
• } ...{OPTﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ "SDﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .11-11
• } ...{CAPAﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
• } ...{STRPﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ.
• } ...{JUMPﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• } ...{TOP}/{BTM}/{PgUp}/{PgDnﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .10-4
• } ...{DEL-Lﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
10-2
• } ...{INSﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ،ﻭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• } ...{TEXTﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
• } ...{CALCﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
• } ...{STOPﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
• } ...{'MATﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ /(10-7ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (10-7
• } ...{'LISTﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (10-7
• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
• } ...{TEXTﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• } ...{CHARﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
• } ...{A⇔aﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ
ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ .(a
• } ...{MATHﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ) MATHﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-11
• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ
• } ...{CALCﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
• } ...{MATHﻣﺜﻞ } {MATHﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ".
• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ
• } ...{FILEﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• } ...{SAVE}/{SV • AS}/{OPT}/{CAPAﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ }{FILEﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ " ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ"
• } ...{SIZEﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ.
• } ...{CHARﻣﺜﻞ } {CHARﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ " ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ"
• } ...{A⇔aﻣﺜﻞ } {A⇔aﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ " ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ".
.3ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ eActivity
ﻳﺒﲔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .eActivity
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﹼ
ﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺋﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 11ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ".
uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(NEW
• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻲ 8ﺍﺣﺮﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . w
• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ.
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
9ﺍﻟﻰ Z, {, }, ’, ˜, 0ﺍﻟﻰ A
10-3
uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(OPENﺍﻭ *. w
* ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ ،ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺑﻚ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).3(DEL
• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ " ﺣﺬﻑ eActivity؟"
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺊ.
uﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ
.1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ).4(SRC
• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
.2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ .ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ” “ITﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺜﻞ
، ITXX, ITABC, IT123ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺜﻞ XXITﺍﻭ .ABITC
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . w
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،2ﺳﻴﺘﻢ
ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ" ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻹﻏﻼﻕ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ.
.4ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ .eActivityﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ
ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ " ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ) " eActivityﺻﻔﺤﺔ (10-3ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ.
kﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ
cﺍﻭ f
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ
!fﺍﻭ
)6(g)1(JUMP)3(PgUp
!cﺍﻭ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ
)6(g)1(JUMP)4(PgDn
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ
)6(g)1(JUMP)1(TOP
ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ
)6(g)1(JUMP)2(BTM
10-4
kﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
uﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ” “TEXTﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .F3
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ 3ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ”“TEXT
• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “CALCﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ F3ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CALCﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
• ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ } {INSﺛﻢ } {TEXTﺳﻴﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ
ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" ﹼ
uﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻳﻠﺘﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻲ 255ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ .ﹼ
ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ( .ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻻ ﺗﻠﺘﻒ *1.ﻭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ )']( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻄﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) 5(A↔aﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ .ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
•
ﹼ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻜﲔ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 2-7ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ،ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Aﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﹼ
ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-10ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
*1ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺃﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ”,
ﺗﻠﺘﻒ.
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(CHARﻻ ﹼ
“ ﺍﻭ ” { “ “ ’ ”،,ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ
10-5
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ eActivityﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-3ﻭﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ
)']( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ
ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ eActivity
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ” “CALCﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .F3
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻜﲔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ 3ﺍﻟﻰ ”“CALC
• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “TEXTﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ F3ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CALCﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ } {INSﺛﻢ } {CALCﺳﻴﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ.( s$!E(π)cg :
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ
ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RUN • MAT
.3ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . w
10-6
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ } {'MATﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ
ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RUN • MATﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-36ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ
ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
RUN • MATﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ
ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ .e • ACT
uﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ } {'MATﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ.
ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ e • ACTﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ .RUN • MATﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ
”ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-49ﻟﻜﻦ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ e • ACTﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ RUN • MATﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ e • ACTﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ .ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ.e • ACT-
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ } {'LISTﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ") STATﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" ،ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(3-1ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ
ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ") RUN • MATﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﺤﻔﺔ " ،3-5ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻷﺭﻳﺘﻤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(3-10ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﺗﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ .STAT
• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ
ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ .e • ACT
kﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ .ﻭﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻒ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ } {INSﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ } {STOPﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
10-7
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ .eActivityﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ
ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(
ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ .ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ" ﺍﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ" ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).2(STRP
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )RUN • MATﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
RUN • MATﻣﻦ .eActivityﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ(.
)Run (Math
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ GRAPH
Graph
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﺋﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ GRAPH
Graph Editor
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﺋﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ TABLE
Table Editor
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ CONICS
Conics Graph
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ CONICS
Conics Editor
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ CONICS
Stat Graph
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STAT
List Editor
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ EQUA
Solver
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RECUR
Recur Editor
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ) ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ eActivityﺍﳋﺎﺹ.
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 10-10ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(.
Notes
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MAT
Matrix Editor
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MAT
Vector Editor
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ EQUA
Simul Equation
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ EQUA
Poly Equation
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ DYNA
Dynamic Graph
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ TVM
Financial
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHT
Spreadsheet
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ E-CON3ﺃﻭ E-CON2
Econ SetupWizard
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ E-CON3ﺃﻭ E-CON2
Econ AdvancSetup
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ E-CON3ﺃﻭ E-CON2
Econ Sampling
)ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ.
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ E-CON3ﺃﻭ E-CON2
)ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ.
10-8
Econ Graph
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(STRP
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ
ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10-8
.3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ”) “Graphﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ .(GRAPH
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻴﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ( ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳋﻂ
ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ.
.5ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻲ 16ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . w
.6ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ.
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ
) ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ GRAPHﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ( ،ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ.
.7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
.8ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ.
1 2
=(Y
) ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝX – 1 :
2
10-9
.9ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(DRAW
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
.10ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ،eActivityﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) (. !a
• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 8ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
.11ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ.
uﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
"ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ" ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ eActivityﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ .ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ
ﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .eActivity
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ.
• } ...{JUMPﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ JUMPﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )) (1(TOPﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،
ﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ )) (2(BTMﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )) (3(PgUpﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ)). (4(PgDn
• } ...{DEL-Lﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• } ...{INSﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ.
• } ...{MATHﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ) MATHﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-11
• } ...{CHARﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
• } ...{A⇔aﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ
)ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ .( a
uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 16ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ .ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﺐ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ.
ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ dﺍﻭ eﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ.
• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ wﺳﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻲﺀ.
10-10
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺇﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ wﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ.
uﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ eActivityﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )
(!a
ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( !aﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ eActivityﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ.
uﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) ( . !,ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . w
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺗﻪ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(FILE)5(SIZE
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ
ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
.3ﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ
.1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺬﻑ.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )6(g)2(DEL-L
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ،ﺍﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻲﺀ.
kﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ.
ﻣﻠﻒ eActivityﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ OS 2.0ﺍﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟـ “. “g2e
ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ )ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ OS 2.0ﺍﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ
10-11
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ( ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ eActivityﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻹﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ” “g2eﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ.
• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ))(1(FILE)2(SV-AS
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ eActivityﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ”) “g1eﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ( ،ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ” “g2eﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳌﻠﻒ eActivityﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ) ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ OS 2.0ﺍﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ .ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ " ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﻴﺰﺍﺕ
ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ OS 2.0ﺍﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ" ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﺍﻭ . π
ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
• ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ” “g1eﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivityﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﹼ
uﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(FILE)1(SAVEﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
uﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
.1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ،eActivityﺍﺿﻐﻂ ). 1(FILE)2(SV-AS
• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 8ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .2ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﺍﺫﺍ
ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ،ﺍﻭ )6(No
ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .2
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻣﻠﻒ eActivityﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ” “g2eﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ .OS 2.0
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ eActivityﲟﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺿﻴﻔﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ OS 2.0
ﺍﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﲟﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ” . “g1eﻟﺬﺍ
ﺳﻮﻑ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ OS 2.0
)ﻣﻨﺬ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ” “g1eﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ( ،ﻟﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ
ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ .OS 2.0
kﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ eActivity
ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﳌﻠﻒ eActivityﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻫﻮ 30,000ﺑﺎﻳﺖ *.ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
eActivityﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
* ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﻭ ﻟﻌﻠﻪ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ 30,000
ﺑﺎﻳﺖ.
10-12
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ eActivity
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(FILE)4(CAPA
.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ
ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
uﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J
ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﹼ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ:
ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ eActivityﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
)1(Yes
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ
)6(No
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ eActivity
10-13
A
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ،ﻭ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-7400GII/fx-9750GIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﹼ
fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860GII/fx-9860G AU PLUS
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ,ﻭﺑﺤﺚ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ،ﻭ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺗﲔ.
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.
ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ،ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ.
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ "ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ" ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ،ﲢﻤﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) SDﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ
.fx-9860GII SD
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ MEMORYﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ، fx-7400GII/fx-9750GIIﻓﺄﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ.
ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ " )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(11-2
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ
• } } ........... {MAINﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ {
• } } ......... {SMEMﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ{
• } } ............... {SDﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )} SDﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ (fx-9860GII
• } } .......... {BKUPﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ{
• } } ............. {OPTﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ،ﻭ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ { SD
11-1
11
kﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ :ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺍﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-7400GIIﺍﻭ
fx-9750GIIﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
• ﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ
MEMORYﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ:
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ:
)1(MAIN
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
)2(SMEM
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
)3(SD
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) SDﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ (fx-9860GII
•
•
•
•
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ 7ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ
)ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .(SD
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﲟﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ .ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ "ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ" ﺑـ 65536ﺑﺎﻳﺖ.
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ < >،ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،SD
] [ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ.
ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺪ .ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ، SDﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻠﺪ.
11-2
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ALPHA MEM
ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ*3
ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ،
ﻭ ﺭﺩﹼ ،ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺦ(
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
>*2
*3
Ans)*1ﻭ Z,ﺍﻟﻰ MAT n (n = A
Ans)*2ﻭ Z,ﺍﻟﻰ VCT n (n= A
>*2
ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ*2
ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎﻓﺔ*2
TABLE
>*1
CPn*1
SUn*1
SDn*1
Econ2Now*2
Econ3Now*3
FINANCIAL*1
>*5
*4
MAT n*1
VCT n*5
>*5
ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ*5
TABLE
>, Xﻭ Xsﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ . X=c
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،CFX-98950Gﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ:
ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ؛ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ؛ ﺳﻤﻴﻜﺔ؛ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﺔ؛ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ.
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 1ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 2ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ 3ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ.ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،fx-9860Gﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ
ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
ﺍﶈﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ .ﻛﻦ ،ﺍﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﹼ
ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )@( .ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﳊﺔ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ 256ﺻﻒ ﺍﻭ 256ﻋﻤﻮﺩ*1-
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ 256ﺧﻂ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ 256ﺻﻒ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ 256ﺧﻂ*1*3
ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ EQUAﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ 6-ﻋﻠﻰ .4
13-8
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
-ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ*1
ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ -ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 6 ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ *26 ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ F-Mem6*2 -ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ G-Mem6*2
*1ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .fx-7400GII
*2ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-9750Gﺍﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .CFX-9850G
*3ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .fx-9860G
uﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ CFX-9850G
ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ :
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ CFX-9850G
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0ﺍﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ . CFX-9850G
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ” ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ“(
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺭﻭﻃﻲ*1
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ E-CON2ﺃﻭ *1E-CON3
• ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ cn (cn+1, cn+2)*1
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ*1
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ*1
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ x-ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
• ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ
*1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .fx-7400GII
uﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-7400G
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ:
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ :ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-7400G
13-9
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0ﺍﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .fx-7400G
• ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ )Aﺍﻟﻰ ، Zﻭ (θ ، rﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻌﲔ
• ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ”ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ“(
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺭﻭﻃﻲ*1
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ*1
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ E-CON2ﺃﻭ *1E-CON3
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ*1
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ*1
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻲ*1
• ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 2ﺍﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ
• ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ x-ﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
• ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ) ، Y=f(xﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ Yﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ.
*1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .fx-7400GII
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ (fx-7400GII / fx-9750GII
uﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ) OS 2.0ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ,fx-7400GII ,fx-9750GIIﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ , fx-9860Gﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ
CFX-9850G
ﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ .fx-7400G
fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ :
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ , fx-7400G:ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ , CFX-9850Gﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ fx-9750GII, fx-7400GII, fx-9860G
ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ )'( ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ) . (πﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ.
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ*1 ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ*1
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ”ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ“(*1. ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ/ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ*113-10
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/
ﺍﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ*1 ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ*1ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .fx-7400G
uﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-9860Gﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ:
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ:
ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-9860G
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ X=cﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ =X
uﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ CFX-9850Gﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ:
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ:
ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ CFX-9850G
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ X=cﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ =X
• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ Xﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ Xﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ .ﻣﻨﺬ ،ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Xﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ
ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ، CFX-9850Gﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ OS 2.0ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ Xﻭ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻲ X
ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ، CFX-9850Gﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ
ﻳﻠﻲ :ﺃﺯﺭﻕ؛ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ؛ ﺳﻤﻴﻚ؛ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ؛ ﻣﻨﻘﻂ.
.5ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(CAPTﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻹﻧﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ“ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• )} ... 2(Captﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ({
• )} ... 1(Memﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ) FA-124ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ({
• *)} ... 3(Projﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ CASIO OHPﺍﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ CASIO
)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ({
13-11
• )} ... 4(Recvﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ) fx-9860GII Manager PLUSﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ({
* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GII
kﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ
)ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ (fx-7400GII
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ“ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ:
1(DataTrans) = 1(Mem), 2(ScreenCapt) = 2(Capt),
3(Projector) = 3(Proj), 4(ScreenRecv) = 4(Recv).
• ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ -ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ
kﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ FA-124ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GII
.2ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 6(CAPT)2(Capt
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(ScreenCaptﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ“ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ FA-124ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ.
.5ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ. !h(CAPTURE) .
.6ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
13-12
kﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ OHP
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII
ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ OHPﻓﻲ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ.
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ .OHP
• ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ“.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ3(Projector) .
.3ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ
.4ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ .OHP
.5ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .3
.6ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(CAPT)1(Memﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ OHPﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ OHPﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ . OHP
kﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
fx-9860GII Manager PLUS
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ fx-9860GII Manager PLUSﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ، fx-9860GII Manager PLUSﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USB
ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
• ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ“.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )4(ScreenRecv
.3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ.
.4ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.5ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .3
.6ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(CAPT)1(Memﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GII
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ CASIOﻭ ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
uﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ
ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
http://edu.casio.com/support/projector/
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻛﻴﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ YP-100ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ
ﻋﻮﺿﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
13-13
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .( YP-100
• ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ” ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ“.
.2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )3(Projector
uﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻭ .(YP-100
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ،ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ PRGM
ﹰ
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ،ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺭﺑﻄﻪ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺼﺤﺢ
ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ،ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ،USBﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻭ (YP-100ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ
ﺃﻋﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ .USB
13-14
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ
) SDHCﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
(fx-9860GII SD
ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .*SDHCﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ،
ﺗﺪﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ “SDﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .SDHC
* ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻴﺎﺭ USB 2ﻓﻘﻂ
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .SDHCﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ.
• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ.
• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺎ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ
ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﶈﻤﻲ ﺿﺪ
ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺴﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ .ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ
) ،CD-Rﻭ ،CD-RWﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(.
• ﺷﻌﺎﺭ SDHCﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .SD-3C, LLC
.1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SD
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD
• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ) ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ.
uﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﻤﻴﺔ
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،SDﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ “SDﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 14-2ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﻤﻴﺔ.
14-1
14
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SD
.1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ(.
.2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺧﻠﻒ
Back
ﺃﻣﺎﻡ
Front
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺑ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ،ﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ،ﻭ
ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
uﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SD
.1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ
• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ
.2ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ.
ﻫﺎﻡ!
• ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ .ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺪﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺴﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ . SD
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
14-2
.2ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SD
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (12-3ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD
.3ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ
ﻻﺧﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
• ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﰎ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ.
• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD
ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SD ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ FA-124ﺍﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
)ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ.
kﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ SD
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDHC
ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ 2 :ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ
ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ 32 :ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ
ﻫﺎﻡ!
ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ) ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻋﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ، SDﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﲟﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD
14-3
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ
.1ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ
Syntax
ERROR
Ma ERROR
ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ
• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ
•
• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ
ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ.
•
•
•
•
Go ERROR
ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ
1
2
ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﺧﻄﺄ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ) ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺼﻔﺮ ،ﺍﻟﺦ(.
ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ
ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ،ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ،ﺍﻟﺦ.
ﺍ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ Lbl nﻟـ Goto n
1ﺩﺧﻞ Lbl nﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻴﻄﺎﺑﻖ
ﺍﻟـ ،Goto nﺍﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ Goto nﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" ، Progﺍﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ " ﺍﺳﻢ
"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" . Prog
ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" Progﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
Nesting
ERROR
• ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ
10ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ.
Stack
ERROR
• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
Memory
ERROR
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ
ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
α-1
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ،ﺍﺣﺬﻑ
ﺍﻱ " ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" Progﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻭ
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ .ﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ
ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ 10
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ 26ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ.
ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﲔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ.
ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ
ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ.
ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ
α
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ
ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ
ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ
Argument
ERROR
• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺐ
ﳊﺠﺔ.
Dimension
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ • ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺍﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ERROR
Range
ERROR
1
2
3
4
Condition
ERROR
•
ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ 1 .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ.
ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
2ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ.
4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺼﻖ،
ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ.
ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ،ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ
ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ.
ﺗﺘﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ.
• ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ
Non-Real
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ
ERROR
ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﺍﳊﺠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﹰ.
• ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ
Complex
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
Number In List
ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
• ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ
Complex
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
Number In
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
Matrix
• ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ
Complex
ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ
Number In
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ
Matrix or
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
Vector
Complex
Number In
Data
Can’t Simplify
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺠﺔ
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﺸﻲﺀ
ﺍﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ
ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
)ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻟـ .CFX-9850 G
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ
• ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
'Simpﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ.
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) 'Simpﺻﻔﺤﺔ ,(2-21ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻟـ 3ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ .4/8
α-2
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ
!Can’t Solve
Adjust initial
ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ
ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
value or
bounds. Then
try again.
No Variable
1
2
Conversion
ERROR
•
•
ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ.
ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ
ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ.
ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻧﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻦ
ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ.
Com ERROR
•
Transmit
ERROR
• ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻧﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
•
Receive
ERROR
• ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﻴﺘﺮ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻧﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
•
Memory Full
• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ
ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ
ﻣﻦ 256ﺧﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-9750GII
ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ.
• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 7ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ
fx-9750GIIﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .6
•
Invalid Data
Size
Invalid Data
Number
α-3
•
•
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺧﻄﺄ
ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ،ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺧﻄﺄ
ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ،ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺧﻄﺄ
ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ،ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ
ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ
Time Out
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﻞ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ.
Circular
ERROR
• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﻧﺤﻮ "= "A1ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ
(A1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ،
ﻗﻢ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ
ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ tolﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ.
Please
Reconnect
• ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
Too Much
• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ.
Data
• Fragmentationﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻞ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ.
ERROR
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
Invalid Name
• ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ
ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ.
Storage
Memory Full
• ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ.
*No Card
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
•
*SD Card Full
• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ
Invalid Type
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺕ
Invalid file
ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ
name or folder
.SD
*name.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ
*Invalid Card
ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ.
• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ.
Card is
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SD
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ /ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ
ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ.
*protected
Data ERROR
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
* • Card ERRORﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD
Data is
*protected
• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ
* ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ fx-9860GII SD
α-4
• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭ
ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ
ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
.2ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
sinx
cosx
tanx
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ
(DEG) |x| < 9 × (109)°
(RAD) |x| < 5 × 107πrad
(GRA) |x| < 1 × 1010grad
sin–1x
cos–1x
|x| < 1
tan–1x
|x| < 1 × 10100
sinhx
coshx
|x| < 230.9516564
tanhx
|x| < 1 ×10100
sinh–1x
|x| < 1 × 10100
cosh–1x
1 < x < 1 × 10100
tanh–1x
|x| < 1
"
logx
Inx
10x
–1 × 10100 < x < 100
–1 × 10100
< x < 230.2585092
x
'
0 < x < 1 × 10100
x2
|x| < 1 × 1050
1/x
|x| < 1 × 10100, x ≠ 0
x
'
3
!x
nPr
nCr
|x| < 1 × 10100
0 < x < 69
) xﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ < 1 × 10100
)ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ rﻭ n, r (n
"
"
"
ﺩﻗﺔ
ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ،
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ±1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ*.
|x| ≠ 90(2n+1): DEG
|x| ≠ π/2(2n+1): RAD
|x| ≠ 100(2n+1): GRA
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻟـ :tanx
•
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
•
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
•
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
•
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
"
0 < r < n, n < 1 × 1010
)x2 + y2 < 1 × 10100 Pol (x, y
Rec
)(r ,θ
ﺭﻗﻢ 15
"
1 × 10–99 < x < 1 × 10100
ex
ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ
ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
|r| < 1 × 10100
(DEG) |θ | < 9 × (109)°
(RAD) |θ | < 5 × 107π rad
(GRA) |θ | < 1 × 1010grad
"
"
ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻟـ : tanθ
"
α-5
"
|θ | ≠ 90(2n+1): DEG
|θ | ≠ π/2(2n+1): RAD
|θ | ≠ 100(2n+1): GRA
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ
ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ
ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ
ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
|a|, b, c < 1 × 10100
”’ °
0 < b, c
⎯←
|x| < 1 × 10100
”’ °
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻲ:
|x| < 1 × 107
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
ﺩﻗﺔ
ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ،
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ±1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ*.
15ﺭﻗﻢ
x > 0:
< ylogx < 100
)^(xy
–1 × 10
100
x=0:y>0
m
–––– x < 0 : y = n,
2n+1
"
"
)ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ (m, n
ﻟﻜﻦ ؛
•
–1 × 10100 < y log |x| < 100
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
y>0:x≠0
–1 × 10100 < 1 logy < 100
y
'
x
x
y=0:x>0
n+1
––––y < 0 : x = 2n+1, 2
m
)ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ (m ≠ 0; m, n
"
"
•
ﻟﻜﻦ ؛
< 1 log |y| < 100
x
ab/c
100
–1 × 10
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ
10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ(.
"
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
"
* ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﻮ ±ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ) .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ ،ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻫﻮ ±ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ (.ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ
ﻷﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ) .ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺻﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ
' (xy), xﺍﻟﺦ(.
'y, x!, 3
x, nPr, nCr,
ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ،ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ.
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ،
ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﺳﺖ
ﻋﺸﺮﻱ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ:
DEC: –2147483648 < x < 2147483647
)ﺳﻠﺒﻲ( BIN: 1000000000000000 < x < 1111111111111111
)ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ 0 < x < 111111111111111 (0,
)ﺳﻠﺒﻲ( OCT: 20000000000 < x < 37777777777
)ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ 0 < x < 17777777777 (0,
)ﺳﻠﺒﻲ( HEX: 80000000 < x < FFFFFFFF
)ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ 0 < x < 7FFFFFFF (0,
α-6
E-CON2
Application
(English)
(fx-9750GII)
Contents
• All of the explanations provided here assume that you are already familiar
with the operating precautions, terminology, and operational procedures of
the calculator and the EA-200.
• Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all page references in this
“E-CON2 Application” chapter are to pages in this chapter.
1-1
E-CON2 Overview
1 E-CON2 Overview
• From the Main Menu, select E-CON2 to enter the E-CON2 Mode.
E-CON2 Main Menu
• The “E-CON2 Mode” provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data
sampling using the CASIO EA-200.
• 1(SET) ........ Displays a screen for setting up the EA-200.
• 2(MEM) ....... Displays a screen for saving EA-200 setup data under a file name.
• 3(PROG) ..... Performs program conversion.
• This function can be used to convert EA-200 setup data configured
using E-CON2 to an EA-200 control program (or EA-100 control
program) that can run on the fx-9860G SD/fx-9860G.
• It also can be used to convert data to a program that can be run on
a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series calculator.
• 4(STRT) ...... Starts data collection.
• 5(GRPH) ..... Graphs data sampled by the EA-200, and provides tools for analyzing
graphs. Graph Analysis tools include calculation of periodic frequency,
various types of regression, Fourier series calculation, and more.
• 6(HELP) ...... Displays E-CON2 help.
• Pressing the K key (Setup Preview) or a cursor key while the E-CON2 main menu is on
the screen displays a preview dialog box that shows the contents of the setup in the
current setup memory area.
To close the preview dialog box, press J.
Note
For details about setup data and the current setup memory area, see “6 Using Setup
Memory” (page 6-1).
About online help
Pressing the 6(HELP) key displays online help about the E-CON2 Mode.
2-1
Using the Setup Wizard
2 Using the Setup Wizard
This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the EA-200 setup quickly
and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear.
If you need more control over specific sampling parameters, you should consider using the
Advanced Setup procedure on page 3-1.
k Setup Wizard Parameters
Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three EA-200 basic sampling
parameters using an interactive wizard format.
• Sensor (Select Sensor):
Specify a CASIO or VERNIER* sensor from a menu of choices.
*Vernier Software & Technology
• Total Sampling Time:
Specify a value within the range of 0.01 second to 30 days.
• Sampling Time Unit (Select Unit):
Specify seconds (sec), minutes (min), hours (hour), or days (day) as the time unit of the
value you input for the total sampling time (Total Sampling Time).
Note
For some sensors (EA-200 built-in microphone, Vernier Photogate, etc.), sampling
parameters are different from those shown above. The differences between sampling
parameters and setup procedures for each sensor are described in this section.
Setup Wizard Rules
Note the following rules whenever you use the Setup Wizard.
• The EA-200 sampling channel is CH1 or SONIC.
• The trigger for a Setup Wizard setup is always the w key.
2-2
Using the Setup Wizard
u To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard
Before getting started...
• Before starting the procedure below, make sure you first decide if you want to start
sampling immediately using the setup you configure with Setup Wizard, or if you want to
store the setup for later sampling.
• See sections 6-1, 7-1, and 8-1 of this chapter (E-CON2 Application) for information about
procedures required to start sampling and to store a setup. We recommend that you read
through the entire procedure first, referencing the other sections and pages as noted,
before actually trying to perform it.
• To terminate Setup Wizard part way through and cancel the setup, press !J(QUIT).
1. Display the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1).
2. Press 1(SET) and then 1(WIZ).
• This launches the Setup Wizard and displays the “Select Sensor” screen.
3. Press 1 to specify a CASIO sensor or 2 to specify a Vernier sensor.
• Pressing either key will display the corresponding sensor list. The following shows the
sensor list that appears when you press 1.
4. Specify the sensor you want to use.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the sensor you want to use,
and then press w.
• If the sensor you specified has more than one option (more detailed specifications, such
as sampling unit, mode, etc.), an option list will appear on the display at this time. If this
happens, advance to step 5 (where you will see an example of the screen that appears
when you select 1 - [Temperature] in step 4).
2-3
Using the Setup Wizard
• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, skip to step 6.
5. Select the options for the sensor you specified in step 4.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the option you want to select,
and then press w.
• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, advance to step 6.
Important!
When special settings are required by the sensor and/or option you select, other screens
other than the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen will appear on the display. The
following shows where you should go to find information about the operations you need to
perform for each sensor/option selection.
If you select this sensor/option:
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT]
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only]
Go here for more information:
“Using Setup Wizard to Configure
Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling” on
page 2-5
[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate]
“To configure a setup for Photogate
alone” on page 2-6
[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley]
“To configure a setup for Photogate and
Smart Pulley” on page 2-7
[CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)]
“Outputting the Waveform of a Function
through the Speaker” on page 2-8
6. Use the number input keys to input the total sampling time. Just input a value.
In step 8 of this procedure, you will be able to specify the unit (seconds, minutes, hours,
days) of the value you input here.
Note
• With some sensors ([CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave], etc.) sampling time is
limited to a few seconds. The unit for such a sensor is always seconds, and so the
“Select Unit” screen does not appear.
• If you specify a total sampling time value in the range of 10 seconds to 23 hours, 59
minutes, 59 seconds, real-time graphing will be performed during sampling. This is the
same as selecting the Realtime Mode on the “Advanced Setup” screen.
2-4
Using the Setup Wizard
7. After inputting total sampling time value you want, press w. This displays the “Select
Unit” screen.
8. Use number keys b through e to specify the unit for the value you specified in step 6.
• This displays a confirmation screen like the one shown below.
9. If there is not problem with the contents of the confirmation screen, press 1.
If you need to change the setup, press 6 or J. This will return to step 6 (for setting
the total sampling interval), where you can change the setting.
• Pressing 1 will take you to the final Setup Wizard screen.
10. Press number keys described below to specify what you want to do with the setup you
have configured.
b(Start Setup) ............... Starts sampling using the setup (page 8-1)
c(Save Setup-MEM) ..... Saves the setup (page 6-1)
d(Convert Program) ...... Converts the setup to a program (page 7-1)
2-5
Using the Setup Wizard
k Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling
When you perform sound sampling executed the EA-200’s built-in microphone (by specifying
[CASIO] - [Microphone] as the sensor), Setup Wizard will provide you with three options:
[Sound wave], [Sound wave & FFT], and [FFT only]. “Sound wave” records the following two
dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical
axis). “FFT” records the following two dimensions: frequency (horizontal axis) and volume
(vertical axis).
The following shows the settings for recording FFT data.
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT] or
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only].
• This causes a “Select FFT Range” screen to appear.
• You can select one of four settings for FFT Range. The setting you select will
automatically apply the applicable fixed parameters shown below.
Parameter
Setting 2 - 1000 Hz:
1
Frequency pitch
Frequency max
Sampling interval
Number of samples
2 Hz
1000 Hz
61 μ sec
8192
4 - 2000 Hz:
2
6 - 3000 Hz:
3
8 - 4000 Hz:
4
4 Hz
2000 Hz
31 μ sec
8192
6 Hz
3000 Hz
20 μ sec
8192
8 Hz
4000 Hz
31 μ sec
4096
The following explains the meaning of each parameter.
Frequency pitch: Pitch in Hz at which sampling is performed
Frequency max: Upper limit of sampling frequency (lower limit is fixed at 0 Hz)
Sampling interval: Interval in μ seconds at which sampling is performed
Number of samples: Number of times sampling is performed
3. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select an FFT Range setting.
• Selecting an FFT Range causes the final Setup Wizard screen to appear.
4. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2
to finalize the procedure.
2-6
Using the Setup Wizard
k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a Photogate Setup
Connection of a Vernier Photogate requires configuration of setup parameters that are
slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors.
u To configure a setup for Photogate alone
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
• This displays a screen where you specify whether Photogate is connected to the CH1 or
SONIC channel.
3. Press 1 to specify CH1 or 2 to specify SONIC.
• This causes a “Gate Status” screen to appear.
• “Open” means the photo path is not blocked, while “Close” means the photo path is
blocked.
• The gate status defines what Photogate status should cause timing to start, and what
status should cause timing to stop.
Open-Open ...... Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes and
then opens again.
Open-Close ...... Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes.
Close-Open ...... Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens.
Close-Close ...... Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens and
then closes again.
2-7
Using the Setup Wizard
4. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select a Gate Status setting.
• Selecting a gate status causes a screen for specifying the number of samples to appear.
5. Input an integer in the range of 1 to 255 to specify the number of samples.
6. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2
to finalize the procedure.
u To configure a setup for Photogate and Smart Pulley
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley].
• This causes an “Input Distance(m)” screen to appear.
• The distance you specify here is the distance the weight travels after it is released.
• Input a value in the range of 0.1 to 4 to specify the distance in meters.
3. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2
to finalize the procedure.
2-8
Using the Setup Wizard
k Outputting the Waveform of a Function through the Speaker
Normally, the Setup Wizard helps you configure setups for sensors connected to the EA-200.
If you select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)] on the “Select Sensor” screen, however, it
configures the EA-200 to output the sound that corresponds to a function that you input and
graph on the calculator.
u To configure a setup for speaker output
1. Connect the data communication cable (SB-62) to the communication port of the
calculator and the MASTER port of the EA-200.
2. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
3. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)].
This displays a screen like the one shown below.
4. Press w to advance to the View Window setting screen.
• The following settings are configured automatically: Ymin = –1.5 and Ymax = 1.5. Do not
change these settings.
5. Press w or J to advance to the graph function list.
6. In line “Y1”, input the function of the waveform for the sound you want to input.
• Note that the angle unit is always radians.
• Input a function where the value of “Y” is within the range of –1.5 to +1.5.
2-9
Using the Setup Wizard
7. Press 6(DRAW) to graph the function.
• This graphs the function and displays a vertical cursor line as shown below. Use the
graph to specify the range that you want to output to the speaker.
8. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the start point of the output, and
then press w to register it.
9. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the end point of the output, and
then press w to register it.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.
/
10. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one octave,
input a value of 200%. To lower the original sound by one octave, input a value of 50%.
11. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200 speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
12. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
13. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown below.
2-10
Using the Setup Wizard
14. Perform one of the following operations, depending on what you want to do.
To change the output frequency and try again:
Press 1(Yes) to return to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. Next, repeat the above
steps from step 10.
To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again:
Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 7. Next, repeat the above steps from
step 8.
To change the function:
Press 6(No) and then J to return to the graph function list in step 6. Next, repeat the
above steps from step 6.
To exit the procedure and return to the E-CON2 main menu:
Press 6(No) and then press J twice.
3-1
Using Advanced Setup
3 Using Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can
adjust to configure the EA-200 setup that suits your particular needs.
The procedures in this section provide the general steps you should perform when using
Advanced Setup to configure an EA-200 setup, and to returns setup settings to their initial
default values. You can find details about individual settings and the options that are
available with each setting are provided by the explanations that start on page 3-3.
k Advanced Setup Operations
u To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup
The following procedure describes the general steps for using Advanced Setup. Refer to the
pages as noted for more information.
1. Display the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1).
2. Press 1(SET). This displays the “Setup EA-200” submenu.
3. Press 2(ADV). This displays the Advanced Setup menu.
Advanced Setup Menu
4. If you want to configure a custom probe at this point, press f(Custom Probe). Next,
follow the steps under “To configure a custom probe setup” on page 4-1.
• You can also configure a custom probe during the procedure under “To configure Channel
Setup settings” on page 3-3.
• Custom probe configurations you have stored in memory can be selected using Channel
in step 5, below.
5. Use the Advanced Setup function keys described below to set other parameters.
• b(Channel) .... Displays a screen that shows the sensors that are currently
assigned to each channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic). You can
also use this dialog to change sensor assignments. See “Channel
Setup” on page 3-3 for more information.
• c(Sample) ..... Displays a screen for selecting the sampling mode, and for
specifying the sampling interval, the number of samples, and the
warm-up mode. When “Fast” is selected for “Mode”, this dialog box
also displays a setting for turning FFT (frequency characteristics)
graphing on and off. See “Sample Setup” on page 3-5 for more
information.
3-2
Using Advanced Setup
• d(Trigger) ...... Displays a screen for configuring sampling start (trigger) conditions.
See “Trigger Setup” on page 3-8 for more information.
• e(Graph) ....... Displays a screen for configuring graph settings. See “Graph Setup”
on page 3-13 for more information.
• You can return the settings on the above setup screens (b through e) using the
procedure described under “To return setup parameters to their initial defaults”.
6. After you configure a setup, you can use the function key operations described below to
start sampling or perform other operations.
• 1(STRT) ...... Starts sampling using the setup (page 8-1).
• 2(MLTI) ....... Starts MULTIMETER Mode sampling using the setup (page 5-1).
• 3(MEM) ....... Saves the setup (page 6-1).
• 4(PROG) ..... Converts the setup to a program (page 7-1).
• 5(GRPH) ..... Graphs data sampled by the EA-200, and provides tools for analyzing
graphs (page 10-1).
• 6(ABT) ........ Displays version information about the EA-200 unit that is currently
connected to the calculator.
u To return setup parameters to their initial defaults
Perform the following procedure when you want to return the parameters of the setup in the
current setup memory area to their initial defaults.
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press g(Initialize).
2. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to initialize the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without initializing the setup, press 6(No).
3-3
Using Advanced Setup
k Channel Setup
The Channel Setup screen shows the sensors that are currently assigned to each channel
(CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic).
u To configure Channel Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press b(Channel).
• This displays the Channel Setup screen.
Currently selected channel
Channel Setup Screen
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the channel whose setting
you want to change.
3. What you need to do next depends on the currently selected channel.
• CH1, CH2, or CH3
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to the selected
channel.
1(CASIO) ...... Displays a menu of CASIO sensors.
2(VRNR) ....... Displays a menu of Vernier sensors.
3(CSTM) ....... Displays a menu of custom probes.
4(None) ......... Press this key when you want leave the channel without any sensor
assigned to it.
• SONIC Channel
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to this channel.
1(CASIO) ...... Displays a menu of CASIO sensors, but only “Motion” can be
selected.
2(VRNR) ....... Displays a menu of Vernier sensors. You can select “Motion” or
“Photogate”.
Note
• On the menu that appears after you select “Motion” from either the CASIO or
Vernier sensor menu, select either “meters” or “feet” as the sampling unit.
• After selecting “Motion” from either the CASIO or Vernier sensor menu, you can
press the K key to toggle “smoothing (correction of measurement error)” on
(“-Smooth” displayed) and off (“-Smooth” not displayed).
3-4
Using Advanced Setup
• From the menu that appears after you select “Photogate” as the sensor, select
[Gate] or [Pulley].
[Gate] ............... Select this option when using the Photogate sensor alone.
[Pulley] ............. Select this option when using the Photogate sensor along with a
smart pulley.
4(None) ......... Select this option to disable the SONIC channel.
• Mic Channel
For this channel, the sensor is automatically set to Built-in (External) Microphone.
However, you need to configure the settings described below.
1(Snd) ........... Select this option to record elapsed time and volume 2-dimensional
sampled sound data (elapsed time on the horizontal axis, volume on
the vertical axis).
2(FFT) ........... Select this option to record frequency and volume 2-dimensional
sampled sound data (frequency on the horizontal axis, volume on the
vertical axis).
4(None) ......... Select this option to disable the Mic channel.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as necessary to configure all the channels you want.
5. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.
Note
• When you select a channel on the Channel Setup screen, the sampling range of the
selected channel appears in the bottom line of the screen.
In the above example, the range of the temperature sensor assigned to CH2 appears on the
display.
If the sampling range value is too long to fit on the display, only the part of the value that fits
on the display will be shown.
• Whenever the current Sample Setup (page 3-5) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings
become incompatible due to a change in Channel Setup settings, these settings revert
automatically to their initial defaults. Selecting the Mic channel with Channel Setup while
the Sample Setup has “Extended” selected for the sampling mode, for example, will cause
the sampling mode to change automatically to “Fast” (which is the initial default setting
when the Mic channel is selected). For information about the channels that can be selected
for each sampling mode, see “Sample Setup” (page 3-5).
3-5
Using Advanced Setup
k Sample Setup
The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling.
u To configure Sample Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press c(Sample).
• This displays the Sample Setup screen, with the “Mode” line highlighted, which indicates
that you can select the sampling mode.
2. Select the sampling mode that suits the type of sampling you want to perform.
To do this:
Press this
key:
To select
this mode:
Graph data in real-time as it is sampled
1(R-T)
Realtime
Perform sampling of high-speed phenomena (sound, etc.) 2(Fast)
Perform sampling over a long time (weather, etc.)
• The EA-200 enters a power off sleep state while standing 4(Extd)
by.
Fast
Extended
Sample sound using the EA-200’s built-in microphone
6(g)
1(Snd)
Sound
Record the time of the occurrence of a particular trigger
event as an absolute value starting from 0, which is the
sampling start time
6(g)
2(Clck)
Clock
Perform periodic sampling, from a start trigger event to an
end trigger event
6(g)
3(Priod)
Period
Perform sampling other than that described above
3(Norm)
Normal
• Note that the mode you select also determines the channel(s) you can use.
Sampling mode:
Realtime, Extended, Normal
Selectable Channel(s)
CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC
Fast
Sound
CH1, Mic
Mic
Clock, Period
CH1
3-6
Using Advanced Setup
3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval.
• The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting.
If this sampling mode is selected:
Realtime
This is the allowable setting range:
0.2 to 299 sec
Fast
Extended
20 to 500 μsec
5 to 240 min
Period
Sound
“=Trigger” only (no value input required)
20 to 27 μsec
Clock
Normal
“=Trigger” only (no value input required)
0.0005 to 299 sec
4. To change the number of samples setting, move the highlighting to “Number”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the number of samples.
• The total sampling time shown at the bottom of the dialog box is calculated by multiplying the “Sampling Interval” value you specified in step 3 by the number of samples you
specify here.
Important!
• When all of the following conditions exist, a “Distance” setting appears in place of the
“Number” setting. See “To configure the Distance setting” (page 3-7) for information
about configuring the “Distance” setting.
• Channel Setup (page 3-3): 2(VRNR) - [Photogate] - [Pulley]
• Sampling Mode (page 3-5): Clock
5. To change the warm-up time setting, move the highlighting to “Warm-up”. Next, perform
one of the function key operations described below.
Note
• The “Warm-up” setting will not be displayed on the Sample Setup screen if “Fast”,
“Sound” or “Extended” is currently selected as the sampling mode.
Important!
To do this:
Press this key:
Have the warm-up time for each sensor set automatically
1 (Auto)
Input a warm-up time, in seconds, manually
2 (Man)
Disable the warm-up time
3 (None)
• When the following condition exists, an “FFT Graph” setting appears in place of the
“Warm-up” setting. See “To configure the FFT Graph setting” (page 3-7) for information
about configuring the “FFT Graph” setting.
• Sampling Mode (page 3-5): Fast
3-7
Using Advanced Setup
6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.
Note
• Whenever the current Channel Setup (page 3-3) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings
become incompatible due to a change in Sample Setup settings, these settings revert
automatically to their initial defaults. Selecting “Realtime” as the sampling mode with
Sample Setup while the Mic channel is selected with Channel Setup and the Trigger
Setup has “Mic” selected for “Source”, for example, will cancel the Channel Setup Mic
channel selection and change the Trigger Setup “Source” setting to “[EXE] key”.
For information about the channels that can be selected for each sampling mode, see
step 2 of “To configure Sample Setup settings”. For information about the trigger sources
that can be selected for each sampling mode, see “Trigger Setup” (page 3-8).
u To configure the Distance setting
In place of step 3 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for specifying the distance the weight travels in meters.
• Specify a value in the range of 0.1 to 4 meters.
u To configure the FFT Graph setting
In place of step 5 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for turning frequency characteristic graphing (FFT Graph) on and off.
To do this:
Turn on graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling
Press this key:
1(On)
Turn off graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling
2(Off)
3-8
Using Advanced Setup
k Trigger Setup
You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w
key operation, etc.) The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”,
which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen.
The following table describes each of the six available trigger sources.
To start sampling when this happens:
When the w key is pressed
Select this trigger source:
[EXE] key
After the specified number of seconds are counted down
Count Down
When input at CH1 reaches a specified value
CH1
When input at the SONIC channel reaches a specified value
SONIC
When the EA-200’s built-in microphone detects sound
Mic
When the EA-200’s [START/STOP] key is pressed
[START] key
Note
The trigger sources you can select depends on the sampling mode selected with the Sample
Setup (page 3-5).
For this sampling mode:
The following trigger source(s) can be selected:
Realtime
[EXE] key, Count Down
Fast
[EXE] key, Count Down, CH1, Mic
Normal
[EXE] key, Count Down, CH1, SONIC, [START] key
Extended
[EXE] key
Sound
[EXE] key, Count Down, Mic
Clock
CH1
Period
CH1
3-9
Using Advanced Setup
u To configure Trigger Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press d(Trigger).
• This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the “Source” line highlighted.
• The function menu items that appears in the menu bar depend on the sampling mode
selected with Sample Setup (page 3-5). The above screen shows the function menu
when “Normal” is selected as the sample sampling mode.
2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
• The following shows the trigger sources that can be selected for each sampling mode.
Sampling Mode
Trigger Source
Realtime
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down
Fast
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down, 3(CH1),
5(Mic)
Normal
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down, 3(CH1),
4(Sonic), 5(STR) : [START] key
Sound
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down, 5(Mic)
• The trigger source is always “[EXE] key” when the sampling mode is “Extended”, and
“CH1” when the sampling mode is “Clock” or “Period”.
3-10
Using Advanced Setup
3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was
selected in step 2.
If this is the trigger
source:
Do this next:
[EXE] key
Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.
Count Down
Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the
countdown start time” below.
CH1
Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction.
See “To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge
type”, “To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and
trigger end edge settings” on page 3-11 or “To configure
Photogate trigger start and end settings” on page 3-12.
SONIC
Specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level.
See “To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor
level” on page 3-12.
Mic
Specify microphone sensitivity. See “To specify microphone
sensitivity” below.
[START] key
Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.
u To specify the countdown start time
1. Move the highlighting to “Timer”.
2. Press 1(Time) to display a dialog box for specifying the countdown start time.
3. Input a value in seconds from 1 to 10.
4. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
u To specify microphone sensitivity
1. Move the highlighting to “Sense” and then press one of the function keys describe below.
To select this level of microphone sensitivity:
Low
Press this key:
1(Low)
Medium
2(Mid)
High
3(High)
2. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
3-11
Using Advanced Setup
u To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type
Perform the following steps when “Fast”, “Normal”, or “Clock” is specified as the sampling
mode (page 3-5).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
Sensor assigned to CH1 or SONIC by Channel Setup
(page 3-3)
Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Edge”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Press this key:
Falling
1(Fall)
Rising
2(Rise)
6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
u To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and trigger end edge settings
Perform the following steps when “Period” is specified as the sampling mode (page 3-5).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want.
4. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Falling
Press this key:
1(Fall)
Rising
2(Rise)
6. Move the highlighting to “End Edge”.
7. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Falling
Press this key:
1(Fall)
Rising
2(Rise)
8. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
3-12
Using Advanced Setup
u To configure Photogate trigger start and end settings
Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source.
1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
2. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this Photogate status:
Photogate closed
Press this key:
1(Close)
Photogate open
2(Open)
3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”.
4. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this Photogate status:
Photogate closed
Press this key:
1(Close)
Photogate open
2(Open)
5. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
u To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Level”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of level:
Below
Press this key:
1(Blw)
Above
2(Abv)
6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
3-13
Using Advanced Setup
k Graph Setup
Use the Graph Setup screen to configure settings for the graph produced after sampling is
complete. You use the Sample Setup settings (page 3-5) to turn graphing on or off.
u To configure Graph Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press e(Graph).
• This displays the Graph Setup screen.
Currently selected item
Graph Setup Screen
2. To change the graph source data name display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Graph Func”. Next, press one of the function keys described
below.
To specify this graph source data name display setting:
Display source data name
Press this key:
1(On)
Hide source data name
2(Off)
• When the graph data is stored in a sample data memory file, the file name appears as
the source data name. When the graph data is stored in current data area, the channel
name appears.
Note
• For details about sample data memory and current data area, see “9 Using Sample Data
Memory”.
3. To change the trace operation coordinate display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Coord”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this coordinate display setting for the trace operation:
Display trace coordinates
Press this key:
1(On)
Hide trace coordinates
2(Off)
4. To change the numeric axes display setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “Econ Axes”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this axes display setting:
Display axes
Press this key:
1(On)
Hide axes
2(Off)
3-14
Using Advanced Setup
5. To change the real-time scroll setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “RealScroll”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this real-time scrolling setting:
Real-time scrolling on
Press this key:
1(On)
Real-time scrolling off
2(Off)
6. Press w to finalize Graph Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
4-1
Using a Custom Probe
4 Using a Custom Probe
You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with the EA200. The term “custom probe” means any sensor other than the CASIO or Vernier sensors
specified as standard for the E-CON2 Mode.
k Configuring a Custom Probe Setup
To configure a custom probe setup, you must input values for the constants of the fixed
linear interpolation formula (ax + b). The required constants are slope (a) and intercept (b). x
in the above expression (ax + b) is the sampled voltage value (sampling range: 0 to 5 volts).
u To configure a custom probe setup
1. From the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 1(SET) and then c(ADV) to display
the Advanced Setup menu.
• See “3 Using Advanced Setup” for more information.
2. On the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), press f(Custom Probe) to display the Custom
Probe List.
• The message “No Custom Probe” appears if the Custom Probe List is empty.
3. Press 2(NEW).
• This displays a custom probe setup screen like the one shown below.
• The initial default setting for the probe name is “Voltage(6pin)”. The first step for
configuring custom probe settings is to change this name to another one. If you want to
leave the default name the way it is, skip steps 4 and 5.
4. Press 1(EDIT).
• This enters the probe name editing mode.
5. Input up to 18 characters for the custom probe name, and then press E.
• This will cause the highlighting to move to “Slope”.
4-2
Using a Custom Probe
6. Use the function keys described below to configure the custom probe setup.
• To change the setting of an item, first use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to the item. Next, use the function keys to select the setting you want.
(1) Slope
Press 1(EDIT) to input the slope for the linear interpolation formula.
(2) Intercept
Press 1(EDIT) to input the intercept for the linear interpolation formula.
(3) Unit Name
Press 1(EDIT) to input up to eight characters for the unit name.
(4) Warm-up
Press 1(EDIT) to input the warm-up time.
7. Press wand then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the Custom Probe List, which should
now contain the new custom probe setup you configured.
u To recall the specifications of a Vernier sensor and configure custom
probe settings
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup” on
page 4-1.
2. Press 5(VRNR).
• This displays a Vernier sensor list.
3. Use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to the Vernier sensor whose setting
you want to use as the basis of the custom probe settings, and then press w.
• The name and specifications of the Vernier sensor you select will appear on the custom
probe setup screen.
• To complete this procedure, perform steps 4 through 7 under “To configure a custom
probe setup” (page 4-1).
4-3
Using a Custom Probe
k Auto Calibrating a Custom Probe
Auto calibration automatically corrects the slope and intercept values of a custom probe
setup based on two actual samples.
Important!
• Before performing the procedure below, you should prepare two conditions whose
measurement values are known.
• When inputting reference value in step 5 of the procedure below, input the exact known
measurement value of the condition you will sample in step 4. When inputting reference
value in step 7 of the procedure below, input the exact known measurement value of the
condition you will sample in step 6.
u To auto calibrate a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the custom probe you want to auto
calibrate to CH1 of the EA-200.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
calibration, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page 4-1.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the slope and intercept, so you do not need to
specify them in step 6 of the above procedure.
If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure under “To edit a custom probe setup” on
page 4-6.
3. Press 2(CALIB).
• This will start the first sampling operation with the sensor connected to EA-200’s CH1,
and then display a screen like the one shown below.
First sampling operation
Real-time display of sampled values
4-4
Using a Custom Probe
4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the
cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.
5. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the first sampled value, and then press
w.
• This cause sampling of the second value to be performed automatically, and display the
same type of screen that appeared in step 3.
Second sampling operation
6. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the second sampled value and display it on the screen. The cursor will
appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.
7. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the second sampled value, and then
press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-CON2 will calculate the slope and intercept value based on the two reference
values that you input, and configure the settings automatically. The automatically
configured values will appear on the custom probe setup screen, where you can view
them.
4-5
Using a Custom Probe
8. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.
k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe
This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual
sample using the applicable custom probe.
u To zero adjust a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the custom probe you want to zero
adjust to CH1 of the EA-200.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
zero adjusting, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page 4-1.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the intercept, so you do not need to specify it in step
6 of the above procedure.
If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure under “To edit a custom probe setup” on
page 4-6.
3. Press 3(ZERO).
• This will start the sampling operation with the sensor connected to EA-200’s CH1, and
then display a screen like the one shown below.
4-6
Using a Custom Probe
4. At the point your want to perform zero adjustment (the point that the displayed value is
the appropriate zero adjust value), press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-CON2 will set the intercept value automatically based on the sampled value. The
automatically configured value will appear on the custom probe setup screen, where you
can view it.
5. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.
k Managing Custom Probe Setups
Use the procedures in this section to edit and delete existing custom probe setups.
u To edit a custom probe setup
1. Display the Custom Probe List.
2. Select the custom probe setup whose configuration you want to edit.
• Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the custom probe you want.
3. Press 3(EDIT).
• This displays the screen for configuring a custom probe setup.
• To edit the custom probe setup, perform the procedure starting from step 6 under “To
configure a custom probe setup” on page 4-1.
u To delete a custom probe setup
1. Display the Custom Probe List.
2. Select the custom probe setup you want to delete.
• Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the custom probe setup you
want.
3. Press 4(DEL).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the
custom probe setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No).
5-1
Using the MULTIMETER Mode
5 Using the MULTIMETER Mode
You can use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure a channel so that EA-200
MULTIMETER Mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation.
u To use the MULTIMETER Mode
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the sensors you want to the applicable
EA-200 channels.
2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to
configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using.
3. After configuring the sensor setups, press w to return to the Advanced Setup menu
(page 3-1), and then press 2(MLTI).
• This starts sampling in the EA-200 MULTIMETER mode and displays a list of sample
values for each channel.
• Displayed sample data is refreshed at 0.5-second intervals.
• Do not connect sensors to any other channels except for those you specified in step 2.
• Data sampled in the MULTIMETER mode is not saved in memory.
4. To end MULTIMETER mode sampling, press the w key.
6-1
Using Setup Memory
6 Using Setup Memory
Creating EA-200 setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the data to
be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup
memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data.
You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator
memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.
k Saving a Setup
A setup can be saved when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard
See step 8 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup
See step 6 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup” on page 3-1 for
more information.
• While the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display
Performing the setup save operation while the E-CON2 main menu is on the display saves
the contents of the current setup memory area (which were configured using Setup Wizard
or Advanced Setup).
Details on saving a setup are listed below.
u To save a setup
1. If the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4) is on the display, advance to step 2. If it isn’t,
start the save operation by performing one of the function key operations described
below.
✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 3(MEM).
✔ If the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 2(MEM).
• Performing any one of the above operations causes the setup memory list to appear.
• The message “No Setup-MEM” appears if setup memory is empty.
6-2
Using Setup Memory
2. If you are starting from the final Setup Wizard screen, press c(Save Setup-MEM).
If you are starting from another screen, press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.
3. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name.
4. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• If you start from the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4), this saves the setup and the
message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the final Setup Wizard screen
(page 2-4).
• If you start from the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) or the E-CON2 main menu (page
1-1), this saves the setup and returns to the setup memory list which includes the name
you assigned it.
Important!
• Since you assign both a setup name and a file number to each setup, you can assign
the same name to multiple setups, if you want.
k Using and Managing Setups in Setup Memory
All of the setups you save are shown in the setup memory list. After selecting a setup in the
list, you can use it to sample data or you can edit it.
u To preview saved setup data
You can use the following procedure to check the contents of a setup before you use it for
sampling.
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press K(Setup Preview).
• This displays the preview dialog box.
4. To close the preview dialog box, press J.
6-3
Using Setup Memory
u To recall a setup and use it for sampling
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200.
1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200.
2. Turn on EA-200 power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate EA-200 channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
5. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
6. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
7. Press 1(STRT).
8. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1.
• Pressing w sets up the EA-200 and then starts sampling.
• To clear the confirmation message without sampling, press 6.
Note
• See “Operations during a sampling operation” on page 8-2 for information about
operations you can perform while a sampling operation is in progress.
u To change the name of setup data
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 3(REN).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.
4. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name, and then press w.
• This changes the setup name and returns to the setup memory list.
6-4
Using Setup Memory
u To delete setup data
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 4(DEL).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No).
u To recall setup data
Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area. You can then use Advanced
Setup to edit the setup. This capability comes in handy when you need to perform a setup
that is slightly different from one you have stored in memory.
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 5(LOAD).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to recall the setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without recalling the setup, press 6(No).
Note
• Recalling setup data replaces any other data currently in the current setup memory area.
7-1
Using Program Converter
7 Using Program Converter
Program Converter converts an EA-200 setup you configured using Setup Wizard or
Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program
Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2
*1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information
about how to use a converted program.
2
* See online help (PROGRAM CONVERTER HELP) for information about supported CFX9850 Series and fx-7400 Series models.
k Converting a Setup to a Program
A setup can be converted to a program when any one of the following conditions exists.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard
See step 8 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup
See step 6 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup” on page 3-1 for
more information.
• While the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display
Performing the program converter operation while the E-CON2 main menu is on the
display converts the contents of the current setup memory area (which were configured
using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup).
The program converter procedure is identical in all of the above cases.
u To convert a setup to a program
1. Start the converter operation by performing one of the key operations described below.
✔ If the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4) is on the display, press d(Convert Program).
✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 4(PROG).
✔ If the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 3(PROG).
• After you perform any one of the above operations, the program converter screen will
appear on the display.
7-2
Using Program Converter
2. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
Note
Using the program converter initial default settings will create a program like the one
below.
• Associated Scientific Calculator: fx-9860 Series
• Associated Data Logger: EA-200
• Calibration: None
• Password: None
If you want to use these settings the way they are without changing them, skip steps 3
through 7 and go directly to step 8. If you want to change any of the settings, perform the
applicable operations in steps 3 through 7.
3. Specify the scientific calculator model to be associated with the program. Perform one of
the following key operations to associate the program with a scientific calculator.
To associate the program with this calculator:
Perform this key operation:
fx-9860 Series
1(CALC) 1(9860)
CFX-9850 Series
1(CALC) 2(9850)
fx-7400 Series
1(CALC) 3(7400)
• The number part of the scientific calculator model number you specify will appear in line
“F1:” of the program converter screen.
Note
For information about 1(CALC)4(→38K), see “Converting a CFX-9850 Series
Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible Program” (page 7-4).
4. Specify the Data Logger model (EA-100 or EA-200) to be associated with the program.
Perform one of the following key operations to associate the program with a Data Logger.
To associate the program with this Data Logger:
EA-200
Perform this key operation:
2(TYPE) 1(200)
EA-100
2(TYPE) 2(100)
• The number part of the Data Logger model number you specify will appear in line “F2:”
of the program converter screen.
Important!
• Note that the capabilities of the EA-100 and EA-200 are different. Because of this, you
should keep in mind that an EA-200 program converted to an EA-100 program and used
to perform sampling with an EA-100 setup may not produce the desired results.
7-3
Using Program Converter
5. If you plan to use a custom probe connected to CH1 of the Data Logger, specify whether
calibration or zero adjust should be performed. Perform one of the following key
operations to configure the desired setting.
To perform this operation:
Perform this key operation:
Calibration of the CH1 custom probe
3(CALB) 1(CALIB)
Zero adjust of the CH1 custom probe
3(CALB) 2(ZERO)
No calibration
3(CALB) 3(None)
• The operation you specify will appear in line “F3:” of the program converter screen.
6. To password protect the program, press 4(
).
• This will cause the “Password?” prompt and password input field to appear under the
program name input field.
7. Enter up to eight characters for the password.
• If you change your mind about assigning a password, press J here. This will cause
the password input field to disappear and cancel password input.
8. After everything is the way you want, press w to convert the program in accordance
with the setup.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message
and return to the screen that was on the display in step 1, press w or J.
7-4
Using Program Converter
k Converting a CFX-9850 Series Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible
Program
To use an EA-200 control program created on the CFX-9850 Series calculator (for use on
the CFX-9850) on the E-CON2, you need to convert the program to an fx-9860 program.
Conversion can be performed using the program converter.
EA-200 Control Program for
CFX-9850 Series
Convert
EA-200 Control Program for
fx-9860 Series
u To convert a program
1. Transfer the EA-200 control program created for the CFX-9850 Series to the fx-9860
main memory.
• Use the cable that comes bundled with the fx-9860 to connect its 3-pin serial port to the
3-pin serial port of the CFX-9850. For details, see “Chapter 13 Data Communications”.
2. Perform step 1 under “To convert a setup to a program” on page 7-1, which displays the
program converter screen.
3. Press 1(CALC) and then press 4(→38K).
• This displays a list of programs currently in main memory.
4. Use f and c to move the highlighting of the program you want to convert, and then
press 1(EXE) or w.
• A program name input screen will appear after conversion is complete.
7-5
Using Program Converter
5. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
• If you want to password protect the program, perform steps 6 and 7 under “To convert a
setup to a program” after inputting the program name.
6. Press w to start conversion of the program.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message,
press w or J.
8-1
Starting a Sampling Operation
8 Starting a Sampling Operation
The section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON2 Mode to start an
EA-200 sampling operation.
k Before getting started...
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200.
1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200.
2. Turn on EA-200 power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate EA-200 channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
k Starting a Sampling Operation
A sampling operation can be started when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard
See step 8 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup
See step 6 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup” on page 3-1.
• While the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display
Starting a sampling operation while the E-CON2 main menu is on the display performs
sampling using the contents of the current setup memory area (which were configured
using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup).
• While the setup memory list is on the display
You can select the setup you want on the setup memory list and then start sampling.
The following procedures explain the first three conditions described above. See “To recall a
setup and use it for sampling” on page 6-3 for information about starting sampling from the
setup memory list.
8-2
Starting a Sampling Operation
u To start sampling
1. Start the sampling operation by performing one of the function key operations described
below.
✔ If the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4) is on the display, press b(Start Setup).
✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 1(STRT).
✔ If the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 4(STRT).
• After you perform any one of the above operations, a sampling start confirmation screen
like the one shown below will appear on the display.
2. Press w.
• This sets up the EA-200 using the setup data in the current setup memory area.
• The message “Setting EA-200...” remains on the display while EA-200 setup is in
progress. You can cancel the setup operation any time this message is displayed by
pressing A.
• The screen shown below appears after EA-200 setup is complete.
3. Press w to start sampling.
• The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete
depend on setup details (sampling mode, trigger setup, etc.). For details, see
“Operations during a sampling operation” below.
u Operations during a sampling operation
Sending a sample start command from the calculator to the EA-200 causes the following
sequence to be performed.
Setup Data Transfer → Sampling Start → Sampling End →
Transfer of Sample Data from the EA-200 to the Calculator
The table on the next page shows how the trigger conditions and sensor type specified in the
setup data affects the above sequence.
Clock
Period
Extended
Sound
Normal
Fast
Real-time
Mode
1. EA-200 Setup
Starts Sampling
2. Start Standby
Pressing 1 advances to
“4. Graphing”.
Pressing w there returns to
“3. Sampling”.
• The screen shown below appears when CH1,
SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger.
3. Sampling
1
Outputting through
speaker
w
Sample values is stored as List
data only.
The following three graph types
can be produced when Photogate-Pulley is being used.
1. Time and distance graph
2. Time and velocity graph
• When Number of Samples > 1 3. Time and acceleration graph
• When Number of Samples = 1
w
Input values.
w
w
• When Mode = Sound
Graph screen does not show all sampled values,
but only a partial preview.
Sampled values are saved as
Current Sample Data.
4. Graphing
8-3
Starting a Sampling Operation
9-1
Using Sample Data Memory
9 Using Sample Data Memory
Performing an EA-200 sampling operation from the E-CON2 Mode causes sampled results
to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON2 memory. Separate data is saved for each
channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s
“current data”.
Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is
replaced by the newly sampled data. If you want to save a set of current data and keep it
from being replaced by a new sampling operation, save the data in sample data memory
under a different file name.
k Managing Sample Data Files
u To save current sample data to a file
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
Graph Mode Screen
• For details about the Graph Mode screen, see “10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to
Graph Data”.
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
List of current data files
“cd” stands for “current data”. The
text on the right side of the colon
indicates the channel name.
Sampling Data List Screen
9-2
Using Sample Data Memory
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want
to save, and then press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting a data name.
4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number.
5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
The sample data file you save is indicated
on the display using the format:
:.
• If you specify a memory number that is already being used to store a data file, a
confirmation message appears asking if you want to replace the existing file with the
new data file. Press 1 to replace the existing data file, or 6 to return to the memory
number input dialog box in Step 4.
6. To return to the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press J twice.
Note
• You could select another data file besides a current data file in step 3 of the above
procedure and save it under a different memory number. You do not need to change the
file’s name as long as you use a different file number.
9-3
Using Sample Data Memory
u To rename an existing sample data file
Note
• You cannot use this procedure to rename a current data file name.
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to
rename, and then press 3(REN).
• This displays the screen for inputting a file name.
4. Enter up to 18 characters for the new data file name, and then tap w.
• This returns to the Sampling Data List screen.
5. To return to the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press J twice.
u To delete a sample data file
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to
delete, and then press 4(DEL).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the data
file.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting the data file, press 6(No).
• This returns to the Sampling Data List screen.
5. To return to the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press J twice.
10-1
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data.
k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools
You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
u Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the Graph Mode screen, which is
displayed by pressing 5(GRPH) on the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1)
Graph Mode Screen
• The main menu appears after you perform a sampling operation. Press 5(GRPH) at
that time.
• When you access Graph Analysis tools using this method, you can select from among a
variety of other Analysis modes. See “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph”
(page 10-2) for more information about the other Analysis modes.
u Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the screen of a graph drawn after a
sampling operation is executed from the Setup Wizard or from Advanced
Setup (Realtime Mode)
Graph Screen
• In this case, data is graphed after the sampling operation is complete, and the calculator
accesses Graph Analysis tools automatically. See “Graph Screen Key Operations” on
page 11-1.
10-2
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph
This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis
mode to drawing a graph.
Note
• Step 4 through step 6 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any
step automatically applies the initial default values for its settings.
• If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the
top line of the Graph Mode screen.
u To select an analysis mode and draw a graph
1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 3(MODE), and then select the analysis mode you want from the menu that
appears.
To do this:
Perform this menu
operation:
To select this
mode:
Graph three sets of sampled data
simultaneously
[Norm]
Graph Analysis
Graph sampled data along with its first and
second derivative graph
[diff]
d/dt & d2/dt2
Display the graphs of different sampled data in
[CMPR]/[GRPH]
upper and lower windows for comparison
Compare Graph
Output sampled data from the speaker,
displaying graph of the raw data in the upper
window and the output waveform in the lower
window
Compare Sound
[CMPR]/[Snd]
Display the graph of sampled data in the upper
window and its first derivative graph in the
[CMPR]/[d/dt]
lower window
Compare d/dt
Display the graph of sampled data in the upper
window and its second derivative graph in the [CMPR]/[d2/dt2]
lower window
Compare d2/dt2
• The name of the currently selected mode appears in the top line of the Graph Mode
screen.
Analysis mode name
3. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
10-3
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
4. Specify the sampled data for graphing.
a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled
data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASGN) or w.
• This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file
you selected.
Sample data file name
Graph on/off indicator
Name of sensor used for sampling
Graph Mode Screen
b. Repeat step a above to specify sample data files for other graphs, if there are any.
• If you select “Graph Analysis” as the analysis mode in step 2, you must specify sample
data files for three graphs. If you select “Compare Graph” as the analysis mode in step
2, you must specify sample data files for two graphs. With other modes, you need to
specify only one sample data file.
• For details about Sampling Data List screen operations, see “9 Using Sample Data Memory”.
5. Turn on graphing for each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to select a graph, and then
press 1(SEL) to toggle graphing on or off.
Graphing turned off.
Graphing turned on.
b. Repeat step a to turn each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen on or off.
6. Select the graph style you want to use.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to
the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose style you want to specify, and then press 4(STYL).
This will cause the function menu to change as shown below.
10-4
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want.
To specify this graph style:
Press this key:
Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers
1(
)
2(
)
Line graph with X (×) data markers
3(
)
Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers
4(
)
Scatter graph with square (
5(
)
6(
)
Line graph with square (
) data markers
) data markers
Scatter graph with X (×) data markers
c. Repeat a and b to specify the style for each of the graphs on the Graph Mode screen.
7. On the Graph Mode screen, press 6(DRAW) or w.
• This draws the graph(s) in accordance with the settings you configured in step 2 through
step 6.
Graph Screen
• When a Graph screen is on the display, the function keys provide you with zooming and
other capabilities to aid in graph analysis.
For details about Graph screen function key operations, see the following section.
u To deselect sampled data assigned for graphing on the Graph Mode
screen
1. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to
the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose sampled data you want to deselect.
2. Press 5(DEL).
• This will deselect sample data assigned to the highlighted graph.
11-1
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after
drawing a graph.
You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation, or by the
operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on page 10-2.
k Graph Screen Key Operations
On the graph screen, you can use the keys described in the table below to analyze (CALC)
graphs by reading data points along the graph (Trace) and enlarging specific parts of the
graph (Zoom).
Key Operation
Description
!1(TRCE)
Displays a trace pointer on the graph along with the coordinates of the
current cursor location. Trace can also be used to obtain the periodic
frequency of a specific range on the graph and assign it to a variable.
See “Using Trace” on page 11-3.
!2(ZOOM)
Starts a zoom operation, which you can use to enlarge or reduce the
size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis. See “Using Zoom” on
page 11-4.
Displays a function menu of special View Window commands for the
E-CON2 Mode graph screen.
!3(V-WIN)
For details about each command, see “Configuring View Window
Parameters” on page 11-14.
Displays a menu that contains the following commands: Cls, Plot,
F-Line, Text, PEN, Vert, and Hztl. For details about each command, see
!4(SKTCH)
“5-10 Changing the Appearance of a Graph” under Chapter 5 of this
manual.
K1(PICT)
K2(LMEM)
Saves the currently displayed graph as a graphic image. You can recall a
saved graph image and overlay it on another graph to compare them.
For details about these procedures, see “5-4 Storing a Graph in Picture
Memory” under Chapter 5 of this manual.
Displays a menu of functions for saving the sample values in a specific
range of a graph to a list. See “Transforming Sampled Data to List Data”
on page 11-5.
11-2
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
Key Operation
Description
K3(EDIT)
Displays a menu of functions for zooming and editing a particular graph
when the graph screen contains multiple graphs. See “Working with
Multiple Graphs” on page 11-10.
K4(CALC)
Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a
function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression to
determine the tendency of a graph. See “Using Fourier Series Expansion
to Transform a Waveform to a Function” on page 11-6, and “Performing
Regression” on page 11-8.
K5(Y=fx)
Displays the graph function list, which lets you select a Y=f(x) graph to
overlay on the sampled result graph. See “Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on
a Sampled Result Graph” on page 11-9.
K6(SPKR)
Starts an operation for outputting a specific range of a sound data
waveform graph from the speaker. See “Outputting a Specific Range of a
Graph from the Speaker” on page 11-12.
k Scrolling the Graph Screen
Press the cursor keys while the graph screen is on the display scrolls the graph left, right, up,
or down.
Note
• The cursor keys perform different operations besides scrolling while a trace or graph
operation is in progress. To perform a graph screen scroll operation in this case, press
J to cancel the trace or graph operation, and then press the cursor keys.
11-3
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Using Trace
Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the
current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph.
You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and
assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha-Memory values.
u To use trace
1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRCE).
• This causes a trace pointer to appear on the graph. The coordinates of the current trace
pointer location are also shown on the display.
2. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the trace pointer along the graph to the location
you want.
• The coordinate values change in accordance with the trace pointer movement.
• You can exit the trace pointer at any time by pressing J.
u To obtain the periodic frequency value
1. Use the procedure under “To use trace” above to start a trace operation.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain, and then press w.
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain.
• This causes the period and periodic frequency value at the start point you selected in
step 2 to appear along the bottom of the screen.
11-4
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha-Memory variables.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying variable names for [Period] and [Frequency]
values.
• The initial default variable name settings are “S” for the period and “H” for the periodic
frequency. To change to another variable name, use the up and down cursor keys to
move the highlighting to the item you want to change, and then press the applicable
letter key.
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This stores the values and exits the trace operation.
• For details about using Alpha-Memory, see “Variables (Alpha Memory)” on page 2-7
under Chapter 2 of this manual.
k Using Zoom
Zoom lets you enlarge or reduce the size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis.
Note
• When there are multiple graphs on the screen, the procedure below zooms all of them.
For information about zooming a particular graph when there are multiple graphs on the
screen, see “Working with Multiple Graphs” on page 11-10.
u To zoom the graph screen
1. On the graph screen, press !2(ZOOM).
• This causes a magnifying glass cursor (
) to appear in the center of the screen.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.
11-5
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally
Press this cursor key:
e
Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally
d
Enlarge the graph image vertically
f
Reduce the size of the graph image vertically
c
4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
k Transforming Sampled Data to List Data
Use the following procedure to transform the sampled data in a specific range of a graph into
list data.
u To transform sampled data to list data
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 2(LMEM).
• This displays the [LMEM] menu.
2. Press 2(SEL).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to convert to list data, and
then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to convert to list data, and
then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the lists where you want to store the time data
and the sampled data.
/
• The initial default lists are List 1 for the time and List 2 for sample data. To change to
another list (List 1 to List 26), use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the list you want to change, and then input the applicable list number.
11-6
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the
graph screen.
• For details about using list data, see “Chapter 3 List Function”.
Note
• Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SEL) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In this
case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
k Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function
Fourier series expansion is effective for studying sounds by expressing them as functions.
The procedure below assumes that there is a graph of sampled sound data already on the
graph screen.
u To perform Fourier series expansion
1. On the graph screen , press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The [CALC] menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 1(Furie).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the graph range.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform
Fourier series expansion, and then press w.
11-7
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier
series expansion, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series.
/
5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of the Fourier series.
6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
• The graph function list appears with the calculation result.
7. Pressing 6(DRAW) here graphs the function.
• This lets you compare the expanded function graph and the original graph to see if they
are the same.
Note
When you press 6(DRAW) in step 7, the graph of the result of the Fourier series
expansion may not align correctly with the original graph on which it is overlaid. If this
happens, shift the position the original graph to align it with the overlaid graph.
For information about how to move the original graph, see “To move a particular graph on
a multi-graph display” (page 11-12).
11-8
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Performing Regression
You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace
pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic,
Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic.
For details about these regression types, see page 6-12 through 6-14 under Chapter 6 of
this manual.
The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression. The same general
steps can also be used to perform the other types of regression.
u To perform quadratic regression
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The [CALC] menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 5(X^2).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
• This displays the quadratic regression calculation result screen.
11-9
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. Press 6(DRAW).
• This draws a quadratic regression graph and overlays it over the original graph.
• To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then
1(Cls).
k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph
Use the following procedure when you want to overlay a Y=f(x) graph on the sampled result
graph.
u To overlay a Y=f(x) graph on an existing graph
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 5(Y=fx).
• This displays the graph function list. Any functions you have previously input on the
graph function list appear at this time.
2. Input the function you want to graph.
• To input a function, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the line
where you want to input it, and then use the calculator keys for input. Press w to store
the function.
3. On the graph function list, specify which functions you want to graph.
• Graphing is turned on for any function whose “=” symbol is highlighted. To toggle
graphing of a function on or off, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the function, and then press 1(SEL).
11-10
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
4. After the graph function list settings are configured the way you want, press 6(DRAW).
• This overlays graphs of all the functions for which graphing is turned on, over the graph
that was originally on the graph screen.
/
Original Graph
Overlaid with Y=f(x) Graph
• To delete the overlaid graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls).
Important!
• The screenshot shown in step 4 above is of a function that was calculated and stored by
performing regression on a graph that was drawn using sampled data. Note that
overlaying a Y=f(x) graph on a sampled data graph does not automatically draw a
regression graph based on sampled data.
k Working with Multiple Graphs
The procedures in this section explain how you can zoom or move a particular graph when
there are multiple graphs on the display.
u To zoom a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• The [EDIT] menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 1(ZOOM).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen.
11-11
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear, along with a
magnifying glass cursor ( ) in the center of the screen.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.
5. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally
Press this cursor key:
e
Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally
d
Enlarge the graph image vertically
f
Reduce the size of the graph image vertically
c
/
6. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
11-12
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
u To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• This displays the [EDIT] menu.
2. Press 2(MOVE).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear.
4. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the graph left and right, or the f and c
cursor keys to move the graph up and down.
/
5. To exit the move mode, press J.
k Outputting a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker
Use the following procedure to output a specific range of a sound data waveform graph from
the speaker.
u To output a graph from the speaker
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 6(SPKR).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
11-13
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.
/
4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is,
specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one octave, input a value of 200%. To lower
the original sound by one octave, input a value of 50%.
5. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200
speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
6. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
7. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown below.
8. If you want to retry output from the speaker, press 1(Yes). To exit the procedure and
return to the graph screen, press 6(No).
• Pressing 1(Yes) returns to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. From there, repeat the
above steps from step 4.
11-14
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Configuring View Window Parameters
Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View
Window function key menu along the bottom of the display.
Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to configure.
Function Key
Description
1(Auto)
Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
Y-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size
X-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size when 1 data item
equals 1 dot; 1 data equals 1 dot in other cases
2(FULL)
Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen.
3(Y)
Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen along the Y-axis, without
changing the X-axis dimensions.
4(UNIT)
Specifies the unit of the numeric axis grid displayed by the Econ Axes
setting of the graph setup screen (page 3-13).
1(μ sec): microseconds
2(msec): milliseconds
3(sec): seconds
4(DHMS):days, hours, minutes, seconds (1 day, 2 hours, 30 minutes,
5 seconds = 1d2h30m5s)
5(Auto):Auto selection
5(CHNG)
Toggles display of the source data on the graph screen on and off.
To exit the View Window function key menu and return to the standard function key menu,
press J.
12-1
Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity
12 Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity
You can call E-CON2 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity
file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips.
u Econ SetupWizard strip
This strip calls the E-CON2 Setup Wizard. The Econ Setup Wizard strip makes it
possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: EA-200
setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
Note
• In the case of the Econ SetupWizard strip, the “3: Convert Program” is not available
on the “Complete!” dialog box.
u Econ AdvancedSetup strip
This strip calls the E-CON2 Advanced Setup screen. The Advanced Setup provides
access to almost all executable functions (except for the program converter),
including detailed EA-200 setup and sampling execution; graphing and Graph
Analysis Tools; simultaneous sampling with multiple sensors using the
MULTIMETER Mode, etc.
Note
• Using an Econ Advanced Setup strip to configure a setup causes the setup
information to be registered in the applicable strip. This means that the next time you
open the strip, sampling can be performed in accordance with the previously
configured setup information.
u Econ Sampling strip
This strip executes EA-200 measurement. To store EA-200 setup information for this
strip, perform the Econ Advance Setup operation the first time the strip is executed.
u Econ Graph strip
This strip graphs sampled data that is recorded in the strip. The sampled data is
recorded to the strip the first time the strip is executed.
u Econ Strip Memory Capacity Precautions
• The memory capacity of each Econ strip is 25 KB. An error will occur if you
perform an operation that causes this capacity to be exceeded. Particular care is
required when handling a large number of samples, which can cause memory
capacity to be exceeded.
• Always make sure that FFT Graph is turned off whenever performing sampling
with the microphone. Leaving FFT Graph turned on cause memory capacity to be
exceeded.
• If an error occurs, press !a(') to return to the eActivity workspace screen
and perform the procedure again.
• For information about checking the memory usage of each strip, see “10-5
eActivity File Memory Usage Screen” iunder Chapter 10 of this manual.
For details about eActivity operations, see “Chapter 10 eActivity” under Chapter 10 of this
manual.
E-CON3
Application
(English)
(fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII,
fx-9860G AU PLUS)
Important!
• Do not install Add-in E-CON2 on a calculator that has E-CON3 installed.
Doing so may cause operational problems.
• All explanations in this section assume that you are fully familiar with all
calculator and Data Logger (CMA CLAB* or CASIO EA-200) precautions,
terminology, and operational procedures.
• The E-CON3 application is designed to get the most out of the
measurement functions of the CASIO EA-200 Data Logger. Though
it can run on a CMA CLAB Data Logger, CLAB does not have a
SONIC port, microphone, or speaker as is equipped on the EA-200.
While a calculator is connected to a CLAB Data Logger, attempting to
configure E-CON3 application settings and perform measurement using
parameters that are not supported by CLAB will cause an error.
• Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all page references in this
“E-CON3 Application” chapter are to pages in this chapter.
* For information about CMA and the CLAB Data Logger, visit
http://cma-science.nl/.
1-1
E-CON3 Overview
1 E-CON3 Overview
• From the Main Menu, select E-CON3 to enter the E-CON3 Mode.
E-CON3 Main Menu
• The “E-CON3 Mode” provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data
sampling using a Data Logger.
• 1(SET) ......... Displays a screen for setting up a Data Logger.
• 2(MEM)........ Displays a screen for saving Data Logger setup data under a file
name.
• 3(PROG) ..... Performs program conversion.
• This function can be used to convert Data Logger setup data
configured using E-CON3 to a Data Logger control program that can
run on the fx-9860G SD/fx-9860G.
• It also can be used to convert data to a program that can be run on
a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series calculator.
• 4(STRT)....... Starts data collection.
• 5(GRPH)...... Graphs data sampled by a Data Logger, and provides tools for analyzing
graphs. Graph Analysis tools include calculation of periodic frequency,
various types of regression, Fourier series calculation, and more.
• 6(HELP)....... Displays E-CON3 help.
• Pressing the K key (Setup Preview) or a cursor key while the E-CON3 main menu is
on the screen displays a preview dialog box that shows the contents of the setup in the
current setup memory area.
To close the preview dialog box, press J.
Note
For details about setup data and the current setup memory area, see “6 Using Setup
Memory” (page 6-1).
About online help
Pressing the 6(HELP) key displays online help about the E-CON3 Mode.
2-1
Using the Setup Wizard
2 Using the Setup Wizard
This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the Data Logger setup
quickly and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear.
If you need more control over specific sampling parameters, you should consider using the
Advanced Setup procedure on page 3-1.
k Setup Wizard Parameters
Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three Data Logger basic sampling
parameters using an interactive wizard format.
• Sensor (Select Sensor):
Specify a CASIO, VERNIER* or CMA sensor from a menu of choices.
*Vernier Software & Technology
• Total Sampling Time:
Specify a value within the range of 0.01 second to 30 days.
• Sampling Time Unit (Select Unit):
Specify seconds (sec), minutes (min), hours (hour), or days (day) as the time unit of the
value you input for the total sampling time (Total Sampling Time).
Note
For some sensors (EA-200 built-in microphone, Vernier Photogate, etc.), sampling
parameters are different from those shown above. The differences between sampling
parameters and setup procedures for each sensor are described in this section.
Setup Wizard Rules
Note the following rules whenever you use the Setup Wizard.
• The EA-200 sampling channel is CH1 or SONIC.
• The CLAB sampling channel is CH1 only.
• The trigger for a Setup Wizard setup is always the w key.
2-2
Using the Setup Wizard
u To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard
Before getting started...
• Before starting the procedure below, make sure you first decide if you want to start
sampling immediately using the setup you configure with Setup Wizard, or if you want to
store the setup for later sampling.
• See sections 6-1, 7-1, and 8-1 of this chapter (E-CON3 Application) for information about
procedures required to start sampling and to store a setup. We recommend that you read
through the entire procedure first, referencing the other sections and pages as noted,
before actually trying to perform it.
• To terminate Setup Wizard part way through and cancel the setup, press !J(QUIT).
1. Display the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1).
2. Press 1(SET) and then 1(WIZ).
• This launches the Setup Wizard and displays the “Select Sensor” screen.
3. Press one of the following function keys to specify the manufacturer of the sensor you are
using for measurement: 1(CASIO), 2(VERNIER), 3(CMA).
• Pressing either key will display the corresponding sensor list.
4. Specify the sensor you want to use.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the sensor you want to use,
and then press w.
• If the sensor you specified has more than one option (more detailed specifications, such
as sampling unit, mode, etc.), an option list will appear on the display at this time. If this
happens, advance to step 5.
• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, skip to step 6.
5. Select the options for the sensor you specified in step 4.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the option you want to select,
and then press w.
• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, advance to step 6.
Important!
When special settings are required by the sensor and/or option you select, other screens
other than the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen will appear on the display. The
following shows where you should go to find information about the operations you need to
perform for each sensor/option selection.
2-3
Using the Setup Wizard
If you select this sensor/option:
Go here for more information:
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT]
“Using Setup Wizard to Configure
Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling” on
page 2-4
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only]
[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate] or
[CMA] - [Photogate] - [Gate]
“To configure a setup for Photogate
alone” on page 2-5
[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley] or
[CMA] - [Photogate] - [Pulley]
“To configure a setup for Photogate
and Smart Pulley” on page 2-6
[CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)]
“Outputting the Waveform of a
Function through the Speaker” on
page 2-6
6. Use the number input keys to input the total sampling time. Just input a value.
In step 8 of this procedure, you will be able to specify the unit (seconds, minutes, hours,
days) of the value you input here.
Note
• With some sensors ([CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave], etc.) sampling time is
limited to a few seconds. The unit for such a sensor is always seconds, and so the
“Select Unit” screen does not appear.
• If you specify a total sampling time value in the range of 10 seconds to 23 hours, 59
minutes, 59 seconds, real-time graphing will be performed during sampling. This is the
same as selecting the Realtime Mode on the “Advanced Setup” screen.
7. After inputting total sampling time value you want, press w. This displays the “Select
Unit” screen.
8. Use number keys b through e to specify the unit for the value you specified in step 6.
• This displays a confirmation screen.
9. If there is not problem with the contents of the confirmation screen, press 1.
If you need to change the setup, press 6 or J. This will return to step 6 (for setting
the total sampling interval), where you can change the setting.
• Pressing 1 will take you to the final Setup Wizard screen.
10. Press number keys described below to specify what you want to do with the setup you
have configured.
b(Start Setup) .................Starts sampling using the setup (page 8-1)
c(Save Setup-MEM) .......Saves the setup (page 6-1)
d(Convert Program)........Converts the setup to a program (page 7-1)
2-4
Using the Setup Wizard
k Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling (EA-200 only)
When you perform sound sampling executed the EA-200’s built-in microphone (by specifying
[CASIO] - [Microphone] as the sensor), Setup Wizard will provide you with three options:
[Sound wave], [Sound wave & FFT], and [FFT only]. “Sound wave” records the following two
dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical
axis). “FFT” records the following two dimensions: frequency (horizontal axis) and volume
(vertical axis).
The following shows the settings for recording FFT data.
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure a Data Logger setup
using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT] or
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only].
• This causes a “Select FFT Range” screen to appear.
• You can select one of four settings for FFT Range. The setting you select will
automatically apply the applicable fixed parameters shown below.
Parameter
Setting 2 - 1000 Hz:
1
Frequency pitch
Frequency max
Sampling interval
Number of samples
2 Hz
1000 Hz
61 μ sec
8192
4 - 2000 Hz:
2
6 - 3000 Hz:
3
8 - 4000 Hz:
4
4 Hz
2000 Hz
31 μ sec
8192
6 Hz
3000 Hz
20 μ sec
8192
8 Hz
4000 Hz
31 μ sec
4096
The following explains the meaning of each parameter.
Frequency pitch: Pitch in Hz at which sampling is performed
Frequency max: Upper limit of sampling frequency (lower limit is fixed at 0 Hz)
Sampling interval: Interval in μ seconds at which sampling is performed
Number of samples: Number of times sampling is performed
3. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select an FFT Range setting.
• Selecting an FFT Range causes the final Setup Wizard screen to appear.
4. Perform step 10 under “To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard” on page
2-2 to finalize the procedure.
2-5
Using the Setup Wizard
k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a Photogate Setup
Connection of a Vernier or CMA Photogate requires configuration of setup parameters that
are slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors.
u To configure a setup for Photogate alone
1. On the E-CON3 main menu, press 1(SET)1(WIZ) to start the setup wizard.
• This displays the “Select Sensor” dialog box.
2. If you are using a Vernier Photogate alone, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
When the “Select Channel” dialog box appears, advance to step 3 of this procedure.
If you are using a CMA Photogate alone, select [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Gate]. When the
“Gate Status” dialog box appears, advance to step 4 of this procedure.
3. Press 1(CH1) or 2(SONIC) to specify the channel where the Photogate is connected.
• This displays the “Gate Status” dialog box.
4. On the “Gate Status” dialog box, select a gate status for measurement by pressing a
function key (1 through 4).
• The gate status defines what Photogate status should cause timing to start, and what
status should cause timing to stop.
1(Open-Open) ........ Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes
and then opens again.
2(Open-Close)........ Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes.
3(Close-Open)........ Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens.
4(Close-Close) ....... Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens
and then closes again.
• Selecting a gate status causes a screen for specifying the number of samples to appear.
5. Input an integer in the range of 1 to 255 to specify the number of samples.
6. Perform step 10 (in the case of a Vernier Photogate) or steps 9 and 10 (in the case of a
CMA Photogate) under “To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard” (page
2-2).
2-6
Using the Setup Wizard
u To configure a setup for Photogate and Smart Pulley
1. On the E-CON3 main menu, press 1(SET)1(WIZ) to start the setup wizard.
2. This displays the “Select Sensor” dialog box.
3. If you are using a Vernier Photogate with Pulley, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] [Pulley]. When the “Select Channel” dialog box appears, advance to step 4 of this
procedure.
If you are using a CMA Photogate with Pulley, select [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Pulley]. When
the “Input Distance(m)” dialog box appears, advance to step 5 of this procedure.
4. Press 1(CH1) or 2(SONIC) to specify the channel where the Photogate is connected.
• This displays the “Input Distance(m)” dialog box.
5. On the “Input Distance(m)” dialog box, input a value in the range of 0.1 to 4.0 and then
press w.
6. Perform step 10 (in the case of a Vernier Photogate) or steps 9 and 10 (in the case of a
CMA Photogate) under “To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard” (page
2-2).
k Outputting the Waveform of a Function through the Speaker
(EA-200 only)
Normally, the Setup Wizard helps you configure setups for sensors connected to a Data
Logger. If you select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)] on the “Select Sensor” screen, however, it
configures the EA-200 to output the sound that corresponds to a function that you input and
graph on the calculator.
u To configure a setup for speaker output
1. Connect the data communication cable (SB-62) to the communication port of the
calculator and the MASTER port of the EA-200.
2. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure a Data Logger setup
using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
3. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)].
This displays a screen like the one shown below.
4. Press w to advance to the View Window setting screen.
• The following settings are configured automatically: Ymin = –1.5 and Ymax = 1.5. Do not
change these settings.
5. Press w or J to advance to the graph function list.
2-7
Using the Setup Wizard
6. In line “Y1”, input the function of the waveform for the sound you want to input.
• Note that the angle unit is always radians.
• Input a function where the value of “Y” is within the range of –1.5 to +1.5.
7. Press 6(DRAW) to graph the function.
• This graphs the function and displays a vertical cursor line as shown below. Use the
graph to specify the range that you want to output to the speaker.
8. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the start point of the output, and
then press w to register it.
9. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the end point of the output, and
then press w to register it.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.
/
10. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one
octave, input a value of 200%. To lower the original sound by one octave, input a value
of 50%.
11. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200
speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
12. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
2-8
Using the Setup Wizard
13. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown below.
14. Perform one of the following operations, depending on what you want to do.
To change the output frequency and try again:
Press 1(Yes) to return to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. Next, repeat the above
steps from step 10.
To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again:
Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 7. Next, repeat the above steps from
step 8.
To change the function:
Press 6(No) and then J to return to the graph function list in step 6. Next, repeat the
above steps from step 6.
To exit the procedure and return to the E-CON3 main menu:
Press 6(No) and then press J twice.
3-1
Using Advanced Setup
3 Using Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can
adjust to configure the Data Logger setup that suits your particular needs.
The procedures in this section provide the general steps you should perform when using
Advanced Setup to configure a Data Logger setup, and to returns setup settings to their
initial default values. You can find details about individual settings and the options that are
available with each setting are provided by the explanations that start on page 3-3.
k Advanced Setup Operations
u To configure a Data Logger setup using Advanced Setup
The following procedure describes the general steps for using Advanced Setup. Refer to the
pages as noted for more information.
1. Display the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1).
2. Press 1(SET). This displays the “Setup Data Logger” submenu.
3. Press 2(ADV). This displays the Advanced Setup menu.
Advanced Setup Menu
4. If you want to configure a custom probe at this point, press f(Custom Probe). Next,
follow the steps under “To configure a custom probe setup” on page 4-1.
• You can also configure a custom probe during the procedure under “To configure
Channel Setup settings” on page 3-3.
• Custom probe configurations you have stored in memory can be selected using Channel
in step 5, below.
5. Use the Advanced Setup function keys described below to set other parameters.
• b(Channel)......Displays a screen that shows the sensors that are currently
assigned to each channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic). You can
also use this dialog to change sensor assignments. See “Channel
Setup” on page 3-3 for more information.
• c(Sample) .......Displays a screen for selecting the sampling mode, and for
specifying the sampling interval, the number of samples, and the
warm-up mode. When “Fast” is selected for “Mode”, this dialog box
also displays a setting for turning FFT (frequency characteristics)
graphing on and off. See “Sample Setup” on page 3-5 for more
information.
3-2
Using Advanced Setup
• d(Trigger)........Displays a screen for configuring sampling start (trigger) conditions.
See “Trigger Setup” on page 3-8 for more information.
• e(Graph) .........Displays a screen for configuring graph settings. See “Graph Setup”
on page 3-13 for more information.
• You can return the settings on the above setup screens (b through e) using the
procedure described under “To return setup parameters to their initial defaults”.
6. After you configure a setup, you can use the function key operations described below to
start sampling or perform other operations.
• 1(STRT)....... Starts sampling using the setup (page 8-1).
• 2(MLTI) ........ Starts MULTIMETER Mode sampling using the setup (page 5-1).
• 3(MEM)........ Saves the setup (page 6-1).
• 4(PROG) ..... Converts the setup to a program (page 7-1).
• 5(GRPH)...... Graphs data sampled by the Data Logger, and provides tools for
analyzing graphs (page 10-1).
• 6(ABT) ......... Displays version information about the Data Logger unit that is
currently connected to the calculator.
u To return setup parameters to their initial defaults
Perform the following procedure when you want to return the parameters of the setup in the
current setup memory area to their initial defaults.
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press g(Initialize).
2. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to initialize the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without initializing the setup, press 6(No).
3-3
Using Advanced Setup
k Channel Setup
The Channel Setup screen shows the sensors that are currently assigned to each channel
(CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic).
u To configure Channel Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press b(Channel).
• This displays the Channel Setup screen.
Currently selected channel
Channel Setup Screen
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the channel whose setting
you want to change.
3. What you need to do next depends on the currently selected channel.
• CH1, CH2, or CH3
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to the selected
channel.
1(CASIO) ....... Displays a menu of CASIO sensors.
2(VRNR) ........ Displays a menu of Vernier sensors.
3(CMA) .......... Displays a menu of CMA sensors.
4(CSTM) ........ Displays a menu of custom probes.
5(None) ......... Press this key when you want leave the channel without any sensor
assigned to it.
• SONIC Channel (EA-200 only)
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to this channel.
1(CASIO) ....... Displays a menu of CASIO sensors, but only “Motion” can be
selected.
2(VRNR) ........ Displays a menu of Vernier sensors. You can select “Motion” or
“Photogate”.
Note
• On the menu that appears after you select “Motion” from either the CASIO or
Vernier sensor menu, select either “meters” or “feet” as the sampling unit.
• After selecting “Motion” from either the CASIO or Vernier sensor menu, you can
press the K key to toggle “smoothing (correction of measurement error)” on
(“-Smooth” displayed) and off (“-Smooth” not displayed).
3-4
Using Advanced Setup
• From the menu that appears after you select “Photogate” as the sensor, select
[Gate] or [Pulley].
[Gate] ................Select this option when using the Photogate sensor alone.
[Pulley] ..............Select this option when using the Photogate sensor along with a
smart pulley.
5(None) ......... Select this option to disable the SONIC channel.
• Mic Channel (EA-200 only)
For this channel, the sensor is automatically set to Built-in (External) Microphone.
However, you need to configure the settings described below.
1(Snd) ........... Select this option to record elapsed time and volume 2-dimensional
sampled sound data (elapsed time on the horizontal axis, volume on
the vertical axis).
2(FFT) ........... Select this option to record frequency and volume 2-dimensional
sampled sound data (frequency on the horizontal axis, volume on the
vertical axis).
5(None) ......... Select this option to disable the Mic channel.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as necessary to configure all the channels you want.
5. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.
Note
• When you select a channel on the Channel Setup screen, the sampling range of the
selected channel appears in the bottom line of the screen.
In the above example, the range of the temperature sensor assigned to CH2 appears on the
display.
If the sampling range value is too long to fit on the display, only the part of the value that fits
on the display will be shown.
• Whenever the current Sample Setup (page 3-5) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings
become incompatible due to a change in Channel Setup settings, these settings revert
automatically to their initial defaults. Selecting the Mic channel with Channel Setup while
the Sample Setup has “Extended” selected for the sampling mode, for example, will cause
the sampling mode to change automatically to “Fast” (which is the initial default setting
when the Mic channel is selected). For information about the channels that can be selected
for each sampling mode, see “Sample Setup” (page 3-5).
3-5
Using Advanced Setup
k Sample Setup
The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling.
u To configure Sample Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press c(Sample).
• This displays the Sample Setup screen, with the “Mode” line highlighted, which indicates
that you can select the sampling mode.
2. Select the sampling mode that suits the type of sampling you want to perform.
To do this:
Press this
key:
To select
this mode:
Graph data in real-time as it is sampled
1(R-T)
Realtime
Perform sampling of high-speed phenomena (sound, etc.)
2(Fast)
Fast
Perform sampling over a long time (weather, etc.)
4(Extd)
Extended*
Sample sound using the built-in microphone (EA-200 only)
6(g)
1(Snd)
Sound
Record the time of the occurrence of a particular trigger
event as an absolute value starting from 0, which is the
sampling start time
6(g)
2(Clck)
Clock
Perform periodic sampling, from a start trigger event to an
end trigger event
6(g)
3(Priod)
Period
Perform sampling other than that described above
3(Norm)
Normal
* While performing measurements with the Extended mode, the EA-200 will enter a
power off sleep state while standing by.
• Note that the mode you select also determines the channel(s) you can use.
Sampling mode:
Selectable Channel(s)
Realtime, Extended, Normal
CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC
Fast
CH1, Mic
Sound
Mic
Clock, Period
CH1
3-6
Using Advanced Setup
3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval.
• The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting.
If this sampling mode is selected:
This is the allowable setting range:
Realtime
0.2 to 299 sec
Fast
20 to 500 μsec
Extended
5 to 240 min
Period
“=Trigger” only (no value input required)
Sound
20 to 27 μsec
Clock
“=Trigger” only (no value input required)
Normal
0.0005 to 299 sec
4. To change the number of samples setting, move the highlighting to “Number”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the number of samples.
• The total sampling time shown at the bottom of the dialog box is calculated by
multiplying the “Sampling Interval” value you specified in step 3 by the number of
samples you specify here.
Important!
• When all of the following conditions exist, a “Distance” setting appears in place of the
“Number” setting. See “To configure the Distance setting” (page 3-7) for information
about configuring the “Distance” setting.
• Channel Setup (page 3-3): 2(VRNR) - [Photogate] - [Pulley],
3(CMA) - [Photogate] - [Pulley]
• Sampling Mode (page 3-5): Clock
5. To change the warm-up time setting, move the highlighting to “Warm-up”. Next, perform
one of the function key operations described below.
Note
• The “Warm-up” setting will not be displayed on the Sample Setup screen if “Fast”,
“Sound” or “Extended” is currently selected as the sampling mode.
To do this:
Press this key:
Have the warm-up time for each sensor set automatically
1(Auto)
Input a warm-up time, in seconds, manually
2(Man)
Disable the warm-up time
3(None)
Important!
• When the following condition exists, an “FFT Graph” setting appears in place of the
“Warm-up” setting. See “To configure the FFT Graph setting” (page 3-7) for information
about configuring the “FFT Graph” setting.
• Sampling Mode (page 3-5): Fast
3-7
Using Advanced Setup
6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.
Note
• Whenever the current Channel Setup (page 3-3) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings
become incompatible due to a change in Sample Setup settings, these settings revert
automatically to their initial defaults. Selecting “Realtime” as the sampling mode with
Sample Setup while the Mic channel is selected with Channel Setup and the Trigger
Setup has “Mic” selected for “Source”, for example, will cancel the Channel Setup Mic
channel selection and change the Trigger Setup “Source” setting to “[EXE] key”.
For information about the channels that can be selected for each sampling mode,
see step 2 of “To configure Sample Setup settings”. For information about the trigger
sources that can be selected for each sampling mode, see “Trigger Setup” (page 3-8).
u To configure the Distance setting
In place of step 3 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for specifying the distance the weight travels in meters.
• Specify a value in the range of 0.1 to 4 meters.
u To configure the FFT Graph setting
In place of step 5 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for turning frequency characteristic graphing (FFT Graph) on and off.
To do this:
Press this key:
Turn on graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling
1(On)
Turn off graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling
2(Off)
3-8
Using Advanced Setup
k Trigger Setup
You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w
key operation, etc.) The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”,
which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen.
The following table describes each of the six available trigger sources.
To start sampling when this happens:
Select this trigger source:
When the w key is pressed
[EXE] key
After the specified number of seconds are counted down
Count Down
When input at CH1 reaches a specified value
CH1
When input at the SONIC channel reaches a specified value
(EA-200 only)
SONIC
When the built-in microphone detects sound (EA-200 only)
Mic
When the [START/STOP] key is pressed (EA-200 only)
[START] key
When [Button] is pressed (CLAB only)
[START] key
Note
The trigger sources you can select depends on the sampling mode selected with the Sample
Setup (page 3-5).
For this sampling mode:
The following trigger source(s) can be selected:
Realtime
[EXE] key, Count Down
Fast
[EXE] key, Count Down, CH1, Mic
Normal
[EXE] key, Count Down, CH1, SONIC, [START] key
Extended
[EXE] key
Sound
[EXE] key, Count Down, Mic
Clock
CH1
Period
CH1
3-9
Using Advanced Setup
u To configure Trigger Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press d(Trigger).
• This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the “Source” line highlighted.
• The function menu items that appears in the menu bar depend on the sampling mode
selected with Sample Setup (page 3-5). The above screen shows the function menu
when “Normal” is selected as the sample sampling mode.
2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
• The following shows the trigger sources that can be selected for each sampling mode.
Sampling Mode
Trigger Source
Realtime
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down
Fast
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down, 3(CH1),
5(Mic)
Normal
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down, 3(CH1),
4(Sonic), 5(STR) : [START] key
Sound
1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cnt) : Count Down, 5(Mic)
• The trigger source is always “[EXE] key” when the sampling mode is “Extended”, and
“CH1” when the sampling mode is “Clock” or “Period”.
3-10
Using Advanced Setup
3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was
selected in step 2.
If this is the trigger
source:
Do this next:
[EXE] key
Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.
Count Down
Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the
countdown start time” below.
CH1
Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction.
See “To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge
type”, “To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and
trigger end edge settings” on page 3-11 or “To configure
Photogate trigger start and end settings” on page 3-12.
SONIC
Specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level.
See “To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor
level” on page 3-12.
Mic
Specify microphone sensitivity. See “To specify microphone
sensitivity” below.
[START] key
Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.
u To specify the countdown start time
1. Move the highlighting to “Timer”.
2. Press 1(Time) to display a dialog box for specifying the countdown start time.
3. Input a value in seconds from 1 to 10.
4. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
u To specify microphone sensitivity
1. Move the highlighting to “Sense” and then press one of the function keys describe below.
To select this level of microphone sensitivity:
Press this key:
Low
1(Low)
Medium
2(Mid)
High
3(High)
2. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
3-11
Using Advanced Setup
u To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type
Perform the following steps when “Fast”, “Normal”, or “Clock” is specified as the sampling
mode (page 3-5).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
Sensor assigned to CH1 or SONIC by Channel Setup
(page 3-3)
Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Edge”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Press this key:
Falling
1(Fall)
Rising
2(Rise)
6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
u To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and trigger end edge
settings
Perform the following steps when “Period” is specified as the sampling mode (page 3-5).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want.
4. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Press this key:
Falling
1(Fall)
Rising
2(Rise)
6. Move the highlighting to “End Edge”.
7. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:
Press this key:
Falling
1(Fall)
Rising
2(Rise)
8. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
3-12
Using Advanced Setup
u To configure Photogate trigger start and end settings
Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source.
1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
2. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this Photogate status:
Press this key:
Photogate closed
1(Close)
Photogate open
2(Open)
3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”.
4. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this Photogate status:
Press this key:
Photogate closed
1(Close)
Photogate open
2(Open)
5. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
u To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Level”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of level:
Press this key:
Below
1(Blw)
Above
2(Abv)
6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1).
3-13
Using Advanced Setup
k Graph Setup
Use the Graph Setup screen to configure settings for the graph produced after sampling is
complete. You use the Sample Setup settings (page 3-5) to turn graphing on or off.
u To configure Graph Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press e(Graph).
• This displays the Graph Setup screen.
Currently selected item
Graph Setup Screen
2. To change the graph source data name display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Graph Func”. Next, press one of the function keys described
below.
To specify this graph source data name display setting:
Press this key:
Display source data name
1(On)
Hide source data name
2(Off)
• When the graph data is stored in a sample data memory file, the file name appears as
the source data name. When the graph data is stored in current data area, the channel
name appears.
Note
• For details about sample data memory and current data area, see “9 Using Sample Data
Memory”.
3. To change the trace operation coordinate display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Coord”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this coordinate display setting for the trace operation:
Press this key:
Display trace coordinates
1(On)
Hide trace coordinates
2(Off)
4. To change the numeric axes display setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “Econ Axes”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this axes display setting:
Press this key:
Display axes
1(On)
Hide axes
2(Off)
3-14
Using Advanced Setup
5. To change the real-time scroll setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “RealScroll”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this real-time scrolling setting:
Press this key:
Real-time scrolling on
1(On)
Real-time scrolling off
2(Off)
6. Press w to finalize Graph Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
4-1
Using a Custom Probe
4 Using a Custom Probe
You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with a Data
Logger.
Important!
• The sensors (CASIO, Vernier, CMA) that appear on the list during Channel Setup (page
3-3) are E-CON3 mode standard sensors. If you want to use a sensor that is not included in
the list, configure custom probe settings.
• A sensor with an output voltage in the range of 0 to 5 volts can be configured with E-CON3
as a custom probe. Use of sensors with an output voltage outside of this range is not
supported.
k Configuring a Custom Probe Setup
To configure a custom probe setup, you must input values for the constants of the fixed
linear interpolation formula (ax + b). The required constants are slope (a) and intercept (b). x
in the above expression (ax + b) is the sampled voltage value (sampling range: 0 to 5 volts).
u To configure a custom probe setup
1. From the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 1(SET) and then c(ADV) to display
the Advanced Setup menu.
• See “3 Using Advanced Setup” for more information.
2. On the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), press f(Custom Probe) to display the
Custom Probe List.
• The message “No Custom Probe” appears if the Custom Probe List is empty.
3. Press 1(NEW).
• This displays a custom probe setup screen like the one shown below.
• The initial default setting for the probe name is “Voltage(6pin)”. The first step for
configuring custom probe settings is to change this name to another one. If you want to
leave the default name the way it is, skip steps 4 and 5.
4. Press 1(EDIT).
• This enters the probe name editing mode.
4-2
Using a Custom Probe
5. Input up to 18 characters for the custom probe name, and then press E.
• This will cause the highlighting to move to “Slope”.
6. Use the function keys described below to configure the custom probe setup.
• To change the setting of an item, first use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to the item. Next, use the function keys to select the setting you want.
(1) Slope
Press 1(EDIT) to input the slope for the linear interpolation formula.
(2) Intercept
Press 1(EDIT) to input the intercept for the linear interpolation formula.
(3) Unit Name
Press 1(EDIT) to input up to eight characters for the unit name.
(4) Warm-up
Press 1(EDIT) to input the warm-up time.
7. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the Custom Probe List, which should
now contain the new custom probe setup you configured.
u To recall the specifications of a Vernier or CMA sensor and configure
custom probe settings
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page 4-1.
2. Press 4(VRNR) or 5(CMA).
• This displays a sensor list.
3. Use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to the sensor whose setting you want
to use as the basis of the custom probe settings, and then press w.
• The name and specifications of the sensor you select will appear on the custom probe
setup screen.
• To complete this procedure, perform steps 4 through 7 under “To configure a custom
probe setup” (page 4-1).
4-3
Using a Custom Probe
k Auto Calibrating a Custom Probe
Auto calibration automatically corrects the slope and intercept values of a custom probe
setup based on two actual samples.
Important!
• Before performing the procedure below, you should prepare two conditions whose
measurement values are known.
• When inputting reference value in step 5 of the procedure below, input the exact known
measurement value of the condition you will sample in step 4. When inputting reference
value in step 7 of the procedure below, input the exact known measurement value of the
condition you will sample in step 6.
u To auto calibrate a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the custom probe you want to auto
calibrate to CH1 of the Data Logger.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
calibration, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page 4-1.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the slope and intercept, so you do not need to
specify them in step 6 of the above procedure.
If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure under “To edit a custom probe setup” on
page 4-6.
3. Press 2(CALIB).
• This will start the first sampling operation with the sensor connected to Data Logger’s
CH1, and then display a screen like the one shown below.
First sampling operation
Real-time display of sampled values
4-4
Using a Custom Probe
4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the
cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.
5. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the first sampled value, and then press
w.
• This cause sampling of the second value to be performed automatically, and display the
same type of screen that appeared in step 3.
Second sampling operation
6. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the second sampled value and display it on the screen. The cursor will
appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.
7. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the second sampled value, and then
press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-CON3 will calculate the slope and intercept value based on the two reference
values that you input, and configure the settings automatically. The automatically
configured values will appear on the custom probe setup screen, where you can view
them.
8. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.
4-5
Using a Custom Probe
k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe
This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual
sample using the applicable custom probe.
u To zero adjust a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the custom probe you want to zero
adjust to CH1 of the Data Logger.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
zero adjusting, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page 4-1.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the intercept, so you do not need to specify it in step
6 of the above procedure.
If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure under “To edit a custom probe setup” on
page 4-6.
3. Press 3(ZERO).
• This will start the sampling operation with the sensor connected to Data Logger’s CH1,
and then display a screen like the one shown below.
4. At the point your want to perform zero adjustment (the point that the displayed value is
the appropriate zero adjust value), press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-CON3 will set the intercept value automatically based on the sampled value. The
automatically configured value will appear on the custom probe setup screen, where you
can view it.
5. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.
4-6
Using a Custom Probe
k Managing Custom Probe Setups
Use the procedures in this section to edit and delete existing custom probe setups.
u To edit a custom probe setup
1. Display the Custom Probe List.
2. Select the custom probe setup whose configuration you want to edit.
• Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the custom probe you want.
3. Press 2(EDIT).
• This displays the screen for configuring a custom probe setup.
• To edit the custom probe setup, perform the procedure starting from step 6 under “To
configure a custom probe setup” on page 4-1.
u To delete a custom probe setup
1. Display the Custom Probe List.
2. Select the custom probe setup you want to delete.
• Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the custom probe setup you
want.
3. Press 3(DEL).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the
custom probe setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No).
5-1
Using the MULTIMETER Mode
5 Using the MULTIMETER Mode
You can use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure a channel so that Data
Logger MULTIMETER Mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation.
u To use the MULTIMETER Mode
1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the sensors you want to the
applicable Data Logger channels.
2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to
configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using.
3. After configuring the sensor setups, press w to return to the Advanced Setup menu
(page 3-1), and then press 2(MLTI).
• This starts sampling in the Data Logger MULTIMETER mode and displays a list of
sample values for each channel.
• Displayed sample data is refreshed at 0.5-second intervals.
• Do not connect sensors to any other channels except for those you specified in step 2.
• Data sampled in the MULTIMETER mode is not saved in memory.
4. To end MULTIMETER mode sampling, press the w key.
6-1
Using Setup Memory
6 Using Setup Memory
Creating Data Logger setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the
data to be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current
setup memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data.
You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator
memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.
k Saving a Setup
A setup can be saved when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard
See step 8 under “To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup
See step 6 under “To configure a Data Logger setup using Advanced Setup” on page 3-1
for more information.
• While the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display
Performing the setup save operation while the E-CON3 main menu is on the display saves
the contents of the current setup memory area (which were configured using Setup Wizard
or Advanced Setup).
Details on saving a setup are listed below.
u To save a setup
1. If the final Setup Wizard screen is on the display, advance to step 2. If it isn’t, start the
save operation by performing one of the function key operations described below.
✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 3(MEM).
✔ If the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 2(MEM).
• Performing any one of the above operations causes the setup memory list to appear.
• The message “No Setup-MEM” appears if setup memory is empty.
6-2
Using Setup Memory
2. If you are starting from the final Setup Wizard screen, press c(Save Setup-MEM).
If you are starting from another screen, press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.
3. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name.
4. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• If you start from the final Setup Wizard screen, this saves the setup and the message
“Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the final Setup Wizard screen.
• If you start from the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) or the E-CON3 main menu (page
1-1), this saves the setup and returns to the setup memory list which includes the name
you assigned it.
Important!
• Since you assign both a setup name and a file number to each setup, you can assign
the same name to multiple setups, if you want.
k Using and Managing Setups in Setup Memory
All of the setups you save are shown in the setup memory list. After selecting a setup in the
list, you can use it to sample data or you can edit it.
u To preview saved setup data
You can use the following procedure to check the contents of a setup before you use it for
sampling.
1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press K(Setup Preview).
• This displays the preview dialog box.
4. To close the preview dialog box, press J.
6-3
Using Setup Memory
u To recall a setup and use it for sampling
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger.
1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger.
2. Turn on Data Logger power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate Data Logger channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
5. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
6. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
7. Press 1(STRT).
8. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1.
• Pressing w sets up the Data Logger and then starts sampling.
• To clear the confirmation message without sampling, press 6.
Note
• See “Operations during a sampling operation” on page 8-2 for information about
operations you can perform while a sampling operation is in progress.
u To change the name of setup data
1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 3(REN).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.
4. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name, and then press w.
• This changes the setup name and returns to the setup memory list.
6-4
Using Setup Memory
u To delete setup data
1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 4(DEL).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No).
u To recall setup data
Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area. You can then use Advanced
Setup to edit the setup. This capability comes in handy when you need to perform a setup
that is slightly different from one you have stored in memory.
1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 5(LOAD).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to recall the setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without recalling the setup, press 6(No).
Note
• Recalling setup data replaces any other data currently in the current setup memory
area.
7-1
Using Program Converter
7 Using Program Converter
Program Converter converts a Data Logger setup you configured using Setup Wizard or
Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program
Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2
*1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information
about how to use a converted program.
*2 See online help (PROGRAM CONVERTER HELP) for information about supported CFX9850 Series and fx-7400 Series models.
k Converting a Setup to a Program
A setup can be converted to a program when any one of the following conditions exists.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard
See step 8 under “To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup
See step 6 under “To configure a Data Logger setup using Advanced Setup” on page 3-1
for more information.
• While the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display
Performing the program converter operation while the E-CON3 main menu is on the
display converts the contents of the current setup memory area (which were configured
using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup).
The program converter procedure is identical in all of the above cases.
u To convert a setup to a program
1. Start the converter operation by performing one of the key operations described below.
✔ If the final Setup Wizard screen is on the display, press d(Convert Program).
✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 4(PROG).
✔ If the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 3(PROG).
• After you perform any one of the above operations, the program converter screen will
appear on the display.
7-2
Using Program Converter
2. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
Note
Using the program converter initial default settings will create a program like the one
below.
• Associated Scientific Calculator: fx-9860 Series
• Associated Data Logger: EA-200
• Calibration: None
• Password: None
If you want to use these settings the way they are without changing them, skip steps 3
through 7 and go directly to step 8. If you want to change any of the settings, perform the
applicable operations in steps 3 through 7.
3. Specify the scientific calculator model to be associated with the program. Perform one of
the following key operations to associate the program with a scientific calculator.
To associate the program with this calculator:
Perform this key operation:
fx-9860 Series
1(CALC) 1(9860)
CFX-9850 Series
1(CALC) 2(9850)
fx-7400 Series
1(CALC) 3(7400)
• The number part of the scientific calculator model number you specify will appear in line
“F1:” of the program converter screen.
Note
For information about 1(CALC)4(→38K), see “Converting a CFX-9850 Series
Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible Program” (page 7-4).
4. Specify the Data Logger model (EA-100 or EA-200) to be associated with the program.
Perform one of the following key operations to associate the program with a Data Logger.
To associate the program with this Data Logger:
Perform this key operation:
EA-200
2(TYPE) 1(200)
EA-100
2(TYPE) 2(100)
• The number part of the Data Logger model number you specify will appear in line “F2:”
of the program converter screen.
Important!
• Note that the capabilities of the EA-100 and EA-200 are different. Because of this, you
should keep in mind that an EA-200 program converted to an EA-100 program and used
to perform sampling with an EA-100 setup may not produce the desired results.
7-3
Using Program Converter
5. If you plan to use a custom probe connected to CH1 of the Data Logger, specify
whether calibration or zero adjust should be performed. Perform one of the following key
operations to configure the desired setting.
To perform this operation:
Perform this key operation:
Calibration of the CH1 custom probe
3(CALB) 1(CALIB)
Zero adjust of the CH1 custom probe
3(CALB) 2(ZERO)
No calibration
3(CALB) 3(None)
• The operation you specify will appear in line “F3:” of the program converter screen.
6. To password protect the program, press 4(
).
• This will cause the “Password?” prompt and password input field to appear under the
program name input field.
7. Enter up to eight characters for the password.
• If you change your mind about assigning a password, press J here. This will cause
the password input field to disappear and cancel password input.
8. After everything is the way you want, press w to convert the program in accordance with
the setup.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message
and return to the screen that was on the display in step 1, press w or J.
7-4
Using Program Converter
k Converting a CFX-9850 Series Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible
Program
To use an EA-200 control program created on the CFX-9850 Series calculator (for use on
the CFX-9850) on the E-CON3, you need to convert the program to an fx-9860 program.
Conversion can be performed using the program converter.
EA-200 Control Program for
CFX-9850 Series
Convert
EA-200 Control Program for
fx-9860 Series
u To convert a program
1. Transfer the EA-200 control program created for the CFX-9850 Series to the fx-9860
main memory.
• Use the cable that comes bundled with the fx-9860 to connect its 3-pin serial port to the
3-pin serial port of the CFX-9850. For details, see “Chapter 13 Data Communications”.
2. Perform step 1 under “To convert a setup to a program” on page 7-1, which displays the
program converter screen.
3. Press 1(CALC) and then press 4(→38K).
• This displays a list of programs currently in main memory.
4. Use f and c to move the highlighting of the program you want to convert, and then
press 1(EXE) or w.
• A program name input screen will appear after conversion is complete.
5. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
• If you want to password protect the program, perform steps 6 and 7 under “To convert a
setup to a program” after inputting the program name.
6. Press w to start conversion of the program.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message,
press w or J.
8-1
Starting a Sampling Operation
8 Starting a Sampling Operation
The section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON3 Mode to start a Data
Logger sampling operation.
k Before getting started...
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger.
1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger.
2. Turn on Data Logger power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate Data Logger channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
k Starting a Sampling Operation
A sampling operation can be started when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard
See step 8 under “To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2.
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup
See step 6 under “To configure a Data Logger setup using Advanced Setup” on page 3-1.
• While the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display
Starting a sampling operation while the E-CON3 main menu is on the display performs
sampling using the contents of the current setup memory area (which were configured
using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup).
• While the setup memory list is on the display
You can select the setup you want on the setup memory list and then start sampling.
The following procedures explain the first three conditions described above. See “To recall a
setup and use it for sampling” on page 6-3 for information about starting sampling from the
setup memory list.
8-2
Starting a Sampling Operation
u To start sampling
1. Start the sampling operation by performing one of the function key operations described
below.
✔ If the final Setup Wizard screen is on the display, press b(Start Setup).
✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 1(STRT).
✔ If the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 4(STRT).
• After you perform any one of the above operations, a sampling start confirmation screen
like the one shown below will appear on the display.
2. Press w.
• This sets up the Data Logger using the setup data in the current setup memory area.
• The message “Setting Data Logger...” remains on the display while Data Logger setup is
in progress. You can cancel the setup operation any time this message is displayed by
pressing A.
• The screen shown below appears after Data Logger setup is complete.
3. Press w to start sampling.
• The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete
depend on setup details (sampling mode, trigger setup, etc.). For details, see
“Operations during a sampling operation” below.
u Operations during a sampling operation
Sending a sample start command from the calculator to a Data Logger causes the following
sequence to be performed.
Setup Data Transfer → Sampling Start → Sampling End →
Transfer of Sample Data from the Data Logger to the Calculator
The table on the next page shows how the trigger conditions and sensor type specified in the
setup data affects the above sequence.
Clock
Period
Extended
Sound
Normal
Fast
Real-time
Mode
1. Data Logger Setup
Starts Sampling
2. Start Standby
Pressing 1 advances to
“4. Graphing”.
Pressing w there returns to
“3. Sampling”.
• The screen shown below appears when CH1,
SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger.
3. Sampling
1
Outputting through
speaker
w
Sample values is stored as List
data only.
The following three graph types
can be produced when Photogate-Pulley is being used.
1. Time and distance graph
2. Time and velocity graph
• When Number of Samples > 1 3. Time and acceleration graph
• When Number of Samples = 1
w
Input values.
w
w
• When Mode = Sound
Graph screen does not show all sampled values,
but only a partial preview.
Sampled values are saved as
Current Sample Data.
4. Graphing
8-3
Starting a Sampling Operation
9-1
Using Sample Data Memory
9 Using Sample Data Memory
Performing a Data Logger sampling operation from the E-CON3 Mode causes sampled
results to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON3 memory. Separate data is saved
for each channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that
channel’s “current data”.
Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is
replaced by the newly sampled data. If you want to save a set of current data and keep it
from being replaced by a new sampling operation, save the data in sample data memory
under a different file name.
k Managing Sample Data Files
u To save current sample data to a file
1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
Graph Mode Screen
• For details about the Graph Mode screen, see “10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to
Graph Data”.
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
List of current data files
“cd” stands for “current data”. The
text on the right side of the colon
indicates the channel name.
Sampling Data List Screen
9-2
Using Sample Data Memory
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want
to save, and then press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting a data name.
4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number.
5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
The sample data file you save is indicated
on the display using the format:
:.
• If you specify a memory number that is already being used to store a data file, a
confirmation message appears asking if you want to replace the existing file with the
new data file. Press 1 to replace the existing data file, or 6 to return to the memory
number input dialog box in Step 4.
6. To return to the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press J twice.
Note
• You could select another data file besides a current data file in step 3 of the above
procedure and save it under a different memory number. You do not need to change the
file’s name as long as you use a different file number.
9-3
Using Sample Data Memory
u To rename an existing sample data file
Note
• You cannot use this procedure to rename a current data file name.
1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to
rename, and then press 3(REN).
• This displays the screen for inputting a file name.
4. Enter up to 18 characters for the new data file name, and then tap w.
• This returns to the Sampling Data List screen.
5. To return to the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press J twice.
u To delete a sample data file
1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to
delete, and then press 4(DEL).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the data
file.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting the data file, press 6(No).
• This returns to the Sampling Data List screen.
5. To return to the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press J twice.
10-1
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph
Data
Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data.
k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools
You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
u Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the Graph Mode screen, which is
displayed by pressing 5(GRPH) on the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1)
Graph Mode Screen
• The main menu appears after you perform a sampling operation. Press 5(GRPH) at
that time.
• When you access Graph Analysis tools using this method, you can select from among
a variety of other Analysis modes. See “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a
Graph” (page 10-2) for more information about the other Analysis modes.
u Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the screen of a graph drawn after a
sampling operation is executed from the Setup Wizard or from Advanced
Setup (Realtime Mode)
Graph Screen
• In this case, data is graphed after the sampling operation is complete, and the calculator
accesses Graph Analysis tools automatically. See “Graph Screen Key Operations” on
page 11-1.
10-2
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph
This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis
mode to drawing a graph.
Note
• Step 4 through step 6 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any
step automatically applies the initial default values for its settings.
• If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the
top line of the Graph Mode screen.
u To select an analysis mode and draw a graph
1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 3(MODE), and then select the analysis mode you want from the menu that
appears.
To do this:
Perform this menu
operation:
To select this
mode:
Graph three sets of sampled data
simultaneously
[Norm]
Graph Analysis
Graph sampled data along with its first and
second derivative graph
[diff]
d/dt & d2/dt2
Display the graphs of different sampled data
in upper and lower windows for comparison
[CMPR]/[GRPH]
Compare Graph
Output sampled data from the speaker,
displaying graph of the raw data in the upper
window and the output waveform in the lower
window (EA-200 only)
[CMPR]/[Snd]
Compare Sound
Display the graph of sampled data in the
upper window and its first derivative graph in
the lower window
[CMPR]/[d/dt]
Compare d/dt
Display the graph of sampled data in the
upper window and its second derivative
graph in the lower window
[CMPR]/[d2/dt2]
Compare d2/dt2
• The name of the currently selected mode appears in the top line of the Graph Mode
screen.
Analysis mode name
3. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
10-3
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
4. Specify the sampled data for graphing.
a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled
data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASGN) or w.
• This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file
you selected.
Sample data file name
Graph on/off indicator
Name of sensor used for sampling
Graph Mode Screen
b. Repeat step a above to specify sample data files for other graphs, if there are any.
• If you select “Graph Analysis” as the analysis mode in step 2, you must specify sample
data files for three graphs. If you select “Compare Graph” as the analysis mode in step
2, you must specify sample data files for two graphs. With other modes, you need to
specify only one sample data file.
• For details about Sampling Data List screen operations, see “9 Using Sample Data
Memory”.
5. Turn on graphing for each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to select a graph, and then
press 1(SEL) to toggle graphing on or off.
Graphing turned off.
Graphing turned on.
b. Repeat step a to turn each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen on or off.
6. Select the graph style you want to use.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to
the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose style you want to specify, and then press 4(STYL).
This will cause the function menu to change as shown below.
10-4
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want.
To specify this graph style:
Press this key:
Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers
1(
)
2(
)
Line graph with X (×) data markers
3(
)
Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers
4(
)
Scatter graph with square (
5(
)
6(
)
Line graph with square (
) data markers
) data markers
Scatter graph with X (×) data markers
c. Repeat a and b to specify the style for each of the graphs on the Graph Mode screen.
7. On the Graph Mode screen, press 6(DRAW) or w.
• This draws the graph(s) in accordance with the settings you configured in step 2 through
step 6.
Graph Screen
• When a Graph screen is on the display, the function keys provide you with zooming and
other capabilities to aid in graph analysis.
For details about Graph screen function key operations, see the following section.
u To deselect sampled data assigned for graphing on the Graph Mode
screen
1. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to
the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose sampled data you want to deselect.
2. Press 5(DEL).
• This will deselect sample data assigned to the highlighted graph.
11-1
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen
Operations
This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after
drawing a graph.
You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation, or by
the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on page
10-2.
k Graph Screen Key Operations
On the graph screen, you can use the keys described in the table below to analyze (CALC)
graphs by reading data points along the graph (Trace) and enlarging specific parts of the
graph (Zoom).
Key Operation
Description
!1(TRCE)
Displays a trace pointer on the graph along with the coordinates of the
current cursor location. Trace can also be used to obtain the periodic
frequency of a specific range on the graph and assign it to a variable.
See “Using Trace” on page 11-3.
!2(ZOOM)
Starts a zoom operation, which you can use to enlarge or reduce the
size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis. See “Using Zoom” on
page 11-4.
!3(V-WIN)
Displays a function menu of special View Window commands for the
E-CON3 Mode graph screen.
For details about each command, see “Configuring View Window
Parameters” on page 11-14.
!4(SKTCH)
Displays a menu that contains the following commands: Cls, Plot,
F-Line, Text, PEN, Vert, and Hztl. For details about each command,
see “5-10 Changing the Appearance of a Graph” under Chapter 5 of
this manual.
K1(PICT)
Saves the currently displayed graph as a graphic image. You can recall
a saved graph image and overlay it on another graph to compare them.
For details about these procedures, see “5-4 Storing a Graph in Picture
Memory” under Chapter 5 of this manual.
K2(LMEM)
Displays a menu of functions for saving the sample values in a specific
range of a graph to a list. See “Transforming Sampled Data to List
Data” on page 11-5.
K3(EDIT)
Displays a menu of functions for zooming and editing a particular graph
when the graph screen contains multiple graphs. See “Working with
Multiple Graphs” on page 11-10.
11-2
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
Key Operation
Description
K4(CALC)
Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a
function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression
to determine the tendency of a graph. See “Using Fourier Series
Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function” on page 11-6, and
“Performing Regression” on page 11-8.
K5(Y=fx)
Displays the graph function list, which lets you select a Y=f(x) graph to
overlay on the sampled result graph. See “Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph
on a Sampled Result Graph” on page 11-9.
K6(SPKR)
Starts an operation for outputting a specific range of a sound data
waveform graph from the speaker (EA-200 only). See “Outputting a
Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker” on page 11-12.
k Scrolling the Graph Screen
Press the cursor keys while the graph screen is on the display scrolls the graph left, right, up,
or down.
Note
• The cursor keys perform different operations besides scrolling while a trace or graph
operation is in progress. To perform a graph screen scroll operation in this case, press
J to cancel the trace or graph operation, and then press the cursor keys.
11-3
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Using Trace
Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the
current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph.
You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and
assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha-Memory values.
u To use trace
1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRCE).
• This causes a trace pointer to appear on the graph. The coordinates of the current trace
pointer location are also shown on the display.
2. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the trace pointer along the graph to the location
you want.
• The coordinate values change in accordance with the trace pointer movement.
• You can exit the trace pointer at any time by pressing J.
u To obtain the periodic frequency value
1. Use the procedure under “To use trace” above to start a trace operation.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain, and then press w.
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain.
• This causes the period and periodic frequency value at the start point you selected in
step 2 to appear along the bottom of the screen.
11-4
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha-Memory variables.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying variable names for [Period] and [Frequency]
values.
• The initial default variable name settings are “S” for the period and “H” for the periodic
frequency. To change to another variable name, use the up and down cursor keys to
move the highlighting to the item you want to change, and then press the applicable
letter key.
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This stores the values and exits the trace operation.
• For details about using Alpha-Memory, see “Variables (Alpha Memory)” on page 2-7
under Chapter 2 of this manual.
k Using Zoom
Zoom lets you enlarge or reduce the size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis.
Note
• When there are multiple graphs on the screen, the procedure below zooms all of them.
For information about zooming a particular graph when there are multiple graphs on the
screen, see “Working with Multiple Graphs” on page 11-10.
u To zoom the graph screen
1. On the graph screen, press !2(ZOOM).
• This causes a magnifying glass cursor (
) to appear in the center of the screen.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.
11-5
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:
Press this cursor key:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally
e
Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally
d
Enlarge the graph image vertically
f
Reduce the size of the graph image vertically
c
4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
k Transforming Sampled Data to List Data
Use the following procedure to transform the sampled data in a specific range of a graph into
list data.
u To transform sampled data to list data
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 2(LMEM).
• This displays the [LMEM] menu.
2. Press 2(SEL).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to convert to list data, and
then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to convert to list data, and
then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the lists where you want to store the time data
and the sampled data.
/
• The initial default lists are List 1 for the time and List 2 for sample data. To change to
another list (List 1 to List 26), use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the list you want to change, and then input the applicable list number.
11-6
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the
graph screen.
• For details about using list data, see “Chapter 3 List Function”.
Note
• Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SEL) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In
this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
k Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a
Function
Fourier series expansion is effective for studying sounds by expressing them as functions.
The procedure below assumes that there is a graph of sampled sound data already on the
graph screen.
u To perform Fourier series expansion
1. On the graph screen , press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The [CALC] menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 1(Furie).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the graph range.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform
Fourier series expansion, and then press w.
11-7
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier
series expansion, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series.
/
5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of the Fourier series.
6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
• The graph function list appears with the calculation result.
7. Pressing 6(DRAW) here graphs the function.
• This lets you compare the expanded function graph and the original graph to see if they
are the same.
Note
When you press 6(DRAW) in step 7, the graph of the result of the Fourier series
expansion may not align correctly with the original graph on which it is overlaid. If this
happens, shift the position the original graph to align it with the overlaid graph.
For information about how to move the original graph, see “To move a particular graph on
a multi-graph display” (page 11-12).
11-8
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Performing Regression
You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace
pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic,
Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic.
For details about these regression types, see page 6-12 through 6-14 under Chapter 6 of
this manual.
The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression. The same general
steps can also be used to perform the other types of regression.
u To perform quadratic regression
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The [CALC] menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 5(X^2).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
• This displays the quadratic regression calculation result screen.
11-9
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. Press 6(DRAW).
• This draws a quadratic regression graph and overlays it over the original graph.
• To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then
1(Cls).
k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph
Use the following procedure when you want to overlay a Y=f(x) graph on the sampled result
graph.
u To overlay a Y=f(x) graph on an existing graph
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 5(Y=fx).
• This displays the graph function list. Any functions you have previously input on the
graph function list appear at this time.
2. Input the function you want to graph.
• To input a function, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the line
where you want to input it, and then use the calculator keys for input. Press w to store
the function.
3. On the graph function list, specify which functions you want to graph.
• Graphing is turned on for any function whose “=” symbol is highlighted. To toggle
graphing of a function on or off, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the function, and then press 1(SEL).
11-10
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
4. After the graph function list settings are configured the way you want, press 6(DRAW).
• This overlays graphs of all the functions for which graphing is turned on, over the graph
that was originally on the graph screen.
/
Original Graph
Overlaid with Y=f(x) Graph
• To delete the overlaid graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls).
Important!
• The screenshot shown in step 4 above is of a function that was calculated and stored
by performing regression on a graph that was drawn using sampled data. Note that
overlaying a Y=f(x) graph on a sampled data graph does not automatically draw a
regression graph based on sampled data.
k Working with Multiple Graphs
The procedures in this section explain how you can zoom or move a particular graph when
there are multiple graphs on the display.
u To zoom a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• The [EDIT] menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 1(ZOOM).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen.
11-11
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear, along with a
magnifying glass cursor ( ) in the center of the screen.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.
5. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:
Press this cursor key:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally
e
Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally
d
Enlarge the graph image vertically
f
Reduce the size of the graph image vertically
c
/
6. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
11-12
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
u To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• This displays the [EDIT] menu.
2. Press 2(MOVE).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear.
4. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the graph left and right, or the f and c
cursor keys to move the graph up and down.
/
5. To exit the move mode, press J.
k Outputting a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker
(EA-200 only)
Use the following procedure to output a specific range of a sound data waveform graph from
the speaker.
u To output a graph from the speaker
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 6(SPKR).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
11-13
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.
/
4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is,
specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one octave, input a value of 200%. To
lower the original sound by one octave, input a value of 50%.
5. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200
speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
6. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
7. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown below.
8. If you want to retry output from the speaker, press 1(Yes). To exit the procedure and
return to the graph screen, press 6(No).
• Pressing 1(Yes) returns to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. From there, repeat the
above steps from step 4.
11-14
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Configuring View Window Parameters
Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View
Window function key menu along the bottom of the display.
Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to
configure.
Function Key
Description
1(Auto)
Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
Y-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size
X-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size when 1 data item
equals 1 dot; 1 data equals 1 dot in other cases
2(FULL)
Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen.
3(Y)
Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen along the Y-axis, without
changing the X-axis dimensions.
4(UNIT)
Specifies the unit of the numeric axis grid displayed by the Econ Axes
setting of the graph setup screen (page 3-13).
1(μ sec): microseconds
2(msec): milliseconds
3(sec): seconds
4(DHMS) : days, hours, minutes, seconds (1 day, 2 hours, 30 minutes,
5 seconds = 1d2h30m5s)
5(Auto): Auto selection
5(CHNG)
Toggles display of the source data on the graph screen on and off.
To exit the View Window function key menu and return to the standard function key menu,
press J.
12-1
Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity
12 Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity
You can call E-CON3 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity
file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips.
u Econ SetupWizard strip
This strip calls the E-CON3 Setup Wizard. The Econ Setup Wizard strip makes it
possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: Data Logger
setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
Note
• In the case of the Econ SetupWizard strip, the “3: Convert Program” is not available
on the “Complete!” dialog box.
u Econ AdvancedSetup strip
This strip calls the E-CON3 Advanced Setup screen. The Advanced Setup provides
access to almost all executable functions (except for the program converter),
including detailed Data Logger setup and sampling execution; graphing and
Graph Analysis Tools; simultaneous sampling with multiple sensors using the
MULTIMETER Mode, etc.
Note
• Using an Econ Advanced Setup strip to configure a setup causes the setup
information to be registered in the applicable strip. This means that the next time
you open the strip, sampling can be performed in accordance with the previously
configured setup information.
u Econ Sampling strip
This strip executes Data Logger measurement. To store Data Logger setup
information for this strip, perform the Econ Advance Setup operation the first time the
strip is executed.
u Econ Graph strip
This strip graphs sampled data that is recorded in the strip. The sampled data is
recorded to the strip the first time the strip is executed.
u Econ Strip Memory Capacity Precautions
• The memory capacity of each Econ strip is 25 KB. An error will occur if you perform
an operation that causes this capacity to be exceeded. Particular care is required
when handling a large number of samples, which can cause memory capacity to be
exceeded.
• Always make sure that FFT Graph is turned off whenever performing sampling
with the microphone. Leaving FFT Graph turned on cause memory capacity to be
exceeded.
• If an error occurs, press !a(
perform the procedure again.
) to return to the eActivity workspace screen and
• For information about checking the memory usage of each strip, see “10-5 eActivity
File Memory Usage Screen” under Chapter 10 of this manual.
For details about eActivity operations, see “Chapter 10 eActivity” under Chapter 10 of this
manual.
Manufacturer:
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
Responsible within the European Union:
Casio Europe GmbH
Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany
www.casio-europe.com
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
SA1512-B
© 2014 CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Print high-res Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-701 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows) Creator Tool : Adobe InDesign CS4 (6.0.5) Modify Date : 2015:12:07 10:30:53+09:00 Create Date : 2015:11:10 19:03:16+09:00 Metadata Date : 2015:12:07 10:30:53+09:00 Format : application/pdf Title : fx-9860GII SD_9860GII_9860G AU PLUS_9750GII_7400GII Creator : CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. Document ID : uuid:41243440-95ea-458d-9dc0-2a05644a30ac Instance ID : uuid:29ca1e06-9c82-11e5-a729-0016cb38804c Has XFA : No Page Count : 473 Page Layout : OneColumn Author : CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools